.-•  ^■'-;:i^^:.:?'*t'^^^<*;':'  '■>-^^^^-vJV''r^;:-^,|<i:^i'.-^!^^      '-'  - ;  '^^ 


PRINCETON,    N.    J. 


% 


5/5^//. 


Division 

Section 

Number 


xsion ^..TiJtUV.  M^.-?*^ 


l2mo,  cloth.     $1.50. 


-A.N 


ELEMENTARY 


HEBKEW  GEAMMAR, 


WITH 


g^aiing  u\  Mritiitg  f  ^55011$  anb  $j0cal)ulari£5, 


BY 

WILLIAM  HENRY  %EEEN, 

PROFESSOn    IN    THE    THEOLOGICAL    SEMINARY    AT    PlilNCETOX,    NEW    JERSEY. 


SECOND  THOROUGHLY  REVISED  EDITION. 


NEW   YORK: 
JOHN    WILEY    &    SON, 


15  ASTOR  PLACE. 

1872. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1871, 

By  WILLIAM  HENRY  GREEN, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


This  brief  Manual  has  been  prepared  witli  special 
reference  to  the  wants  of  beginners.  The  essential 
facts  of  the  language  are  concisely  stated,  without  the 
encumbrance  of  minute  details,  which  would  confuse 
their  minds  and  impede  their  progress,  and  which  be- 
long j^roperly  to  a  more  advanced  stage  of  study. 
The  tabular  form  has  been  adopted  to  as  great  an 
extent  as  possible,  in  order  to  exhibit  to  the  eye  what- 
ever is  capable  of  such  a  mode  of  representation. 
The  Eeading  Exercises,  which  are  of  the  simplest  kind, 
have  been  carefully  selected  with  a  view  to  illustrate 
the  forms  and  uses  of  different  parts  of  speech,  and 
esj)ecially  the  various  classes  of  perfect  and  imperfect 
verbs ;  and  they  are  accompanied  by  a  special  Voca- 
bulary. 

It  will,  as  is  hoped,  meet  the  wants  of  non-profes- 
sional students  who  seek  a  general  knowledge  of  this 
venerable  and  sacred  touOTe  rather  than  a  thorouo^h 
acquaintance  with  it,  and  who  might  be  repelled  by  a 
larger  and   more   costly   apparatus.      It   is   sufficiently 


IV  PREFACE. 

simple  for  private  study,  as  well  as  adapted  for  use  in 
schools  and  colleges  where  facilities  are  offered  for  the 
acquisition  of  the  Hebrew.  The  author  will  be  re- 
joiced if  this  humble  volume  should  tend  in  any  way 
to  a  more  extended  familiarity  with  the  original  lan- 
guage of  the  Old  Testament  among  intelligent  and 
liberally  educated  laymen. 

Pren'Ceton,  August  23,  1866. 


PREFACE 

TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION 


The  Grammar  Las  been  entirely  rewritten,  with  a  view 
to  adapt  it  move  fully  to  tlie  wants  of  those  for  whom  it 
is  intended.  In  doing  tins,  the  writer  has  had  the  benefit 
of  practical  suggestions  from  some  of  the  best  Hebrew 
teachers  in  various  parts  of  the  country,  among  whom  he 
is  particularly  indebted  to  Prof.  Hoyt,  of  Ohio  Wesleyan 
University,  Delaware,  Ohio.  The  paradigms  are,  as  in 
the  pre^dous  edition,  combined  together  in  Grrammatical 
Tables,  which  afford  a  complete  survey  of  all  the  forms 
of  the  language.  But  for  the  greater  convenience  of  the 
student  a  number  of  the  paradigms  are  inserted  in  the 
text  of  the  Grammar  likewise,  and  in  some  of  the  earlier 
of  these  the  pronunciation  is  also  given  in  Eoman  letters, 
to  relieve  the  labor,  and  prevent  the  mistakes  incident  to 
an  imperfect  acquaintance  with  the  characters.  A  more 
complete  system  of  exercises  both  in  Hebrew  reading 
and  composition  has  been  provided  throughout,  and  the 
greatest  pains  have  been  taken  to  make  them  stiictly 
progressive  in  their  character.  No  grammatical  form  or 
construction  is  admitted  into  the  lessons  until  tliis  has 


VI  PREFACE    TO    THE    SECONB    EDITION. 

first  been  explained.  In  the  ortliograpliy  these  exercises 
are  inserted  in  the  text  of  the  Grammar  in  order  that  the 
eye  of  the  stndent,  perplexed  by  the  strange  forms  of 
unfamiliar  characters,  may  readily  pass  from  the  rules  or 
principles  to  their  application.  The  exercises  in  trans- 
lation, whether  from  Hebrew  into  English  or  from  Eng- 
lish into  Hebrew,  are,  as  in  the  former  edition,  removed 
to  the  end  of  the  volume.  A  special  vocabulary,  num- 
bered to  correspond  with  each  successive  lesson,  contains 
all  words  not  previously  learned,  while  their  separation 
upon  different  j)ages  is  designed  to  counteract  the  temj)- 
tation  to  negligence,  which  would  arise  from  having 
these  significations  before  the  eye  in  the  very  act  of 
recitation.  It  is  assumed  that  all  words  are  mastered  as 
the  student  proceeds,  so  that  they  are  never  repeated  in 
the  special  vocabularies.  General  vocabularies  follow 
both  Hebrew-English  and  English-Hebrev/,  which  con- 
tain every  word  to  be  found  in  any  of  the  lessons.  The 
principles  of  Syntax  successively  illustrated  in  the 
lessons,  or  necessary  to  be  known  in  order  to  their  j)ro23er 
understanding,  are  supplied  in  accompanying  Remarks  or 
Directions.  The  learner  is  thus  gradually  familiarized 
with  the  practical  application  of  nearly  all  the  important 
principles  of  Syntax  before  he  comes  to  study  them 
together  in  systematic  order. 
Princeton,  October  11,  1871. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

ORTnOGRAPHY. 

§  1.  The  Letters 1 

§  2.  Their  Classification 3 

^  3.   The  Vowel-Letters 5 

§  4.   The  Vowel-Points 5 

§5.  ShVa 6 

§  6.  Pattahh-furtive 7 

§  7.  Quiescence    of    the    Vowel- 
Letters  8 

§  8.  Scriptio  plena  and  defectiva  9 

§9.   SyUables 10 

§  10.   Resulting  Vowel-changes.  . .  12 
§  11.  Kamets     and     Kamets-Hha- 

tuph 13 

§  12.  Daghesh-lene 14 

§  13.   Daghesh-f orte 15 

§  14.  Mappik 15 

§  15.  Raphe 16 

§16.   Accents 16 

§  17.  Position  of  the  Accent 17 

§  18.  Recession  of  the  Accent. ...  18 

§  19,  Pause  Accents 18 

§  20.  Consecution  of  Accents 19 

§  21.  Makkeph 20 

§  22.  Methegh 20 

§  23.  K'ri  and  K'thibh 21 

Etymology. 

§  24.  Prefixed  Particles 23 

§  25.  The  Article 23 

§  26.  He  Interrogative 24 

§  27.  Inseparable  Prepositions ....  25 

§  28.  Vav  Conjunctive 25 

§  29.  Personal  Pronouns 26 

§  30.  Other  Pronouns 28 


PAGE 

§  31.  Verbs.     Their  Species 29 

§  32.  Perfect  Verbs 30 

§  33.  Kal  Preterite  and  Infinitives  31 
§  34.  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Pre- 
terites and  Infinitives ....  32 
§  35.   The  remaining  Preterites  and 

Infinitives 34 

§  36.  Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and 

Participles 35 

§  37.  Niphal,   Piel,  and  Pual   Fu- 
tures, etc 37 

§  38.  Hiphil,    Hophal,    and  Hith- 

pael  Futures,  etc 39 

§  39.  Peculiar  Forms 40 

§  40.  Paragogic    and     Apocopated 

Future  and  Imperative. . .  41 

§  41.   Vav  Conversive 42 

§  42.  Verbs  with  Suffixes 43 

§  43.  Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns  45 

§  44.  Feminine,  Dual,    and  Plural  46 
§  45.  Dual  and  Plural  in  Feminine 

Nouns 49 

§  46.  Construct  State 50 

§  47,   Its  Formation 51 

§  48.  Paragogic  Vowela 53 

g  49.  Nouns  with  Suffixes 53 

§  50.  Irregular  Nouns 55 

§  51.  Imperfect  Verbs 56 

§  52.  Guttural  Verbs 57 

g  53.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs 57 

§  54.  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs 58 

§  55,  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs 59 

§56.  Pe  Nun  Verbs 60 

§  57.  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs 61 

§58.  PeYodh  Verbs 63 


VIU 


CONTENTS. 


Page 
§  59.  Ayin  Vav    and    Ayin  Yodh 

Verbs 64 

§  60.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs 65 

§  61.  Lamedh  He  Verbs 66 

§  62.  Doubly  Imperfect  Verbs 68 

§  63.  Unusual  Forms 68 

§  64.  Quadriliteral  Verbs 69 

§  65.  Numerals 69 

g  66.  Separate  Particles 70 

Syntax. 

§  67.  The  Copula. 71 

§68.  The  Article 71 

§  69.  Nouns  definite   without  the 

Article 72 

§  70.  Adjectives 72 

§  71 .  Demonstrative  Pronouns. ...  72 

§  73.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. . .  73 

§  73.  Numerals 73 

§  74.  Apposition 74 

§  75.  The  Construct  State 74 

§  76.  Tenses  of  Verbs 75 

§77.  The  Preterite 75 

§  78.   The  Future 76 

§  79.  The  Secondary  Tenses 77 

§  80.  Participles 77 

§81.   The  Infinitive 78 

§  82.  Object  of  Verbs. 78 

§  83.  Verbs  with  more  than  one 

Object 79 

§  84.  Adverbial  Expressions 79 

§  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement 79 

§  88.  Compound  Subject 80 

§  87.  Repetition  of  Words. 81 

§  88.  Relative  Pronouns 81 

§  89.  Conjunctions 81 


PAGE 

Grammatical  Tables. 

I.   The  Letters 83 

II.   Classification  of  the   Let- 
ters.    The  Points 84 

IIL   The  Accents 85 

IV.  Inseparable      Prepositions 

and  other  Prefixes 86 

V.  Pronouns.        Verbs,    their 

Species 87 

VL  Paradigm  of  Perfect  Verbs,     88 
VII.  Paradigm   of  the    Perfect 

Verbs  with  Suffixes 90 

VIII.  Paradigm   of  Pe   Guttural 

Verbs 92 

IX.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Guttural 

Verbs 93 

X.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Gut- 
tural Verbs 94 

XI.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs     95 
XII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Doubled 

Verbs 96 

XIII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Vav  and 

Ayin  Yodh  Verbs 98 

XIV.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Yodh  Verbs  100 
XV.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Aleph 

Verbs 101 

XVI.  Paradigm   of   Lamedh   He 

Verbs 102 

XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns 104 

XVIII.   Paradigm   of   Nouns   with 

Suffixes 107 

XIX.  Numerals 108 

XX.  Consecution  of  Accents .. .   109 

Lessons  in  Reading  Hebrew..  Ill 
Lessons  in  Writing  Hebrew.  . .  137 
Hebrew-English  Vocabulary.  .  175 
English-Hebrew  Vocabulary  . .  185 


"■-"•1 


StCSEP  I  WO 

ELEMENTARY  HO'REf  GRAMMAR 


OETHOGEAPHY. 


1.     The  Letters. 


1.  The  Hebrew  lias  twenty-two  letters ;  tliese  are  all 
consonants,  and  are  written  from  right  to  left. 


1.  Alepli 

2.  Beth 

X 

12. 
13. 

Lamedh 
Mem 

b 

T. 

n 

Bli, 

B 

D  )2 

M 

3.  Gl'mel 

0^ 

Gh, 

G 

14. 

Nim 

)    3 

N 

4.  Daleth 

n 

Dh, 

D 

15. 

Sii'mekh 

0 

S 

5.  He 

6.  Yiiv 

n 

H 

16. 
17. 

AViii 
Pe 

5? 

\ 

1 

V 

Pli, 

P 

7.  Za'yin 

T 

z 

18. 

Tsa'dhe 

r  =^ 

Ts 

8.  Hheth 

n 

Hh 

19. 

Koj^h 

p 

K 

0.  Tetli 

t3 

T 

20. 

Eesh 

n 

E 

10.  Yodh 

1 

Y 

21. 

Shin 

10 

Sli, 

S 

11.  Kaph 

13 

Kh, 

K 

22. 

Tav 

n 

Til, 

T. 

a.  For  the  proper  pronunciation  of  tlie  vowels  occurring-  in  the  names  of  the 
letters,  see  §  4.  1.  a. 

2.  There  are  two  letters,  for  which  no  equivalent  is 
given  in  the  preceding  talde;  x  like  the  English  h  in 
liouv  or  the  smooth  breathini^  in  Greek  had  no  sound;  5? 
had  a  strong  guttural  sound,  but  one  which  it  is  so  diffi- 
cult to  make,  that  it  is  commonly  neglected  in  reading. 
1 


2  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  1. 

3.  For  seven  of  the  letters  two  equivalents  are  given. 
Tlius,  the  six  aspirates  have  also  an  unasj)irated  sound, 
which  is  indicated  by  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter, 
§  12;  12  is  hli  or  v  and  ^  h ;  "^  cjli^  I  g  j  "s  dh  as  th  in  iJie^ 
"H  d ^  D  IcJb  as  the  German  cli  in  iclt^  "^  hj  S  79A  or  f^  S^.)/ 
n  th  as  in  thin^  r\  t.  As,  however,  there  are  no  sounds 
in  English  corresponding  to  gli  and  IcJi^  ^  may  be  pro- 
nounced g  like  5 ,  and  D  h  like  3 .  The  letter  TiJ  Anth  a 
dot  over  its  right  arm  has  the  sound  of  sh^  and  is  called 
Siiln;  iu  witli  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Sln^  and 
is  pronounced  like  s. 

4.  In  tliree  instances  two  letters  have  the  same  equi- 
valent; thus  "^  and  r\  are  represented  hj  t^  5  and  p  by 
Ic^  D  and  i^  ])y  s.  These  letters,  though  pronounced 
alike  by  us,  are  nevertheless  quite  distinct  and  must  not 
be  confounded. 

5.  )i  and  22  require  a  doubled  letter  or  two  letters 
combined  to  represent  them;  n  is  the  simple  A,  ri  has  a 
stronger  sound  as  of  rasping  the  throat,  and  is  represent- 
ed by  liJi  /  2  is  ts  in  sits. 

6.  Fire  of  the  letters  have  two  forms ;  D  ,  "a  ,  2  ,  s ,  1 
(combined  in  the  memorial  word  fi??^!?  Mmnarppets^  are 
used  in  the  beirinnino^  or  in  the  middle  of  words ;  at  the 
end  of  Avords  the  bottom  stroke  is  bent  downward,  1,1, 
?1  ,  f  ,  or  the  letter  closed  up,  D. 


EXERCISE  1. 

Hebrew  words  must  never  be  divided  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

Write  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  in  their  order,  with 
theii'  names  and  equivalents. 

Write  the  following  words  or  combinations  of  letters, 
placing  under  each  its  equivalent: — 


§  2.  LETTERS.  3 

Pe-gimel  Nun-samekli-kapli  Sin-teth-nim  Ayln-daletb 
Kapli-lamedli  Yodli-mem-yodli  He-alepli-resli-tsadlie  Za 
yin-resli-ayiu  Kopli-tsadlie-yodli-resli  Hlietli-mem  Hlietli- 
resli-pe  Lamedti-alepli  Yodh-sliin-betli-tav-vav. 

Name  tlie  letters  in  Genesis  i.  1-3  on  j)age  ,  and  give 
tlie  equivalent  of  eacli. 


§  2.     Their   Classification, 

The  letters  may  be  divided, 

1.  First,  with  respect  to  the  organs  by  which  they  are 
j)i'onounced,  into  ^\'Q  classes,  viz..  Gutturals  or  those 
^vhich  represent  a  sound  produced  in  the  throat ;  Palatals 
formed  by  j^ressing  the  root  of  the  tongue  against  the 
130sterior  roof  of  the  mouth ;  Linguals  formed  by  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  in  contact  with  the  anterior  roof  of  the 
mouth;  Dentals  formed  by  the  air  driven  against  the 
teeth ;  and.  Labials  formed  by  the  lips. 


Gutturals    i5 

n 

n 

5? 

(2^nr.s^ 

aMiJut) 

Palatals       ^ 

1 

D 

P 

(P?^1 

gihliah) 

Linguals      ^ 

t: 

b 

5    n 

(i^.r.^P^ 

clatlenetli) 

Dentals        T 

D 

2S 

in 

(OCT 

zastsaslh) 

Labials        3 

1 

^ 

s 

(rj^^n 

huma/pli) 

"I  though  not  properly  a  guttural  may  be  classed  with 
them,  as  it  partakes  of  their  peculiarities. 

2.  Secondly,  into  weak,  medium,  and  strong.  The 
weak  consonants  suifer  or  occasion  frequent  changes  in 
the  formation  and  inflection  of  words.  The  strong  con- 
sonants are  capable  of  entering  without  change  into  any 
combinations   which   analogy   may  require.      Those   of 


4  OETIIOGRAPHY.  §  2. 

medium  strengtli  are  neither  so  stable  as  the  latter,  nor 
so  feeble  and  lluctnating  as  tlie  former. 


Weak 

{: 

n 
n 

1 
n 

"^  Vowel-Letters. 
y  Gutturals. 

Medium 

12 

D 

3 

1  Liquids. 
12?   Sibilants. 

1 

Strong 

D 

p\ 

>  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 

n 

^  . 

) 

3.  Thirdly,  with  respect  to  the  function  which  they 
perform  in  the  constitution  of  words,  into  radicals  and 
serviles.  The  former,  which  comprise  just  one-half  of 
the  alpliabet,  are  only  used  in  the  roots  or  radical  j)ortions 
of  words.  The  latter,  though  they  may  also  enter  into 
roots,  are  likewise  employed  in  the  inflection  of  Avords, 
and  the  formation  of  derivatives,  in  prefixes  and  sufiixes. 
The  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial  words  'jn'ix 
nbDi  ntnia  {etlidn  moslie  v'hlielebli^  Ethan,  Moses,  and 
Caleb).     All  the  other  letters  are  radicals,  viz.  ;^  ,  "7  ,  T  , 

EXERCISE  2. 

Write  the  letters  of  each  class  with  their  names  and 
equivalents. 

Write  the  following  letters,  and  indicate  the  class  to 
which  each  belongs  in  respect  of  organ,  strength,  and 
function : — 

Aleph,  Lamedh,  He,  Shin,  Mem,  Vav,  Tav,  Beth,  Nun, 
Yodh,  Gimel,  Daleth,  Eesh,  Tsadhe,  Ayin,  Koph,  Kaph^ 
Samekh,  Pe,  Zayin,  Hheth,  Teth. 


;§  3,  4.  VOWELS. 


§  3.     The   Void  el-Letters. 

There  were  originally  no  separate  signs  for  tlie  vowels 
m  Hebrew.  They  were  either  not  written  at  all,  or 
when  it  was  thought  necessary  to  express  them,  the 
vowel-letters  ('^j^fi^  eli^vi)  were  employed  for  this  pur- 
pose. Thus  ''  was  used  to  signify  not  only  y  but  also  I 
and  e;  ^  stood  for  b  and  it;  ^  or  n  for  <2,  and  in  some 
cases  for  e  oy  o ;  e  was  also  sometimes  represeiited  by  ■• 
or  n ;  the  other  short  vowels  were  scarcely  ever  written. 
Thus  r^  l>'^n  or  hm;  Dip  him  or  hiun;  nb:\  gdld.,  cjdlb^  f/U 
or  gole  j  T\Ty^T\  i sliiihlimd, 

§  4.     The   Voioel-Foints. 

1.  After  the  Hebrew  ceased  to  be  spoken,  a  more  com 
plete  method  of  writing  the  vowels  was  needed,  in  order 
to  indicate  the  exact  pronunciation  of  words.  With  this 
view  the  vowel-points  were  invented.  Of  tliese  three 
represent  long,  three  short,  and  three  douljtful  vowels. 


Long  Vowels. 

Short  Vowels. 

Doubtful  Vowels. 

Ka'mets      _     a 

Pat'tahh                _  a 

Ilhi'i-ik   _      I  or  ^ 

Tse're         _      e 

Se'gliOl                    _  e 

SUu'rek     ^   ] 

Hho'lem    -^      0 

Kainets-Iilirituph_  o 

Ivibbuts-    j 

a.  The  vowel  a  is  pronounced  as  va.  father,  a  as  m.  fat,  e  as  in  there.,  e  as  in  met^ 
I  as  in  machine,  ^  as  in  'pin,  o  as  in  note,  o  as  in  not,  u  as  in  rule,  u  as  in  full. 
The  quantity  will  be  marked  when  the  words  are  long,  but  not  when  they  are 
short. 

2.  All  the  vowels  are  written  under  the  letter  after 
which  they  are  23ronounced,  except  two,  viz.  Hholem  and 
Shurek. 

3.  Hholem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the  letter  to 


6  OKTHOGRAPIIY.  §  5. 

wliicli  it  belongs.  When  followed  by  t»  or  jireceded  by 
to  it  coincides  witli  tlie  diacritical  point  over  tlie  lettei 
e.  g.  r.i;^  /iidsJie,  5<:to  sane;  when  it  follows  tj  or  precedes 
to  it  is  written  over  its  opposite  arm  e.  g.  ^^to  ,  ii'snn  tirj)ds. 
Accordingly^,  if  an  unpointed  consonant  precede  (i.  e.  one 
without  a  voAvel  or  ShVa,  §  5)  to  will  be  ash  and  to  as;  if 
it  have  itself  no  other  vowel  point  to  will  be  so  and  to  sJu\ 
except  at  the  end  of  words. 

4.  Shurek  is  a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Vav. 
When  there  is  a  1  in  the  text,  the  vowel  u,  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  1  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 

EXERCISE  3. 

The  place  of  Aleph  will  be  indicated  in  this  and  in  following  exercises  by  *,  and 
that  of  Ayin.  by  f.  Teth,  Koph,  and  Sia  will  be  denoted  by  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  t,  k,  s. 

Write  the  long,  short,  and  doubtful  vowels  with  their 
names  and  equivalents. 

Write :  Zahabh,  lehhem,  r£ibh,  yet,  kliol,  kol,  kliamus, 
famal,  me*oyebh,  shovel,  solcth,  fim,  *eth,  bhayith, 
shorashim,  yaruts,  shophet,  shillosh,  soraph,  l3h(3s>5m. 

Read  the  following  words,  and  give  the  names  and 
equivalents  of  the  vowels  which  they  contain. 

,  nirf;    ,  b-r^a  ,  ^nt:.^  ,  nbto   ,  'in    ,  nbto   ,  i^Sn    ,  p_    ,  ^b^ 

.  ^tj]?   ,  n'tobto   ,  Ds:   ,  -T?'"-   ,  'pn'-'^   ,  pSto  ,  itoi  ,  nir5? 

*  Kamets-IIhatuph. 

§  5.      Sliva. 

1,  Sh'va  —  is  placed  under  vowelless  consonants  to 
inc  icate  the  absence  of  a  vowel,  e.  g.  ^'Fi^b'a'a  mamlaklitis 


§6. 

At  the  end  of  words,  liowever,  it  is  omitted :  ba  (not  ^^) 
lal^  'y^t  (not  "iro  )  soger^  unless  the  hist  letter  is  1  ,  or  is 
immediately  preceded  by  another  vo^\^elless  letter,  or  is 
doubled  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  13,  t^fq  melekli^  tpirp  l:,bslit^ 
T\-^_  att. 

2.  When  a  syllaljle  begins  with  two  consonants  a  slight 
sound  is  heard  between  them,  as  in  English  l)etween  the 
last  two  consonants  of  giu^ n^  lieav'n;  thus  ^\p^  p^hbdh^  ^"i2i 
Vrii^  not  hrii.  Sh'va  is,  therefore,  said  to  be  silent  at  the 
end  of  syllables,  but  vocal  at  the  l^eginning. 

3.  Sometimes,  particularly  after  the  gutturals,  this  tran- 
sition sound  resembles  an  extremely  short  a^  e,  or  o.  It  is 
then  represented  l)y  the  compound  ShVas,  which  are 
formed  by  combining  the  sign  for  simple  Sh'va  already 
explained  with  that  for  Pattahh,  Seghol,  or  Kamets- 
IJhatu23h,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Compound  j  Hliatepli-Pattalih  ^  ;  tlnis  5nn    l^roglv. 
Sh'vas      j  ffhateph-beghol    -^. ;  thus  ni^n  h^ydth, 
I  Hhateph-Kamets  —  ;  thus  "hn    liliHl. 


§  G.     PattaliJh-fartive. 

Pattahh-furtive  is  a  scarcely  audil)le  a^  which  steals  in 
before  the  letter  under  which  it  is  written.  It  occurs 
witli  3?,  n  or  the  consoviant  ?i  at  the  end  of  words, 
^vhen  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  other  than  <7,  or  followed 
by  another  vowelless  consonant,  r^i?  gdhli(J%  ri^njib 
IdlaC'lilit     Comp.  in  English  j^r<?,  pronounced  j^'^r. 

EXERCISE  4. 

Write  the  different  ShVas  and  Pattahh-furtive  with 
their  names  and  ecpiivaleuts. 


8  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  7. 

Write  tlie  following  words,  and  wherever  Pattalili 
furtive  lias  been  improperly  omitted,  make  tlie  requisite 
correction : 

Sli'niiyim,  th'nu,  y'dhekliem,  li'ragliam,  y'liosliii^f,  ^ic''ioil, 
mof  "madh,  kllc4.^^sller,  milhliamotli,  bli'simliliathkliem,  le*^- 
khol,  z'blnil,  yiVf^leku,  samehli,  s'bliibkotliityikh,  rakif, 
dli  gMth,  yest. 


§    7.     Quiescence   of  tlie    Vow  el- Letters, 

1.  The  vowel-points  above  descril^ed  were  attached  to 
the  sacred  text  without  any  cliange  in  its  letters.  Con- 
sequently every  vowel,  which  had  previously  been  indi- 
cated by  a  vowel-letter,  was  now  denoted  both  by  that 
and  by  the  sign  subsequently  added.  In  all  such  cases 
the  letter  is  said  to  quiesce  in  the  vowel,  that  is,  it  has 
not  its  consonant  sound,  but  the  vowel-sound  represented 
by  the  accompanying  or  preceding  point.  Thus  in  nin 
Vav  stands  not  for  v  but  for  6^  and  the  word  is  read  lor; 
in  nb5  ,  n  represents  not  li  but  a^  and  the  word  is  gcdd. 

2.  At  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word  tlie 
letters  K  n  l  "^  are  consonants,  if  they  are  followed  by 
a  vowel  or  a  ShVa;  if  not  so  followed,  they  are  quies- 
cent: rilb  Idve^  i"^to  s'eyb^  but  Wd  mot,  r&ix  heth. 

3.  At  the  end  of  Avords  1  is  quiescent  when  preceded 
by  6  or  ??,  and  "^  Avhen  preceded  l)y  e  or  I;  but  they  are 
consonants  if  preceded  by  any  other  vowel  sign,  ^n  hlie, 
''a  hi,  but  ^Ti  hJtay,  "^15  g(')y. 

Final  n  is  quiescent,  unless  it  has  Majipik,  §  14,  ni^^i^ 
artsd,  but  •^'?';i^  artsdli. 

Final  i<  is  invariably  quiescent,  if  a  vowel  precedes: 
jsb  lo^  xn  l)d;  "but  if  a  vowelless  consonant  precedes,  it  is 
termed  otiant:  i^i^  vayyar. 


§  8.  VOWEL-LETTERS.  9 

a.  It  may  be  observed  that  s  quiesces  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  where  it  is  not 
properly  a  vowel-letter,  which,  in  fact,  it  rarely  is.  Its  feebleness  is  such  that  it 
scarcely  ever  terminates  a  mixed  syllable.  Such  forms  as  f|?2"'hNi  do  occur;  but 
jv^  mostly  loses  its  consonantal  power  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  whatever  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  may  be.  Yodh  similarly  gives  up  its  consonantal  character  in  the 
termination    i-i    ,    or  at   least   is  neglected  in   the   pronunciation,  thus    T^'-ii't! 


EXERCISE  5. 

Pronounce  tlie  following  w^ords,  and  apply  tlie  rules 
for  the  quiescence  of  the  vovf el-letters. 

^  The  Shurek  is  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  i ,  and  X  is  quiescent.  ^  'is7i.,  not 
ipdsh.  ^  The  Hholem  belongs  not  to  the  T ,  which  has  Sh'va,  but  to  the  1 ;  the 
word  is  hence  to  be  read  edlCcbth. 


§  8.     Scri])tio  ])lena  and  defectiva. 

1.  Vowels,  wliicli  are  indicated  botli  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  by  a  vowel-point,  are  said  to  be  written  fully,  as  in 
ninii5  dtJioth^  rrit'h-^^  8halislviin^  ^.^13  mutli  ;  those,  for  which 
a  vow^el-letter  miglit  have  been  employed,  but  which  are 
expressed  by  the  points  only,  are  said  to  be  written 
defectively,  as  nnx  ,  nijbt\  r -a  . 

2.  As  letters  were  rarely  used  to  represent  the  short 
vowels,  §  3,  li  and  ?',  when  written  fully,  are  almost 
always  long,  e.  g.  tj^^  Ihiu ;  when  written  defectively, 
they  may  be  either  long  or  short,  e.  g.  t\^,  ylraslij  "in"^ 
yilihar^  tJ'iin  tdmilsh^  -t^'"'?  muslikdhli. 

1^ 


10  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  9. 


EXERCISE  6. 

Precision  in  the  employment  of  the  vowel-letters  can  only  be  attained  by  prac- 
tice and  a  knowledge  of  forms.  For  the  present  the  following-  general  rules  will 
snffice  : 

Write  e  and  ~i  with  Yodh  and  o  and  I'l  with  Vav  at  the  end  of  words ;  elsewhere 
they  may  be  written  with  or  without  the  vowel-letters  at  discretion. 

Write  d  and  e  without  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  where  d  may 
and  e  must  be  represented  b}^  He. 

In  the  following  words,  write  the  vowels  both  fully  and 
defectively,  wherever  both  forms  are  admissible : — 

Zii,  nirash,  :i:6tlio,  yashobh,  lanii,  z;j,  blio,  heklmii, 
yamiish,  moshe,  bhul,  yakutsii,  H=ablimii,  h^fidhothi, 
m^yim,   *aven,    me,   me,   mi,   yamoth,    yamoth,    luhhoth, 


shidjh,  min,  hiishlakh. 


§  9.     Syllahles, 

1.  Two  vowels  can  never  come  tos^ether  in  the  same 
word  in  Hebrew  without  an  intervening  consonant,  and 
hence  there  can  never  be  more  than  one  vowel  in  tho 
same  syllable. 

2.  Every  syllable  except  initial  ^  must  begin  with  a 
consonant,  and  may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more 
than  two. 

3.  Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel  are  called  simple, 
™  m^7,inr|?n  h''he-md4hd  ;  tliose  ending  Avith  a  consonant, 
or,  as  is  possible  at  the  close  of  a  word,  witli  two  con- 
sonants, are  said  to  be  mixed,  Dnn-ais?  nisJtrmar-tem  ,'^ni) 
nerd. 

4.  As  Pattahh-furtive  and  the  vocal  ShVas,  whether 
sim])le  or  compound,  are  not  vowels  l)ut  involuntary 
transition  sounds,  they  with  the  consonants  under  which 
they  stand  cannot  form  syllables;  Pattahh-furtive  is 
a3cordingly  attached  to  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  and 


§  9.  SYLLABLES.  11 

the  vocal  Sli'vas  to  that  of  the  following  vowel;   thus 

5.  Unaccented  simple  syllables  always  contain  long 
vowels,  and  unaccented  mixed  syllables  short  vowels. 
But  an  accented  syllable,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  long  or  a  short  vois^el. 

6.  A  letter  with  simple  Sh'va  in  the  body  of  a  word 
may  either  end  or  begin  a  syllable.  If  it  is  preceded  by 
another  Sh'va  or  hy  an  unaccented  long  vowel,  it  belongs 
to  the  following  syllaljle,  T\^]T\  Uz-¥ru^  '^npT  zbWre  ;  if 
by  a  short  vowel  or  1;y  an  accented  long  vowel  it  is 
mostly  attached  to  the  preceding  syllable,  i^cn  ItJias-db^ 
T\V6^  I'dm'-nd  ;  if  it  l)e  doubled  l)y  Daghesli-forte,  §  13, 
the  first  of  the  two  consonants  into  which  it  is  resolved 
is  connected  with  the  preceding  and  the  second  with  the 
following  syllal)le,  ^Sn^  yit-fiiu. 

7.  Sometimes  a  consonant  which  is  not  doubled  belongs 
in  a  measure  to  two  syllables,  completing  that  which  pre- 
cedes and  beo-innino^  that  which  folloAvs.  In  this  case 
the  former  syllal)le  is  strictly  speaking  neither  simple 
nor  mixed,  1)ut  may  be  denominated  intermediate,  thus 
in  ^^nnn  tajia^r\jhu'  and  ^irp^^^  vay'hliitk! sliii  for  vay- 
y^hlialc-lHsliu^  the  first  two  are  intermediate  syllables. 

a.  Consonants  whicli  stand  in  this  equivocal  relation  are  such  as  remain  single 
when  analogy  would  require  them  to  be  doubled,  il'^p^^^l  for  Ji'rp-';"  \.hl'^ 
ifhha-hel  for  y'hhah-Ml ;  or  have  a  vocal  Sh'va  or  a  vowel  when  they  might  be 
expected  to  have  a  silent  feii'va,  Ji'rnnn  for  ^'j^nn  tah-r'gha  ;  or  are  preceded  by  a 
short  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  Hrri  for  D^ri  ^  rrna  MdJi'ghdthtox 
rrsTa  ,  "^f^^'  for  "rr^?  ,  C^t'T^  ko-dJidsJum  for  C"^ll3-ip  .  Also  when  the  same 
consonant  is  immediately  repeated  in  the  same  word  the  intervening  Sh'va  is 
made  vocal  in  order  to  give  distinctness  to  the  reduplication,  e.  g.   iVb^i  tsWlO. 

EXERCISE  7. 

Write  the  following* words,  and  ascertain  the  quantity 
of  their  vowels : — 


12  OKTIIOGRAPIIY.  §  1^ 

Yis-ra-e?,  gho-yim',  bh'no-the-liem',  n-bli'^o-ts'ro-tlia  yikh^ 
kliii-sh^ln',  risli-f  a-tlia'yim,  my'-lekii,  bli'bliit-no',  li-lm-dljfi', 
f'''zobli-kliyin/,  yitli-ka-fe'-lia. 

Write  and  divide  into  syllables  : — 

Umiknekliem',  yesk'bliii',  knmtsatlio',  yikkrafem', 
skigliyonotli',  btie*^mimatlio',  v'lar'*iiblieni',  tliak^'ro  gliii, 
shole^lili'. 


§  10.     Hestdting   Voivel- Changes, 

Certain  vowel-changes  result  from  tke  foregoing  rules, 
viz. : — 

1.  If  two  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  tke  begin- 
ning of  a  syllable,  the  first  will  receive  a  short 
vowel.  This  is  commonly  Hhirik,  e.  g.  '^b^'7  dihlire  for 
'^'11'^  ;  but  if  one  of  the  consonants  had  a  compound  Sh'va, 
the  vowel  corresponding  v/ill  l:>e  inserted,  e.  g.  "'t:5?;^ 
ycfmbdh  for  'i'^V,  ;  or  if  a  vowel  has  been  rejected,  the 
new  vowel  may  be  conformed  to  it,  e.  g.  ii'pti  moThlid 
for  iDb^  from  tj'b^a  . 

2.  When  a  tone-vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  two 
consonants  the  pronunciation  is  frequently  softened  by 
giving  a  pretonic  vowel,  mostly  Kamets,  to  the  first,  e.  g. 
niibia  from  •"'Sf'Q,  nb;! ,  r^npb.  And  the  vowel  a  is  often 
retained  in  such  a  situation,  when  other  vowels  would  be 
rejected,  e.g.  '^^^^t?  from  5?^TJJ ,  but  '^n^'?  not  ^ryut  from 

3.  The  harshness  of  concurring  consonants  at  the  end 
of  a  word  is  commonly  relieved  by  inserting  Seghol,  to 
wliicli  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  conformed,  -"i^.  for  an;* , 
ir':i}  -^'ov  T\Db  ,  tjb/Q  for  tf^^ .  If  either  consonant  is  a  gut- 
tural Pattahh  is  mostly  used  instead,  rti^i,  b^s,  in^.  If 
either   consonant   is   "^ ,  Hhirik   is   used ;  if   the   second 


§   11.  KAMETS    AND    KAMETS-IIIIATUPH.  13 

consonant  is  1  it  will  rest  in  Sliurek,  ti'^i,  "^bs ,  ^nn  ,  but 

4.  AVlien  by  reason  of  any  changes  occurring  in  words 
a  short  vowel  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  the 
vowel  must  ordinarily  be  ]3rolonged  or  the  syllable  con- 
verted into  a  mixed  syllable  by  doublinfr  the  succeedino* 
consonant ;  thus  instead  of  51"^ 3^  we  find  li'^i^  j/d-nl"Iih  or 
D'^s;:  yawnVliJi. 

5.  When  a  sim.ple  syllable  becomes  mixed  or  a  long 
mixed  syllable  loses  its  accent,  its  vow^el  is  ordinarily 
shortened,  e.  2:.  i'^ro  from  ""ino ,  br.^  from  bi^'^. 


§  11.     Kainets  and  Kamets-Hliahiph, 

Kamets  d  and  Kamets-Hhatupli  6  are  both  represented 
by  the  same  sign  (^  ),  but  may  be  distinguished  by  thie 
followino^  rules : — 

1.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  and 
in  unaccented  simple  syllables,  §  9,  5,  it  is  Kamets, 
tnj'ia  md'vetli^  *^3^  dd-hlidr' ;  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables 
it  is  Kamets-Hliatuph,  '^irsn  hlwjyh-sltV^  ^'^'p^  vattd-slidhh. 

2.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  Sli'va  the  distinction  is 
mostly  made  by  Methegli  (  —  ),  §  22;  without  Methegh 
it  is  always  Kamets-Hliatuph,  Avitli  it  commonly  Kamets, 
niQDn  liTioMi-md^  •"'^P'^  hlid-lcJi'md. 

?).  Before  a  guttural  witli  Hhateph-Kamets,  or  Kamets- 
Ilhatuph,  the  syllable  is  frecpiently  intermediate,  §  9,  7, 
and  the  vowel  6^  though  accompanied  by  Methegli,  "'''lins 
ljdji]i''rl^  ^l^yn  to^ohlCdliem. 

a.  Some  cases  falling-  under  2  and  3  can  only  be  decided  by  the  etymology ; 
thus  ri"':Xl  with  the  prefixed  conjunction  v&niyydth^  T\'^1'^T\  with  the  article 
luVniyya ;  C->i:nd  shordshlm  from  ^^'^j  ""''"'^■^'^  JiMrdsJum  from  L;''^n  • 
rt'^'QitJ  in  Ps.  Ixxxvi.  2  the  imperative  s/i(>wra,  in  Job  x,  12  the  preterite  sMm'rd 


14  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  12. 

EXERCISE  8. 

Apply  the  foregoing  rules  to  the  ^vords  that  follow. 

Write  :— 

Ya'hom,  ^az',  ^i^oznam',  niarkhii',  mol'ldio',  dhabhar'^ 
mohh^rabhoth',  hhakh'ma',  hhokhma',  uof  obh'dhem'. 

§  12.     Dagliesli-lene. 

1.  Daghesh-lene  is  a  23oint  written  in  the  letters  n  :\  n 
D  S  n  (nS3  -rr^n  h'glmdh  V]jhatli)  to  indicate  the  loss  of 
their  aspiration,  §  1,  3.  They  retain  their  aspirate  sound, 
when  they  are  immediately  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  a 
vocal  ShVa;  when  not  so  jireceded,  they  receive  Daghesh- 
lene,  onTa  h\jliadhtem. 

2.  An  initial  aspirate  following  a  word  which  ends  in 
a  vowel,  and  has  a  conjunctive  accent,  §  1(3,  does  not  take 
Daghesh-lene  ^^^  -^^^v} ,  Gren.  i.  2 ;  but  if  the  accent  is  dis- 
junctive, Daghesh-lene  is  inserted,  since  in  this  case  the 
aspirate  is  regarded  as  removed  from  the  influence  of  the 
vowel  rlrm^  ^?^^ ,  Gen.  i.  2^^. 

EXERCISE  9. 

Correct  the  following  sentences  by  inserting  or  omitting 
Daghesh-lene : — 

Yashabh  bhaf  ir  f  adh  f  om'dho  liphne  haf  edha  I'mish- 
phat  f  adh  moth  kliohen  ghadhol. 

V'f asita  hhesed  f al  fabdeka  ki  bilVrit  \lonay  hebe^ta 
et  abd'ka  v'*im  bi  fa  von  h*miteni  v'f  ad  *abika  lo*  t'bi^enl. 


§§  13,    14.  DAGHESII-FOETE.  15 


§  13.     Dagliesli-forte. 

1.  Daghesli-forte  is  a  ])oint  inserted  in  the  hosom  of  a 
letter  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled;  thus  -^^i  vayyim- 
mid.  It  is  never  found  in  the  gutturals  S  n  n  :?,  and 
rarely  in  "i . 

2.  A  point  in  one  of  the  aspirates  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Daghesh-lene,  §  12,  1, 
pnis'n  dilhartd.  The  aspirates  when  doubled  likewise 
lose  their  aspiration. 

3.  A  point  in  Vav  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a  vowel  pre- 
cedes; otherwise  it  is  Shurek  ^^^^  y^tsavvit. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  sometimes  inserted  for  euphony,  as 
■^is^  inn^hlie  for  ''h^y  in^hhe.  When  the  first  letter  of  a 
word  is  doubled  in  order  to  link  it  with  the  final  vowel 
of  the  word  pi'ecedmg,  it  is  called  Daghesh-forte  con- 
junctive, ^iisr  ^)2-p  humiij:s-ts'u, 

5.  Daghesh-forte  is  frequently  omitted  from  vowelless 
letters,  whether  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  words. 
In  the  former  case  the  following  ShVa  generally  remains 
vocal,  qn^'i  vayltliajpli  for  ^H^l  vayyliliapp, 

§  14.     Mappil. 

Mappik'  is  a  point  inserted  in  a  final  He  to  denote  that 
it  is  a  consonant,  and  not  a  vowel,  §  7,  3,  S^i^'p^  malhali^ 
rib^  malka, 

EXERCISE   10. 

Write:— 

Shibbatsta,  b^tttal)batotli,  dctl)b'rrdi,  ,i,*dhabl)'ra,  gulg5lto, 
bikkitrtim,  vilyyibbfik'f  ii,  liilyyulladh,  tiikli'lii,  f  asitha  llo. 

Pronounce  the  following  words  and  name  the  points 
which  are  w^ritten  in  the  letters  : — 


16  OKTHOGRAPHY.  §§   15,  IG. 


§  15.     Iicq?Jie, 

Raphe  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke  placed  over  a  letter, 
and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte, 
or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be:  ^■79,;57  liivvds'dhd  not 
liivvds'd/idh. 


§   16.     Accents, 

1.  An  accent  is  written  upon  every  word,  with  the 
twofold  design  of  marking  its  tone-syllable  and  of  indi- 
catino'  its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 

2.  Accents  are  either  disjunctives  or  conjunctives,  as 
shown  in  table  III.  The  former  indicate  that  the  word 
upon  which  they  are  placed  is  more  or  less  separated 
from  those  that  follow;  the  latter  that  it  is  connected 
with  ^vhat  follows. 

3.  The  place  of  the  accent  is  either  over  or  under  the 
letter  preceding  the  tone- vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the 
prepositives  (marked  prejx  in  the  table),  which  always 
accompany  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  and  the  post- 
positives  (marked  postj?.)^  which  stand  upon  its  final 
letter. 

4.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh ;  but  the 
former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the  last 
word  in  the  verse,  while  Methegh  is  never  written  under 
a  tone-syllable.     Pashta  is  likewise   distinguished   from 


§17.  ACCENTS.  17 

Kaclhma,    and   Y'tliibli   from    Malipakh,   only  by   tlieir 
position. 

5.  In  the  poetical  books,  Job,  Psalms,  and  Proverbs,  a 
different  system  of  accentuation  prevails  from  tliat  wliich 
is  in  use  in  tlie  rest  of  tlie  Old  Testament. 


§  17.     Position  of  tlie  Accent 

The  accent  always  falls  either  upon  the  ultimate  or 
penultimate  syllable,  and  is  governed  by  the  following 
rules : — 

1.  In  their  uninflected  state  all  words,  whether  primi- 
tive or  derivative,  are  accented  on  the  ultimate,  "^i^  ,  ^"in  . 
But  Segholate  words  and  forms,  that  is,  such  as  have 
an  unessential  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  inserted  to  soften 
the  harshness  of  concurring  consonants,  §  10.  3,  are  ac- 
cented on  the  penultimate,  tjb^:  for  ^'>'52  ,  b.v  for  brp. 

2.  If  the  word  receive  an  addition  at  the  end  consist- 
ing of  a  vowel  or  beginning  vv^ith  one,  this  will  attract 
the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its  initial  vowel,  a^^s^  ,  ^T\r\_ . 

Exceptions. — a.  Suffixes  added  to  the  3  fem.  preterite 
of  verbs,  cninn.  h.  Personal  terminations  of  verl>s 
and  the  paragogic  vowels  n  ^  ,  n ..  and  ^ .  ,  when  they  do 
not  cause  \h^  rejection  of  the  vowel  j^reviously  accented, 

o.  When  a  simple  syllable  is  attached  to  a  word  either 
directly  or  by  means  of  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  is  given 
to  the  penult,-  c^^ia  ,  ncx^ia  ,  ^:ncx"a  ,  b]b ,  ni^'p  . 

The  suffix  *?!  follows  the  general  rule,  when  preceded  by 
a  vowel,  or  attached  to  the  3  fem.  preter.  of  verlis  ;  other- 
wise it  draws  the  accent  u[)on  itself,  Tj-'ii? ,  a^^^TI  ,   ^7,';' . 

4.  A  consonant  appended  to  a  long  final  vowel  draws 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate,  ini^^     l^n^^a*^ . 


18  OETIIOGRAPHY.  §§   18,   19. 

5.  Appended  mixed  syllables  always  receive  tlie  accent, 

DnDbn ,  Disbri . 

6.  The  only  prefixes  wliicli  afPect  the  j)osition  of  the 
accent  are  the  Vav  Conversive  of  the  future,  which  draws 
it  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  '^V.^'h  ; 
and  the  Yav  Conversive  of  the  preterite,  which  throws  it 
forward  from  the  ]3emilt  to  the  ultimate,  ^'}'^^) . 


EXERCISE  11. 

Accent  the  followino;  words  : 

*abh  and  tlie  derived  forms  ha^cabh,  H:abhi,  ^abhinii, 
5j,abhik,  *abhoth,  /bhothenu,  M:jc^bhothehem. 

Pakadh'  and  the  derived  forms  pak'dhu,  pakadhnii, 
pakiidhti,  p'ktldhtiv,  p'kMhtem,  yiphkodh,  hiphkidh, 
y^phkidhehu,  hithpak'dhfi,  h^mmiiphkadhim. 

§  18.     Recession  of  tlie  Accent 

A  conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the  ultimate 
to  the  penult,  if  a  disjunctive  immediately  follows, 
whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  the  penult  of  a  dissyl- 
lable, rh-fi  i^-^ip^  Gen.  1  :  5. 

§   19.     Pause  Accents. 

The  greater  disjunctives,  which  mark  the  limits  of 
clauses  and  sections,  are  called  joause  accents. 

These  sometimes  stand  upon  the  jienult  in  words 
ordinarily  accented  on  the  ultimate,  ''ibij ,  "^pjs^ ;  or  vice 
versa  upon  the  ultimate  in  place  of  the  penult,  t^^^^  . 

They  also  occasion  certain  vowel  changes,  viz.,  they 

1.  Lengthen  short  vowels,  particularly  (_  )  or  (..  )  tc 

\  T      y  -     T      7  AT     T      ;  V    ■••      7  V  AT 


§  20,  ACCENTS.  19 

2.  Eestore  vowels  dropped  in  inflection,  ^'^3'^  ,  ^"in'n  . 

3.  Change  simj^le  Sli'va  to  Segliol,  ^n;" ,  ^n^. . 

4.  Change  compound  Sh'v^a  to  the  corresponding  long 
vowel,  '':i5 ,  -^r^S . 

§  20.     Consecution  of  Accents. 

1.  The  last  word  in  every  verse  receives  Silluk,  and  is 
followed  by  two  dots  vertically  placed  ( J  )  called  Soph. 
Pasuk  (i.  e.  end  of  the  verse). 

2.  If  the  verse  consists  of  two  clauses,  the  last  word  of 
the  first  clause  is  marked  by  Athnahh.  If  of  three 
clauses,  which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can 
contain,  the  first  is  limited  by  Segholta,  the  second  by 
Athnahh,  and  the  last  by  Silluk. 

3.  These  clauses  are  divided  into  sections,  if  necessary, 
by  one  or  more  of  the  disjunctives,  Zakepli  Katon, 
Zakepli  Gadhol,  E'bhi^  Pazer,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola. 

4.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are  disposed 
relatively  to  tlie  disjunctive  which  marks  its  close,  see 
ta])le  XX. 

5.  Eacli  disjunctive  of  the  first  class  is  regularly  pre- 
ceded by  one  conjunctive  and  a  disjunctive  of  the  second 
class ;  disjunctives  of  the  second  class  by  two  conjunctives 
and  a  disjunctive  of  the  third  class ;  disjunctives  of  the 
third  class  by  three  conjunctives  and  a  disjunctive  of  the 
fourth  class  ;  and  disjunctives  of  tlie  fourth  class  by  four 
or  more  conjunctives. 

6.  The  trains  of  accents  thus  formed  are  adapted  to 
sections  of  different  length  and  character  by  omitting 
such  of  the  Conjunctives,  and  more  rarely  by  repeating 
sucli  of  the  Disjunctives,  as  the  mutual  relations  of  the 
words  may  seem  to  require,  and  breaking  off  the  series 
whenever  all  the  words  in  the  section  have  been  supplied. 


20  ORTirOGRAPIIY.  §§  21,  22. 

§  21.     MaUkeijli, 

1.  Makkepli'  (  "  )  is  used  to  connect  words.  Monosyl 
labic  particles  especially  are  frequently  tlius  linked  with 
tlie  succeeding  or  preceding  word,  ^bi-ntJs^n-Di^ . 

2.  AYliere  t^v-o  or  more  words  are  united  in  this  manner 
tlie  last  only  lias  an  accent.  Hence  a  long  mixed  syl- 
lable, followed  by  Makkepli,  must  be  shortened,  §  9,  5, 
!qi5?"b3,  or  else  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh, 
§  22,  nK^:'-f « . 

EXERCISE  12. 

Connect  each  pair  of  ^vords  by  Makkeph,  inserting 
Da2:hesh-forte  conjunctive  whenever  the  former  ends  in 
a  or  e. 

Kol  yisra^el,  yal'dha  lo,  *eth  *elle,  ^ethmokh  bo,  tih'ye 
li,  ten  li,  sh'losh  *elle,  y'bhakkesh  daf  ath,  I'kha  na^i:. 

§  22.     Methegli. 

1.  Methegh  (  t  )  represents  a  minor  stress  of  the  voice, 
which  usually  falls  upon  the  second  syllable  before  the 
accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth,  if  the  word  have  so 
many,  nirD-^pnpi,  '^1^'"551\ 

2.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  mixed,  it 
may  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple  syl- 
lable;  or  if  none  such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  alto- 
gether. 

3.  It  is  always  given  to  simple  syllables,  follov/ed  by 
a  vocal  Sh'va,  T\yi^^  ;  also  to  intei'mediate  syllables  fol-j 
lowed  by  compound  Sh'va,  or  a  vowel  which  has  arisen 
from  compound  Sh'va,  "it?«1?  ,  ^^yT^,^  and  frequently  when 
the  Sh'va  is  simple,  m^tjb.  , 

4.  The   place   of   Methegh   is   often   supplied   by  an' 


§   23.  K  EI    AND    KTIIIBII.  21 

accent    chosen   agreeably   to    the   laws   of    consecution^ 

EXEECISE  13. 

Apply  the  rules  for  Methegh.  A  hyphen  represents 
Makkeph. 

Vejohe',  Mn^Vlhonehem',  mehamm^f ^rakha',  f ammina- 
clliabh',  ben-ha.tama',  ber^khnukhem',  v^yyir'*ii',  han- 
nogh'sim',  ha>:Jshsha',  me*^rtso',  latheth-lanu,  hithh^l- 
lekh-no^'hli',  mef'''bhodhath'khem'. 

§  23.     ICri  and  ICtUhli. 

1.  K'ri  (^read^  is  the  technical  name  of  a  marginal 
reading  in  the  Hebrew  Bible,  which  is  sanctioned  by  tra- 
dition as  a  substitute  for  the  corresponding  reading  in 
tlie  text,  or  the  K'thibh  (^writteii).  The  vowels  of  the 
K'ri  are  connected  with  the  letters  of  the  text  and  a 
reference  made  to  the  margin  where  the  letters  of  the 
former  may  be  found. 

2.  If  a  given  ^vord  is  to  l)e  omitted  in  reading,  it  is 
left  unpointed,  and  the  note  """ip  Kbi  n'lnD  written  hut  not 
read^  jilaced  in  the  margin.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word,  is  to  be  supplied,  its  vowels  are  inserted  in  the 
text,  and  the  letters  placed  in  the  margin  with  the  note, 
n^ro  Nb^  "^-ip  read  hut  not  turitten. 

3.  In  some  words  of  frequent  occurrence,  a  different 
I'cading  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone,  without  a  mar- 
ginal explanation.  Thus  the  sacred  word  mn^ ,  which  the 
Jews  have  a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  is  read 
by  them  as  if  it  were  ^^nx  Lord^  ^diose  points  it  accord- 
in  o;ly  receives,  nin^ ,  unless  these  two  names  stand  in 
immediate  connection,  when  to  avoid  repetition  it  is  read 
D'^n'b^  and  pointed  !"lin;i ;  so  the  pronoun  N^,n  is  read  ii'^n. 


22  OKTIIOGEAPHY.  §  23. 

EXERCISE  14. 

Write  the  following  words,  as  they  would  appear  in 
the  text,  and  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  uniting 
the  points  of  the  K'ri  with  the  letters  of  the  K'thibh, 
and  making  the  appropriate  marginal  note. 

Lartibh  k'thibh — laribh  k'ri ;  sima  k'thibh — stima  k'ri ; 
f  asithi  k'thibh — f  asitha  k'ri ;  bisli'nath  k'thibh — b^sh- 
sliana  k'l'i ;  t^'^^^^i^^^  k'thibh — f  ^bhdekha  k'ri ;  hotsithiha 
k'thibh — htltstsithuha  k'ri ;  bh'yisra*el  k'thibh — yisra^el 
k'ri;  p'rath  read  but  not  written;  «im  written  but  not 
read. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  24.     Prefixed  Particles. 

1.  The  significant  elements  of  speecli  in  Hebi'ew  con- 
sist of 

(1)  Prefixed  particles,  wliicli  do  not  form  a  comjilete 
word  of  tliemselves,  but  are  always  attached  to  that 
which  follows. 

(2)  The  Pronouns,  which  are  used  both  separately 
and  as  appendages  to  other  words. 

(3)  The  ]-emaining  parts  of  speech,  which  ahyays  con- 
stitute separate  words. 

2.  The  prefixed  particles  are  the  article,  He  interroga- 
tive, the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Yav  Conjunctive. 


!io. 


Tlie  Article. 


1.  The  definite  article  consists  of  n  with  Pattahh  fol- 
lowed l)y  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to 
which  it  is  prefixed,  tjbt  a  Idnrj^  ?fbi2n  the  hing. 

2.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  Sh'va,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  the  aspirates,  §  13.  5, 
'is;^n,  nn-i2n,  but  ninzin,  nrnsn. 

3.  Before  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 
forte,  §  13.  1,  the  article  has  Kamets,  §  9.  5.  This  is 
always  the  case  before  i5  and  *i  and  commonly  before 
5?;  before  n  and  n  Pattahh  is  mostly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
H-'i^n,  yfcnn,  t:^rn,  nnn  but  N^nn,  tfirnn. 

a.  The  noims  y^.x  earth,  ^n  mountain,  and  c:?  people  on  receiving  the  article 
lengthen  their  vowels  to  X'^^  j   "'^'^  ^^'^  "^'^  • 


24  HE   INTEREOGATIVE.  §  26. 

4.  Before  the  strong  gutturals  witli  Kamets,  the  article 
lias  Segliol.  This  is  always  the  case  with  5i,  but  with  n 
and  5?  only  takes  place,  when  the  article  stands  u2:)on  the 
second  syllable  before  the  accent,  r^nn  ^  DDnn ,  □"'^rin  ^ 
n-i-S^n,  but  nrn,   m^n. 

§  26.     iZ^  Interrogative. 

The  letter  n  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh  asks  a 
question,  tj';?:  we  sliall  go^  ^JP^H  6'A<:^^^  we  go  f  Before  a 
vowelless  letter,  §  10.  1,  or  a  guttural  this  becomes 
Pattahli,  cm^^^n  do  ye  hnoiv  ?  tfSxn  shall  I  go  f 
Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to  Seghol 
nn^n  it  tvas^  '^^?vJO  '^^<^*^^  ^^^ 

EXERCISE  15. 

Be  careful  to  apply  the  rule  for  Dagliesh-lene,  §  12.  1  ;  and  observe  that  simple 
Sh'va  followmg-  either  the  article  or  the  interrogative  is  always  vocal,  §  9,  «, 

^^r'l'^n  not  c?^_:>"n':r]  . 

Prefix  the  article  to  the  following  words : — • 

"ii?2  ilesh;  nnT  gold;  D^  sea;  fi?  tree;  nii5  light; 
xrcT'^s.  m'ound ;  trirri  darkness;  roi^b^  work;  n:&?r\  fia-- 
tree ;  "^tv  dust ;  D^^  1  )one ;  onS  bread ;  rons  corpse ; 
?^pn  firmament;  t\t\  sj^irit;  nn:^  evening;  ^^T\  sword; 
5?nT  s-ed;  nii3  star;  n^?  leaf;  tn^  man;  nil?  year; 
•in:  river;  f")&?^  earth;  D?  people;  "^n  or  ^r\  living; 
D'^nn^  A\  ords ;  nisris  shoulders. 

'  See  §  25.  3,  a. 

Prefix  He  Interroerative  to  the  following;  words : 

,w   ,n^7    ,-i:7    ,Di!:    ,  ^n    ,  i^p    ,  nf^^^   ,  ^^i^n  , '^d:w>c  ,  r-b^ 
^ni5i  ,i72P  ,DpnDT2J  ,b&5b  ,bx  ,r^ns  ,  oi'a^  ,  :iit:  ,^3r'^b  ^pjn 

'  Resh  is  not  regarded  as  a  guttural  in  the  rule  for  He  Interrogative. 


§§  27,  28.  m8EPAEABLE    PREPOSITIONS.  25 


§  27.     Inseparable  P repositions, 

1.  The  prej^ositions  n ,  D  and  b  are  regularly  j^refixed 
witli  ShVa,  n-iiJs':)^ ,  Vd3  ,  cro?^'?  •  Before  vowelless 
letters  they  take  Hliirik,  §  10.  1,  TV^^^  for  TV^I^/,  before 
gutturals  with  compound  ShVa  they  take  the  correspond- 
ing short  vowel,  §  10.  1,  "''15^?,  VDJs:b,  ^nnn ;  before  mono- 
syllables and  before  dissyllables  accented  upon  the  jDcnult, 
they  frequently  receive  a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  10.  2,  J^^T3, 
rs:b;  before  the  article  its  T\  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition  "^.ni3  for  "^i^ns ,  ynskb  for  T"^i^nb . 

a.  The  initial  N  of  '':"IX  Lord^  "iTiX  master  when  it  has  a  singular  suffix,  and 
Cin?::^  God  quiesces  after  the  inseparable  prepositions,  §  7,  a,  "^'j^X^  ,  rj"?.'^^^^ , 
C^n^NTi  for  c'h'PXS  the  Seghol  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable ; 
also  in  the  inf.  const,  ^tx    to  say  after  b,    -.ixb    but  ~^^?3,    "^^?  • 

2.  The  preposition  XQ  from  may  either  be  written  as  a 
separate  word  or  shortened  to  the  prefix  ^  with  Hhirik 
followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  next  letter,  Tf^i^  for 
tji'i  ya .  Before  n  Hhirik  is  commonly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
Init  before  other  gutturals  it  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  §  9. 
5,  T^ni2  for  Y^n  ya^  but  n^^  ?  ^'^™- 

a.  The  inseparable  prepositions  take  before  the  divine  name  nin^  the  same 
po  in  ting  that  theywould  receive  before  "1 3  TX  .which  the  Jews  substitute  for  it  in 
reading,  thus   nin"^2j   nin^s^   ninib,   •^J'T'^.,   Comp.  §  23.  3. 


» 


§  28.      Vav   Conjunctive, 

The  conjunction  1  and  is  regularly  prefixed  with  ShVa 
^irnn ,  n^^r^'^  .  Before  one  of  the  labials  n,  ^,  B,  or 
before  a  vowelless  letter  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek  T^^i 
nriD^ ;  before  a  vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in 
w^hich  the  Yodh  quiesces,  '^ri'^l ;  before  a  guttural  with 


26 


ETYMOLOGY. 


29. 


\ 


comiDound    SliVa  it    receives    the    coiTesj)onding    short 
vowel  j"^?^;!  jT^TTi  ,""^^13;  before   monosyllables    and  dis    j 
syllables  accented  on  the  j^enult  it  frequently  receives  a    1 
pretonic  Kamets  ^nii  ^  rnj . 

Vocabulary  1. 


The  parts  of  speech  are  distinguished 
masculine,  f.  feminine,  pi.  plural. 

"iifi5  11.  m.  light 

^  prep,  in 

nrn^  n.  f.  heast,  cattle 

i'i':'^  n.  111.  house 

^j^i  n.  111.  morning 

^i?5  ^'  11^-  fi^sh. 

1  conj.  and 

•jirn  n.  m.  dao'lcness 

Di*"  n.  m.  day 

n;  n.  m.  sea 

tn^  n.  m.  moon 


by  initials  or  abbreviations ;  m.  denotei 

3  pre23.  according  to^  as,  lihe. 

D'^nDis  11.  m.  pi.  stars 

^  prep,  to,  for 

)k^  adv.  not 

Dn^  11.  m.  f.  bread 

rib^S  n.  m.  night 

ya  i^rej).  from 

^?  prep.  u?ito,  until 

11  :^  n.  111.  f.  evening 

Jini?  n.  \\\.  fieM 

D^^'a©  n.  111.  pi.  heaven 

TlJ^ii?  n.  111.  f.  sun. 


Lesson  1  in  Reading  Hebrew,  see  page  111. 
Lesson  1  in  Writing  Hebrew,  see  page  137. 
The  succeeding  lessons  are  connected  with  the  vocabu- 
laries that  follow  in  their  order. 


§  29.     Personal  Pronouns, 
1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  the  following,  viz. : 


SINGULAR, 

^p:x  anolvhi',  '^ts  *ni 


■■■{ 


Thou  m.  Jin^  atta' 
Thou  f.     r\i5  (^ns?)  att 


29.  PERSONAL     PEONOUNS.  27 


1. 


1. 

PERSONAL     PRONOUNS. 

He 

N^n  hti 

She 

x^n  (xin)  111 

PLURAL. 

We 

^:n:i!J  ^nalili'nu, 

:  - 

nahh'nti, 

Ye  m 

. 

DPS?   attein 

Ye  i. 

IPS?    atten', 

'■'jn^ 

atte'na 

They 

m. 

cn  hem, 

HTSn 

hem  ma 

Tlmj 

f. 

ir?  lien, 

!^?5b 

hen'na 

2.  When  governed  by  verbs,  nouns  or  particles  they 
are  appended  to  them  in  the  following  shortened  forms, 
called  pronominal  suffixes  : 

BINGULAR.  PLUR4L. 

1.       Com.  \     ''?  ^3 

Masc,  ^  D? 

Fern,  5  19 

j  ili"as(?.  ^n  n    Dn 

•    [Fern,  n  1     1?: 

3.  In  the  first  person  singular  ''.  is  used  with  nouns, 
and  "^3  with  verl)s.  The  third  plural  forms  Dn,  "jn  are 
used  with  plural  nouns ;  D,  1  with  verbs  and  singular 
noiuis.  The  suffixes  DD ,  "JD ,  on ,  "jn  are  called  grave,  the 
rest  are  light. 

4.  The  inseparable  prepositions  are  united  with  pro- 
nominal suffixes  as  shown  in  Table  IV. ;  3  is  prolonged  by 
the  syllable  i^  and  yi2  l^ecomes  before  light  suffixes  "s^!^ 
or  lE'Q .  The  suffix  ^n  preceded  by  —  is  contracted  to  i 
e.  g.  y^  for  ^nn ,  ib  for  '.nb ;  n  preceded  by  —  is  short- 
ened to  1^    e.  o;.  J13  for  t^in  and  in  like  manner  with  the 

TOT  T     T 

pause  accent  ^5  ,  2  masc.  sing,  for  115  • 


28  ETYMOLoar. 


VOCAEULAEY    2. 

21*155  n.  m.  f.  sign  H'?^!'  n.  m.  Israel 

ris  n.  m.  hrotlier  ?19?  n.  m.  silver 

I'^K  titer e  is  not  nis?  adv.  yet^  hesides 

D'^nbx  n.  m.  pi.  God  ^V  ^re^.  ujpon^  over 

f"i^  11.  f.  eartli^  leuid  Dji?  n.  in.  eternity 

X^:!  prep,  hetween  D5?  prep,  ^vith 

nnr  11.  ni.  gold  ^^^^.  or  ^^V  loitli  me 

Ti  adj.  living^  alivG  hp:?  adv.  noio 

riyrT)  n.  m.  JeliovaJi  nnn  prep.  %inder^  instead  of. 


§  30.     6^?^7^^r  Pronouns. 

1.  The  demonstrative  pronoun,  is 

MasG.    Fern.  Common. 

Singular     ht     n^^T  ^^/^.^'s  Plural     bb5     n^i5   ^/^.^^(^ 

The  poetic  form  ^T  is  used  both  as  a  demonstrative  and 
a    a  relative. 

2.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  &5^n  is  also 
employed  as  a  remote  demonstrative  that. 

3.  The  relative  pronoun  is  ^tD^  lolio^  ^Dliic\  sometimes 
shortened  to  t»  ,  see  Table  V.  When  the  relative  is 
governed  by  verbs,  nouns,  or  particles,  it  stands  without 
change  of  form  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause,  and  the 
appropriate  pronominal  suffix  is  attached  to  the  govern- 
ing word  i^i"^  "nrs  ivlio  Ms  day  i.  e.  ivliose  day  ib — ii?^ 
who — to  him  i.  e.  to  whom.  When  a  preposition  stands 
before  the  relative,  it  governs  not  the  relative  itself  but 
its  antedecent  understood ;  thus,  '^^^_  means  not  to  whom 
or  to  ivhich  but  to  him  loho  or  t)  that  ivhich.  It 
receives  an  adverbial  sense  when  followed  by  DtD  there^ 


§  31.  .     VERBS.       THEIR    SPECIES.  29 

e.    g.    d« — ^m    ^vJiere,    n^if — ^m    ivJiithe?^    tim — ^m 
whence. 

4.  The  interrogative  and  indefinite  pronouns  are  ^^ 
wJio  f  or  ivlioever  and  r^a  ivliat  f  or  whatever.  The  vowel 
of  n^  varies  with  the  first  letter  of  the  following  word, 
see  Table  IV.  In.  a  few  instances  its  vowel-letter  is 
dropped,  and  it  is  converted  into  a  prefix,  e.  g.  T\h^  for 
nj  n^  ivhat  is  this  f 

5.  Another  interrogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
particle  ''i?  to  the  pronoun  nj  ,  n^T,  thus  nx  'ix  lohichf 
or  what  ?  T\)kt:  ^x  for  ivhat  ?  why  f  r.i^  '^^5  from  what 
place?   whence? 

Vocabulary  3. 

Vs  n.  m.  ivhole,  all^  every        Dipia  n.  m.  f.  j)lctce 

D""^  n.  m.  j^l.  water  TC'ip   n.  m.  holiness^    a  holy 

^TQi  adv.  above  place  or  tiling. 

VERBS. 

§  31.     Their  Sjpecies. 

1.  Hebrew  verbs  have  seven  different  forms,  called 
species  or  conjugations,  viz. : 

1.  Kal  Simple  active. 

2.  Niphal      Simple  passive. 

3.  Piel  Intensive  active. 

4.  Pual  Intensive  passive. 

5.  Hiphil       Causative  active. 

6.  Hophal     Causative  passive. 

7.  Hithpael  Reflexive. 

2.  The  first  of  these  species  is  called  Kal  light^  because 
in  it  no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and 
these  only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  names  are 
taken  from  brs  to  do^  being  the  forms  assumed  by  this 
verb  in  each  species  severally. 


30  ETYMOLOGY.  §  32. 

3.  To  eacli  of  these  species  belong  a  preterite  and 
future,  two  forms  of  the  infinitive  called  respectively  the 
absolute  and  the  construct,  a  participle,  and  except  to  the 
Pual  and  Hophal,  which  as  pure  passives  cannot  exj)ress 
a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  alone  has  two  par- 
ticij^les. 

a.  All  of  these  species  very  rarely  co-exist  in  the  same  verb.  Their  signification 
is  commonly  but  not  invariably  what  is  stated  above.  The  Piel  is  sometimes 
causative  like  the  Hiphil,  and  the  Mphal  reflexive  like  the  Hithpael,  or  the 
Hithpael  passive  like  the  Niphal.  In  these  cases  one  or  other  of  the  equivalent 
species  is  often  dropped  as  unnecessary,  or  some  distinction  in  usag'e  is  created 
between  them.  In  intransitive  verbs  the  Niphal,  if  it  exists  at  all,  is  usually  the 
passive  of  a  transitive  or  causative  sense. 


§  32.     Perfect   Verbs. 

1.  Yerljs  are  called  perfect,  when  they  conform 
throughout  to  the  standard  inflection;  and  imperfect, 
when  in  consequence  of  a  weak  letter,  §  2.  2,  or  some 
other  peculiarity  in  the  root  they  deviate  from  it. 

2.  If  '5"bj5  to  hill  be  taken  as  the  model  of  the  perfect 
verb,  the  various  species  with  their  significations  will  be 
as  follows,  viz. : — 


1. 

Kal 

^'^I? 

to  Ml. 

2. 

Niphal 

^*^p? 

to  he  hilled. 

3. 

Piel 

'^tip 

to  hill  many  or  to  massacre. 

4. 

Pual 

'^^I? 

to  he  massacred. 

5. 

Hiphil 

^^■^i?r^ 

to  cause  to  hill. 

6. 

Hophal 

to  he  CGiised  to  hill. 

7. 

Hithpael 

^'^p^n 

to  hill  one's  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite,  which 
is  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification,  therefore,  is  he  has  killed,  etc.  But 
when  these  forms  are  used  to  represent  the  species  their  proper  e  iUivalent  is  the 
infinitive,  which  is  the  form  employed  in  designating  verbs  in  English. 


KAL   PRETERITE    AND   IT^EIKITIVES. 


3J 


§  33.     Kal   Freterite   and  Infinitives, 
1.  The  Kal  preterite  is  inflected  tlms : — 


PRETERITE. 

SiJN^G.  3  masc. 

,     bbp  katal'        lie  hilled,,  didlcill  or  has  Mlled. 

Zfem. 

nb-J^  kat'la'      she  hilled. 

2  QnasG. 

nbtj  katal'ta    thou  (m.)  hilledst. 

^fem. 

nbbp  katalt'      thou  (f.)  hilledst 

1  coon. 

^pbb)^  katal'ti     I  hilled. 

Plur.3  com. 

^VJ)^  kat'lu       tliey  hilled. 

2  masc. 

onbuilP  k'taltem'  ye  (m.)  hilled. 

"ifem. 

|J?'?t:p  k'talten'  ^(?  (f.)  hilled. 

1  coin. 

^3bbp  katarnti  '2^(?  hilled. 

Infinitive  ctbsohite  ^it^i?  kator,  construct  Vuj?  k'tol  to  hill. 

2.  The  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  the  Kal  preterite 
is  commonly  Pattahh,  as  in  bb]^ ;  in  a  few  verbs,  how- 
ever, most  of  Avhich  are  intransitive,  it  is  Tsere  as  in  "li? 
to  he  heavy,,  or  Hholem  as  in  Vii^  to  he  hereaved. 


Kal  Preterite  with  e, 

S  masc.            d  com.        3fem.             2  masc.  2  fern. 

Sing,     "ins                     n^ns          ri^ns  n-inD 

Plur.                  ^'ins                      D^n^ns  'jn'ins 
Infinitive  ahsolute  "liis  construct  "I'is. 


1  c<??n. 


Kal  Preterite  with  6. 


kinase.  Z  com.        3  fem.  2  masc.  2  fern. 

Sing.     Vdit  ribp-jj  rVbis  nbbiiD 

Plur.  ^Sdic  dnbDt)  rb\by6 

:     IT  /it:  '    V  :  t     ; 

Infinitive  ahsolute  bibtf ,  construct  bb'JJ . 


1  C<???1. 

■^nbDffi 
^:bbiij 


32  ETYMOLOGY.  %  ^'^• 

3.  The  endings  of  tlie  first  and  second  persons  of  the 
preterite  are  fragments  of  the  corresponding  pronouns; 
thus  jH  in  j^V^I?  i^  from  npiC  2  masc.  sing.,  n  in  r^f"^]^ 
from  nJi?  2  fem.  sing.,  Dn  and  "jn  from  tlie  2  j^lur.  orii? 
and  )V\^ ;  ^r^  in  ^^^'k'^  is  by  euj)honic  change  for  "^3  from 
"^ibx  1  pers.  sing.,  ^3  in  '^'^^^  from  ^:&5  1  pers.  plur.  As 
two  of  the  persons  are  thus  designated  by  pronomhial 
fragments,  no  such  designation  was  needed  in  the  case  of 
the  third  and  only  remaining  person.  The  simple  form 
of  the  verb  without  addition  b'jp  is  accordingly  used  for 
the  3  masc.  sing.  ;  Ji,  in  nVjj^  being  the  sign  of  the 
feminine  and  so  used  also  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  ^ 
in  ^itpjj  the  sign  of  the  plural. 

VOCABULAEY    4. 

Wj  V.  (fut.  a)  to  he  great  *1J^^  adv.  very 
pn^i  V.  (fut. «)  to  cleave  J  adhere  ni2£i2  n.  f.  commaQidment 

Jibi  n.  f.  door  biria  v.  to  ride 

^'in  n.  m.  majesty  l^^J  v.  to  give 

^in  n.  m.  s^plendor  ^io  v.  to  sliut 

pi;  V.  to  pour  p^i?  n.  m.  righteousness 

'^s  conj.  for^  hecause^  that  l^itj  v.    to   rest.,   cease ^  Iceej^ 
n^Ss  n.  m.  pi.  vessels^  articles        Sabhath 

tib  or  tib  V.    (fut.    a)    to  nsi^  n.  m.  f.  Sabhath 

jput  on^  10 ear ^  he   clothed  "pt  v.  to  dwell 

with  "TaiT  \^-.  to  heep^  ohserve, 
Jni?  is  the    sign   of   the  definite    object  and  is  placed 

before  pronouns  or  definite  nouns  when  governed  by  a 
transitive  verb. 

§  34.   Ni/phal^  JPiel^  and  Pual  Preterites  and  Infinitives, 

The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  5;  the  Piel  and  Pual 
by  doubling  the  second  radical  and  attachiog  the  ajDpro 
piiate  vowels. 


§34. 


NIPHAL,    PIEL,    AT^D    PUAL    PRETERITES. 


83 


NIPHAL    PRETERITE. 

3  masc.    3  com.        3  fem.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing,     b-jp?  ^^"9!??  5?^^]??         ^f"^)??        ''^r'^ir? 

Plur.  ^^^1?5  DJ^r^i??        ir)rt:jpD         ^:"?i2p] 

Infinitive  absolute  ^'i^j^n ,  construct  ^t?i>r^ . 

PIEL    preterite. 


3  wiasc.    3  cow.  3  fem.  2  masc. 

Sing,     bbp  nSiDp  r.biap 

Plur.  fep  QPbi^p 

Infinitive  absolute  Vc2p  ,  construct  >^p 


2  fem. 

1  C0?7l. 

^^.^V 

^nb^p 

"P^I^V. 

^rbrap 

PUAL    preterite. 


Z  masc.    d  com.  Sfem.  2  masc. 

Sing,     btbp  nSifp  nbf^p 

Plur.  ^'^lap  aribrpp 

Infinitive  absolute  Vc3|? ,  construct  bisjj 


2  /(3m. 


1  cw?^. 

'izbiiip 


Vocabulary  5. 

The  initials  K.,  N.,  P.,  etc.,  denote  the  verbal  species. 

"iTrbx  n.  m.  Eleazar  lio  v.  N.  Pu.  to  be  shut 

li-ii^  n.  m.  f.  ai-h  ^ip  v.  P.  to  gather;  N.  to  be 

bis  V.  N.    ^6>  Z'^   separated^  gathered 

divided  ttj^p    v.   P.    H.    to    sanctify., 

"$11  V.  K.  to  hnoiu  consecrate;   N.  Pu.  to   be 

t'i5  V.  K.  P.  to  subdue;  N.  sanctified 

to  be  subdued  5?4^  v.  N.  to  sioear 

''isb  before  bDiD  v.  P.  ^6>  bereave 

npb  V.  K.  ^6>  tal<:e  li'i?    v.    P.    H.   to   cause   to 

Ti^i2  V.  K.  to  anoint  dwell 

ik'^  n.  m.  tabernacle^  dwell-  "j^i?  n.  m.  oil. 

ing 

2* 


84  ETYMOLOGY.  §  35 

§  35.     The  remaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives. 

TlieHij^liil  and  Hoplial  are  formed  by  prefixing  rt  vvitli 
the  proper  vowels.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  by  prefixing 
nn  to  the  construct  infinitive  of  the  Piel. 

HIPHIL    PRETERITE. 

dmasc.      Scorn.  3  fern.         2  maso.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing.    b^Ppn  ^Y^V^      ^V^j?r^       s?^PI?r^     "^rnbbpn 

Plur.  ^*^'^^^  D^^"^i?r»      ir)^"^I?n      ^3bb|:n 

Ineikltive  absolute  bppn ,  construct  b'^bjpn . 

HOPIIAL    preterite. 
3  masG.      3  coin.  3  fern.  2  mnsc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing,    btopn  J^'r^Ps^         ^V^IPv?       ^^"^p^»     ''r^V^I??^ 

Infinitive  absolute  bbpn ,  construct  bb]:n . 

HITHPAEL     PRETERITE. 

Zmasc.      d  coin.        dfem.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing.    biSj^nn  s^P^prin       !?rfep^r»     jf^'p^P^H  ''^'^'^j?*'pr' 

Plur.  ^i^priri  tsnb^i^nn    ii^b^gnn    iDbcoj^nn 

Infinitive  absolute  bijpnn,  construct  bbjpnn. 

Vocabulary  6. 

b^3  V.  H.  /(9  sejparate  •^P^^''?  n.  f.  '?^;6>r^ 

n'^i^  n.  m.  pi.  nations  ^^^   v.  Ho.   to  be  caused  to 
Da  conj.  also  reign.,  to  be  made  hing 

^"yi  n.  m.  David  fj^  n.  m.  hing 

n*n  n.  f .  animal^  wild  beast  n^ibi?  n.  f.  Idngdom 

rins  V.  H.  to  cut  off ;  Ho.  to  "^Tq  n.  a  little  ^ 
be  cut  off 

^  M?«  is  a  noun  meaning  a  little  thing  or  a  small  quantity  of  any  thing,  but  not 


§  36.  KAL    FUTUEE.  35 

toro  V.  H.  to  onalce  small  or  nni?  v.   H.  to   cause  to  rest, 

feiv  or  cease 

tJip  V.  Hitli.  to  sanctify  or  nnto  v.  H.  to  destroy 

jmrify  one^s  self  r\^t  v.  P.  H.  to  send, 

i^)5  V.  H.  to  bring  neai\  offer 


§  36.     Kal  Future^  Imperative^  and  Participles, 

1.  The  future  and  imperative  of  each  species  are 
formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  attaching  the 
proper  pronominal  fragments. 


SmG. 

3  masc. 

bbp^' 

1?  UTUiCJiJ. 

yiktol' 

he  shall  or  ivill  hill 

3  fern. 

bibjpn 

tiktol' 

she  will  hill 

2  masc. 

biijpn 

tiktol' 

thou  (m.)  wilt  hill 

2  fern. 

^^"^^^ 

tiktir 

thou  (f.)  ivilt  hill 

1  com. 

-"^?^* 

ektol' 

I  shall  hill 

Plur. 

.  3  mctsc. 

^^^'^p? 

yikt'lu 

they  (m.)  ivill  hill 

3  fern. 

nsrjpn 

tiktol'na 

they  (f.)    10  ill  hill 

2  masc. 

fepn 

tikt'lti' 

ye  (m.)  luill  hill 

2  fern. 

njb'Dpn 

tiktol'na 

ye  (f.)  will  hill 

1  com. 

b-jp: 

niktol' 

we  shall  hill. 

IMPERATIVE. 

SmG. 

2  masc. 

b-ii? 

k'tar 

hill  thou  (m.) 

2fem, 

^y^? 

kit'li' 

hill  thou  (f.) 

Plur. 

2  masc. 

^bpp 

kit'lil' 

hill  ye  (m.) 

2fem. 

-^V^l? 

k'tol'na 

hill  ye  (f.) 

Utile  or  small  as  an  adjective.  Thus  we  may  say  tJ'^'a  i:^*^  a  little  water ^  ::5a 
crib  a  little  bread  ;  but  ::"7a  could  not  be  used  in  such  phrases  as  a  little  house 
a  little  dooi'.     A  different  word  would  be  required  in  the  latter  case. 


S6 


ETYMOLOGY. 


36 


SlNGULAE. 


masc. 

kotel' 


fem. 

n5-jp     or 
kot'la' 


PARTICIPLES. 

Active. 


kote'letli 


Ivot'lim' 


Pl 


URAL. 


fem. 

trbdp        MlliiiQ 
kot'lotli' 


Passive, 


katul'    k'tula' 


nibit:p 
k'ttilim' 


trh^^i      hilled 
k'ttilotli' 


2.  Some  verbs  have  Pattalili  in  tlie  second  syllable  of 
tlie  Kal  future  and  imperative.  This  is  regularly  the 
case  with  those  which  have  Tsere  or  Hholem  in  the  pre- 
terite, thus  ^i?': ,  "^kt^ . 


KAL    FUTURE    with    CL 


3  masc. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

SlT^G. 

"^%T. 

nsDn 

nsDn 

'^I^pn 

"•tP^ 

Plur. 

^^sd:' 

nnipn 

^^3pn 

nj^iipn 

'IS?? 

IMPERATIVE. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

Sing. 

"^^? 

''in^. 

Plur. 

^'ins 

nnis 

3.  In  the  inflection  of  the  future  the  letters  prefixed 
mostly  denote  the  j)erson  and  those  afiixed  the  gender  or 
number;  *<  of  the  3  masc.  Istbp^  is  by  eu2:>hoinc  change  for 
1  from  i5in,  and  as  in  the  preterite  ^  is  appended  as  the 
sign  of  the  plural  ^^t?!?? ;  ri  of  the  3  fem.  Vjpn  is  the  sign 
of  the  fem.  (see  above  the  fem.  ending  of  the  participle), 
and  nj  is  appended  in  the  plural  !^:^'^ipr?  from  nsn .  In 
the  second  person  n  is  from  nr)5< ,  the  fem.  taking  '^ . 
from  "^r^i^ ,  the  masc.  plur.  ^  as  in  the  third  person,  and 


§37. 


2S1PHAL,    PIEL,    AND    PUAL. 


o( 


the  fern,  tnj  from  ?ipr}i? .     In  the  first  person  sing,  btb]:^  ^ 
i5  is  fi'om  "^rj? ;  in  the  phir.  ^lip? ,  5  is  from  ^:i5 . 

4.  In  the  imperative  no  i)ersonaI  prefix  is  needed,  as 
but  one  person  is  in  use ;  gender  and  number  are  distin- 
guished as  in  the  second  person  of  the  future. 


Vocabulary  7. 


tihr,:^  n.  f.  pL  vii^gins 
■ni"  V.  P.  to  sjyeah 
vjci-'  n.  m.  Joseph 
I?  adv.  so 
"Sht  n.  m.  roch 


tv,  n.  m.  f.  time 

n^nirbs  n.  m.  pL  Philistines 

"jVsr  n.  f.  Zioii 

*^:t^  n.  m.  crimson 

*i5^o  n.  m.  f.  gate. 


§  37.     Niphal^  Piel^  and  Pual  Futures^  etc, 

1.  Where  the  infinitive  has  n  prefixed  to  the  radicals 
this  is  rejected  in  the  future  after  the  personal  prefix, 
thus  from  bt?i^n  is  formed  bi:;^*i . 

2.  The  participles  of  the  Piel  and  subsequent  species 
are  formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  prefixing  'n  ,  a 
fragment  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  ^"a  or  nia . 


NIPIIAL 

FUTURE. 

3  masc. 

3  fern. 

2  masc. 

2  /^w. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

bi:]^;! 

^t?i>3n 

^t?)5n 

^"i'^t^ 

b-Jii^ 

Plur. 

.Vj;?: 

n:bi:;^n 

^b-jj^n 

n:bt:;^n 

IMPERATIVE. 

2  masG 

2  fern. 

2  ??z/r6r. 

2  fern. 

Sing. 

^^j^n 

'^^S^i 

Plur. 

^-=frsn 

'"'fr'^i^^' 

PARTICIPLE. 

Sing,   b-jp?     !ib::;:p   or   ribi:;:3 


fern. 


Plur.    D"'bt:;p2      t^i^VP? 


38 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§3 


PIEL    FUTURE. 


3  masc. 

3  fern.                2  masc. 

2  fern. 

1  C6»??l. 

Sing. 

^p!' 

biij^n         btopn 

''i^P^i^ 

^•:?i?s 

Plue. 

^'PP? 

^       IMPERATIVE. 

n:bt?pn 

•'??■ 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

2  ??iffsc. 

2  fem. 

SmG. 

biop 

'^^Dp            Plur. 

PARTICIPLE. 

^b:2p 

rcb^P 

masc. 

/m. 

masc. 

fem. 

Sing. 

"^m 

njcop^          Plue. 

PUAL    FUTURE. 

D''bpp^ 

mibtppia 

3  masc. 

3  fejTi.              2  m«^c. 

2  /em. 

1  C6>m. 

Sing. 

b^P? 

biDpn         bbjpn 

•ibiipn 

^^P« 

Plue. 

*9i?: 

IMPERATIVE  wanting. 

^5^^?^ 

!=i?I5= 

PARTICIPLE. 

wia^c.  fem.  masc.  fem. 

Sing.       btapti    nbE>|:i9  or  J^btsj^ia      Plur.    a^?:?;?^    f^'i%<^ 


Vocabulary  8. 


^'asj  V.  K.  to  say 
tr^'is  n.  f.  covenant 
nin  int.  Z6>/   behold ! 
nit:  adj.  <7«9^^/ 
Sp?;!  n.  m.  JacoJ) 
'\n^y!  n.  Jericlio 


"ins  V.   P.    ?^<9   honor ;  K  ^f6J 

Z'(?  honored 
*iin5  n.  m.  honor 
n^bnip  n.  ni.  pi.  ]}riests 
D'il  V.  K.  ^(9  <??/i,  ma/^d  a  co- 
venant 


38. 


39 


yi'a  Y.  K.  to  ivitJiliold^  Iceep  ^t:^  v.  H.  to  hum  incense 

back  ^^  adj.  Ixid.,  evil 

Tr^J  n.  f.  comj)any^  assembly  nitj  v.  K.  to  forget 

^'".^''^V  in  the iwesence  of  "rb©  v.  N.  to  Iceep  one^s  self^ 
cy  11.  111.  ^people  tctke  heed.    . 

"]D  conj.  lest^  tlicit  not 


38.     HipMl^  Hoj>lial^  and  Hitlipael  Futures^  etc. 


SlXG. 

Plue. 


3  masc. 


HIPHIL    FUTURE. 


3  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern. 

b-ippn       b'l-jpri        "^b^ippn 
njb-jpp      ^.b-i-jpp       nsbijpp 


1  com. 

bvjpa 


2  ?/2«SC. 


IMPERATIVE. 

2  /e//i. 


2  wasc. 


Smo.        bi:pn         '^b^-^pn        Plur.       ^b-^bpn 


2  /^'m. 


PARTICIPLE. 

W2«sc.  /(j?7i.  masc.  fern. 

Sing,     b^bp^    J"')^"^!?^  or  f^b^jj^'a        Pj.ur.  D*'?^"^!?^    ^'i^*''^!?^ 


HOPHAL 

FUTURE. 

3  masc. 

3  /m. 

2  ??Z«5C. 

2  /6??i. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

bi:p^ 

^"^1?J? 

^^i?I? 

''^tppp 

bt2p^ 

Plur. 

^'Pp? 

njb-jpn 

^b-jpn 

s^Jr'^i?^ 

bi:p5 

IMPERATIVE  wanting. 


PARTICIPLE. 


masc.  fern.  masc.  fern. 

Smo.    bi^p-a      J^^tp'^  ov  f^b-jptt       Plur.    D'^3t:p'a     Jnibup-a 


40 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  39. 


SlIs^O. 

Plur. 


3  masc. 


HITHPAEL    FUTURE. 

3  fern.  2  masc. 


2  fern.  1  com. 


IMPERATIVE. 

2  masc.               2  fern.                                      2  masG.  2  fern. 

Sing.       bibj^nn        •^l^tpi^nri        Plur.       ^^J^pnn  njbDpnn 

PARTICIPLE. 

wi«sc,                       fern.                                              masc.  fern. 

Sing.  bDj^nia   nbtppn)?  or  nbtD;?ni2     Plur.  D^^^l?n"a  nife;?ra 


Vocabulary  9. 

"ion  n.  m.  hindness^  mercy  tjb^  v.  H.  to  cause  to  reign 

2?T?^.  n.  m.  salvcttlon  n;b?^  n.  f.  cry 

ns  adv.  thus  ^^'i?    V.    H.    i^6>   he  ivise^   act 
TiJib  V.  PI.  to  cause   to  ])iit      ivisely 

072,  to  clothe  "™iiJ  u.  f.  gladiins 

"yoyi  V.  H.  to  cause  to  rain  y\W  n.  m.  py 

nt2^  n.  m.  rain  n^Sxu;?  n.  f.  remnant 


39.     Peculiar  Forms. 


1.  "When  tlie  last  radical  is  3  or  n,  it  is  united  by 
Dagliesli-forte  with  personal  endings  beginning  with  the 
same  letter,  e.  g.  "^n^i^n  for  ^nnii^n,    npi^n  for  npbOT . 

2.  The  vowel-letter  n  may  be  added  to  the  2  masc. 
sing,  of  the  j)i^eterite,  and  dropped  from  the  fern,  plurals 
of  the  future  and  imperative,  e.  g.  J^r^^^? ,  3"?^?^- 


I 


§   40.  PARAGOGIC    AND    APOCOPATED    FUTURE.  41 

3.  Final  )  is  sometimes  added  to  2l  of  the  preterite,  and 
to  u  and  i  of  the  future,  e.  g.  '}^:^7,t  i  VP^I^  • 

4.  The  Kal  construct  infinitive,  in  a  few  instances,  has 
Pattahh  in  place  of  Hholem,  iiiiZ^,  ^?^;  and  occasionally 
it  takes  a  feminine  ending  Hjbn^  for  pii . 

5.  The  Niphal  absolute  infinitive  may  be  either  bib;:p  or 
b'lij^n;  blip  may  be  used  for  the  absolute  as  well  as  the 
construct  infinitive  Piel. 

6.  A  few  verbs  have  Pattahh  or  Se2:hol  as  the  vowel 
of  the  second  radical  in  the  Piel  preterite,  ^'ij? ,  "liiT 
instead  of  iz^t'p ,  ^^1 ;  Pattahh  also  occurs  in  the  Ilith- 
pael  P^prn. 

7.  Pual  sometimes  has  Kamets-Hliatuph  and  Hophal 
Kibbuts  in  the  first  syllable   n^3  ,    niisn. 

8.  Tav  of  the  prefixed  nn  in  Hithpael  is  transposed 
with  the  first  radical  of  the  verb,  if  it  be  one  of  the 
sibilants  D,  iZJ  or  W;  witii  S  the  n  is  transposed  and  in 
addition  changed  to  t: ;  with  "i ,  t:  or  n ,  and  occasionally 
with  other  letters,  the  ti  is  assimilated  to  the  first  radical 
and  united  with  it  by  Daghesh-forte,  bincn^  pi-^'iT}^ 
p^"0- 


§  40.  Faracjogie  and  Apocojpated  Figure  and  Im/perative. 

1.  The  vowel  H^  is  appended  to  the  first  person  of  the 
future,  and,  in  a  very  few  instances,  to  the  third  person 
singular,  to  express  desire  or  determination,  f^pP:D  ioe  will 
hreah  or  let  us  hreah.  This  is  called  the  paragogic  or 
cohortative  future. 

!2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  a  shortened 
form  of  the  second  or  third  persons  singular  and  expresses 
a  wish  or  command,  or,  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  or 
prohibition.      In  perfect  verbs  it  is  distinguished  from 


42  ETYMOLOGY.  §    41. 

the  simple  future  only  in  the  Hij^hil  species,  in  which  the 
''.  of  the  ultimate  is  changed  to  (..  ),  bsirjn  tliou  mmjest 
understand  or  understand  thou. 

3.  Paragogic  n^  is  sometimes  appended  to  the  mascu- 
line singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  command 
into  an  entreaty  or  expression  of  desire,  ni^^iz?  oh^  hear  ! 
or  pray ^  hear  ! 

4.  The  addition  of  H^  to  a  future  or  imperative  com- 
monly causes  the  rejection  of  its  last  vowel,  except  in  the 
Hiphil  species  where  ''.  remains  or  is  restored  n^iatDX, 
•^^■'^?^.  The  Kal  imperative  with  o  becomes  !"»b-j|5 
hofld;  the  Kal  imperative  with  (z  becomes  Tny:^  MhlCdhd, 


§  41.      Vav  Conversive. 

Vav  Conversive  is  a  modification  of  the  copulative  1 
and^  and  is  so  called  because  it  has,  in  certain  cases, 
the  effect  of  converting  the  future  into  a  preterite  and 
the  preterite  into  a  future. 

Vav  Conversive  prefixed  to  the  future  takes  Pattahh 
followed  by  Daghesh -forte  in  the  next  letter,  '^'^o;^  he  ivill 
shut,  "I'iiD^i  a /id  he  shut.  If  this  be  Yodh  with  ShVa, 
Daghesh  is  usually  omitted,  tS'Hj?^!]  .  Before  5?  of  the  fii'st 
person,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh,  Pattahh  is  length- 
ened to  Kamets,  ^^"1^^  .  The  verb  commonly  suffers  the 
same  change  as  in  the  apocopated  future,  §  40.  2,  and  in 
the  first  person  sometimes  has  paragogic  n^. 

Vav  Conversive  prefixed  to  the  jDreterlte  has  the  same 
pointing  with  Yav  Conjunctive,  §  28,  ^rbizJ  he  has  kept, 
"n^th  and  he  tvill  heep. 

For  the  influence  of  Vav  Conversive  on  the  accent,  see 
§  17.  6. 


i 


§  42.  verbs  with  suffixes.  48 

Vocabulary  10. 

rns!  11.  m.  Aaron  ni';-  v.  K.  to  dwells  inlictbit 

-i5  adv.  not  tijro  n.  f.  tunic 

"bsj  prep,  to^  unto^  respecting  rcb^  n.  f.  queen 

isjj?  11.  m.  ashes  ^^^79  n.  m.  Moraecai 

D"^!??  11.  m.  pi.  garments  bip  v.  P.  to  receive^  accept 

'TIS  11.  m.  hail  nnp  v.  K   {iwi.a^  come  near 

T^VT)  adv.  hither  approach 

ptT  V.  K.  (fut.  cC)  to  cry  S^np  v.  K.  (fat.  «)  to  rend 

Mjb^T  n.  f.  cry  i^^^  ii.  m.  head 

nnn  n.  f.  sword  yni  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  wash 

5^5;'  V.  K.  to  he  weary  pii)  n.  m.  sachcloth 

n;*  n.  f.  hand  nS©  v.  K.  (fut.  ct)  to  send, 

rn;'  or  ti'-nj  v.  K.  to  drive  out 

§  42.      F^rZ'S  with   Suffixes, 

1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to 
tlie  verbs  of  whicli  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of 
the  suffixes  have  already  been  given,  §  29.  2. 

2.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  suffer  the 
following  changes  before  suffixes : — • 

PRETERITE. 

Sing.  3  fern.     T\^  becomes  fi.. 

2  77iasc.  T\  sometimes  becomes  n  before  "^3 

2  fern.     T\  becomes  ^7\ . 
Plur.  2  masc.    dpi  becomes  ^V\.     The  ''1  fern,  plur,  does 
not  occur  with  suffixes. 

FUTURE. 

Plur.  2  and  3  feni.  !^2^"^pri  jjecomes  ^'^^V\ . 

3.  The   suffixes    are   joined   directly   to   those   verbal 
forms  which  end  in  a  vov/el :  those  forms  which  end  in  a 


44  ETYMOLOGY.  §  42. 

consonant  insert  before,  ^,  DD  and  "jD  a  vocal  SliVa,  and 
before  tlie  remaining  suffixes  a  full  vowel,  wliicli  in  tJie 
preterite  is  mostly  a  and  in  tlie  future  and  imperative 
mostly  e. 

4.  Nun  is  sometimes  inserted  between  the  future  of  the 
verb  and  the  suffix,  pai'ticularly  in  emphatic  and  pausal 
forms.  This  is  called  Nun  Epenthetic.  It  is  commonly 
united  by  Daghesh-forte  with  3  of  the  1  pers.  suffix  and 
1  of  the  2  pers.,  to  which  it  is  almost  ahv^ays  assimilated. 

5.  The  3  pers.  suffix  is  liable  to  the  followhig  contrac- 
tions ;  in  the  masc,  ^n^  becomes  i ,  ^ni .  becomes  I"" . ,  ^nn 
becomes  ^n_,  ^hd..  becomes  ^r.. ;  in  the  fern,  n  ^  becomes 
♦^,,  0?^.  becomes  nn_,  riD,  becomes  ns. 

6.  The  first  and  second  jjersons  of  the  verb  do  not 
receive  suffixes  of  the  same  23erson  with  themselves. 

The  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Preterite  Kal  V^p  assumes  the 
following  forms  in  combination  with  suffixes  : — 

Sing.    1  com.        ^ii'^^_     k'tala'ni        lie  hilled  me 

2  masc.       'n'^t^p     k'talldja'      he  hilled  thee  (m.) 

2  fern.         ^^9P     k'tfilakh'       he  hilled  thee  (f.) 

^  (  ^nfep     k'tala'hu    )  .     i  -n   ii  - 

3  masc.  J      .:,    •     ,.    ,   ,         K.  he  hiUed  h/im 


iVjp  k'talo' 

3  fern,.  J^pt:p  k'talah'  he  hilled  her 

Plur.  1  com.  ^^P"?!?  k'tala'nu  he  hilled  us 

2  masc.  Q^^'^p  k'tal'khem'  he  hilled  you  (m.) 
2 /em.  pb-jp  k'taridien  he  hilled  you  (t) 

3  9nasc.  laptop  k'talam'  he  hilled  them  (m.) 
3  fern.  1^i3p  k'talan'  he  hilled  them  {i.) 

7.  Verbs  havinfr  ^  in  the  Preterite  substitute  Tsere  for 
Kamets  with  the  second  radical  throughout  the  Kal  pre- 
terite with  suffixes,  e.  g.  ''pb'ia  from  bia . 

The  remaining  parts  of  the  verb  are  sufficiently  repre 
sented  in  Table  VII. 


§43. 


45 


Vocabulary  11. 


::5J  n.  m.  father 

^:is<  n.  m.  Lord 

ns  n.  f.  mother 

na  n.  f.  daughter 

b^a  V.  P.  to  maize  great 

pi"i  V.  H.  to  overtalce 

0"^  n.  m.  lilood 


I'i^n  11.  111.  Haman 

nij^  11.  ni.  altar 

nrnbTS  11,  f.  ivar^  fighting 

^yo  V.  P.  ^6>  shut  u/p ;  H.  ^c 

cause  to  shut 
"ISC  V.  P.  to  recount^  tell 
i^jn  n.  \\\.  famine. 


VoCABrLAEY    12. 


Tcy^'Si.  adv.  horo 

Tt""X    11.   111.  7?2C^7Z. 

Tiiiyx  n.  f.  yjoman 
ronn  11.  f.  blessing 
p'tsis"  n.  Damascus 
X>S  n.  m.  f.  7^;a2/ 
^vH  V.  K.  /6'  go^  vjalh 
"lij  V.  K.  to  remember 
7>n  T.  P.  to  deliver 
t\V'^  V.  P.  /<9  soil^  defile 
biL-12  T.  H.  to  cause  to  rule 
Xj  jjray^  Ijrrag  tltee 


^iz  prep,  before^  in  the  p'e^ 

sence  of 
^'^^  n.  in.  siicMing^  hahe 
Tjr  Y.  P.  ^c>  crown 
uirs  V.  K.  ^'c*  take  off  clothes 
rp.^  11.  f.  trouble 
D:''?ro  n.  f.  (hx.feet 
D^nn  adj.  merciful 
nicbi^  11.  f.  garment 
czir  V.  H.  /6»  7'/6'6  ^arZ^ 
S?t^'  V.  K.  to  hear 
iL'EP  V.  K.  /^  lay  hold  of  ^  seize. 


NOUNS. 
§  43.     Gender  and  Number. 

1.  Nouns  in  Hebrew  are  of  two  genders,  masculine 
and  feminine.  The  masculine  has  no  characteristic  ter- 
mination ;  the  feminine  ends  in  n^  or  ri. 

2.  There  are  three  numbers,  the  singuhir,  dual,  and 
plural.     The  dual  is  restricted  for  the  most  part  to  the 


46 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§44. 


names  of  objects  occiirring  in  pairs.     It  ends  in  W] .  in 
nouns  of  both  genders. 

3.  The  plural  of  masculine  nouns  ends  in  D^^ .  ,  or  more 
rarely  )^,  ,  and  that  of  feminine  nouns  in  ni . 


to  be   observed,   however,  that 


lack   the    characteristic 


a  number  of 
in   the 


ending 


4.  It  is 
feminine  nouns 
singular.  Also,  that  some  masculine  nouns  take  ni  in 
the  plural,  some  feminines  take  D">.  ,  and  some  of  each 
gender  take  indiif  erently  D^ .  or  ni . 


44.     Fi 


einmine. 


Dual^  and  Plural, 


The  following  changes  result  from  appending  the  ter- 
minations for  gender  and  number. 

I.  The  feminine  ending  3n  . 

1.  If  the  ultimate  is  simjDle  there  is  no  change. 

fern. 

second^   tr^^.V. 


masG. 

fern. 

masc. 

'^i?^ 

an  EgijijUan^ 

t\^^Ta 

^3'i? 

''^'9? 

right, 

n-'D^';'- 

liji^ 

'»^^:s 


interior, 


iT'^'^rs 


Njri^     finding, 


ni52ii3 


2.  If  the  ultimate  is  mixed,  an  unaccented  Seghol  is 
inserted  before  the  termination  to  prevent  the  concur- 
rence of  vowelless  consonants,  §  10.  3,  and  to  this  a  j^re- 
ceding  a,  e  or  I  is  commonly  assimilated. 


masc. 

fern. 

masc. 

fern. 

ni^TD 

hrohen, 

^^^"^"^ 

niis' 

lying 

^??^* 

triple, 

r^-iDi>m 

"^i"J^ 

speaking 

ri'^i"^ 

r?)?'9 

gathered. 

^??P^ 

T^&? 

large 

J^")"^^ 

0"^^^^, 

reddish. 

n^'^r!^^5 

'O^^W 

imverious 

^'^M 

^sir" 

shedding. 

f^?sin' 

b-^iiiJia 

prudent 

r^^sto 

3.  If  the  last   letter   be    a  guttural,  Pattahh  is  sub- 


stituted for  Seghol,  §  10.  3. 


§44. 


FEMimNE,   DUAL,  Al^B    PLURAL. 


47 


^li'Q  friend.,    fem.  rrni^ 
^rizj    hearing,  fem.  rj^"bin' 


yisTTS    heard, 
vy^'12    touching, 


fem.  ns^-bi^a 
fem.  r.yii'a 


11.  The  feminine  n^  ,  the  plural  D"".  or  rii^  and  the 
dual  a\. 

1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  tlie  penult, 
excejit  from  nouns  in  n .. . 


bina  great, 

rihj  high, 

y^r\2  loriUen, 

n'liT'a  restoring, 

'ji'ii?  master, 

"ji^lT  memorial, 


fem.  n'^i-ia  pi.  D^Si-ia  f.  pi.  ni5i-;5 

fem.  nr.hs  pi.  D^nh5  f.'pl.  ninhf 

fem.  ni^ns         pi.  D-^n-irs  f.  pi.  nin^ns 

fem.  nn-^TiJia        pi.  D^n^ir^  f.  pi.  nii^^^ 

pi.  n^n^  f-'p)?  inter]}rder,  pi.  D^^^bia 

pi.  D-inn^  nib  A^ay'^^,  pi.  ninnb 

pi.  niriiDT  nir  ^mj9^,  pi.  D'^n:? 

du.  D^sss  :?3i  rih^  pi.  n-'i^b^ 


2.  In  an  accented  mixed  ultimate 

(1)  Tsere  is  rejected  except  from  monosyllables,  or 
when  the  preceding  vowel  is  a  pretonic  Kamets.  Other 
vowels  suffer  no  chano;e. 


^^n 

going. 

fem. 

T   :     1 

pi. 

D^ibh            f.  pi.  nibbh 

%%z 

shedd.ing, 

fem. 

nisir 

pi. 

D^psuj           f.  pi.  niisiz? 

tJD-'llJ 

judge. 

pi. 

QipS-p 

niT^     cdtar,    pi.  ninsTia 

K'^ 

])riest. 

pi. 

Din? 

b^ia       7'^^/,      pi.  nibp^a 

but 

^^ 

dead. 

fem. 

^™ 

pi. 

n^n'a            f.  pi.  n™ 

cbir 

complete, 

fem. 

r.fcb-tr 

pi. 

D"i^bo            f.  pi.  ni-ab-.^ 

^i; 

dry. 

fem. 

nin;! 

pi. 

□iirn;'            f.  pi.  ni'cn;' 

V. 

tree^ 

pi. 

D123? 

D'i?      namo,     pi.  nii2i2? 

rri 

thigh. 

du. 

D??"^? 

^is    A^^ryy,    pi.  D^nns 

(2)   If   two    consonants   have    coalesced   in   the   final 
letter,  this  is  doubled,  and  the  j^receding  vowel,  if  long, 


48  ETYMOLOGY.  §  44. 

is  shortened.     A  like  doubling  occurs  in  a  few  instances 
where  there  has  been  no  contraction  in  the  form. 

nn  (from  nin)  mncJi,  fem.  nin  jil.  D^in  f.  pi.  nSa^i 
DP  (from  ui2T\)  2:>:'rfect^  fem.  r.TSP  pi.  d-^-/2p  f.  pi.  niisn 
1^)^  small.,    fem.  nrjpp       pi.  D-^rjp    f.  pi.  nirjp 

pb?  ^/^^^^:>,      fem.  nj^isy      pi.  D^]^^?    f.  pi.  nip)2? 

13  (from  lia)  garden^  pi.  D^^4      1?^*2^  '^^A^6^^,  pi.  nisii? 

T3?  (from  Tb)  ^^a?^,      p].D^-73?      b^in  bramble^        pi.  D^!?nn 
ph  (from  ppn)  statute,  pi.  Q-^pn     nb  (from  nnb)  7^m;'/,  pi.  niib 
qx  (for  ?i:5<)  7i(96?(^,      du.  D^Si^     1©  (from^ii?)  ^6>6>/7^,pL  a:*!© 


3.  Nouns  having  an  unaccented  vowel  in  the  ulti- 
mate, commonly  called  Segholates,  §  10.  3,  drop  this 
vowel  before  the  feminine  ending  n  ^ ;  in  the  plural 
pre  tonic  Kamets  is  inserted,  §  10.  2,  and  the  vowel  of 
the  first  radical  falls  away ;  the  dual  sometimes  drops 
the  unaccented  Seghol  and  sometimes  inserts  pretonic 
Kamets. 

•jb72  Icing,  fem.  r.3bi2  queen^          pL  D'^P^^    Mngs 

nnb  cavort,  fem.  r-nnp  pi.  D*i"^nD 

b:y  calf,  fem.  nb^:^  pi.  d^3?? 

nric  saying,  fem.  nirx  or  nS^oij         j^l.  D-^n^x 

c:?:^  xirengtJh,  fem.  ni22f?  pi.  Q-'i?!^:?  * 

b:^i  /^/7v/,  fem.  nbi!;5  lady,              pi.  D'^l^i^s    /^r^/^, 

brn  foot,  du.  n:^brn  itx     ^^r,   du.  D.-^rti^ 

^nsi  /i;//^^,  du.  0^:5^3  "i^p  At*;-;?,  du.  t3^':ipor  n^bnp 

r?.  Medial  Vav  frequently  quiesces  in  Hholem  and  Yodh  in  Tsere  before  Ihe 
dual  and  plural  endings. 

T\^h  death,        pi.  Q'riia  t\^{  olive  tree,  y>^.    Q^n^T 

■,■><   iniquity,     pi.  D-^iix  yb  eye,  du.  D";3^5 


FEMININE,    DUAL,    AND    PLURAL. 


§  45. 

4.  In  a  simple  ultimate 
(1)   n^  is  rejected. 

n^;"  fair^  fem.  ne^ 

ntbls>      doing ^  fem.  nirb 

nffi?i2  'z^6>r^,  pi.  D'^ir^'a 

nitn^  appearance^    pi.  D^'if^li^ 

f^?.n''9  camj?^  clu.  D^in^a 


49 


pi.  D'^S^ 

pi.  D-'iiJi? 


^rP    ^' 


eed^ 


(2)  'I    becomes  ri^\  ,  D'l':.  or  n\  ,  ni^.. 

^nt:    /r^6V^.,       fem.  nHi:  pi.  tD^Hts                   f. 

^3?     afflicted^  fem.  n^:5[  p].  n-^^rs?                   f. 

''in:^  Hehveio,  fem.  nHny  j^l.  D^^Hny  or  Q"'nn5'  f. 

''«      island,       pi.  D-^^x  '^rnrba  Philistine^ 


f.  pi.  r^D:' 
f.  p].  niirj? 

pi.  ni^i? 
pi.  D''tn 


pi.  niHip 
pi.  ni*^:? 
pi.  ni^-iny 
pi.  D-^nt^bD 


§  45.     In  Feminine  JSfouns. 

1.  Feminine  nouns  in  n^  of  the  form  derived  from 
Segholates,  §  44.  3,  insert  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural, 
and  drop  their  original  vowel ;  all  others  simply  substi- 
tute the  plural  for  the  singular  ending. 


n^b^a 

queen, 

pi.  mbb-a 

ni^^iiji 

salvation^ 

pi.  niiii»7 

nnnp 

covert, 

pi.  ninno 

ninn 

Uessing, 

pi.  niinzi 

nsnn 

reproach, 

pi.  nisin 

n-bp] 

vengeance, 

pi.  niiips 

niias 

sayincj, 

pi.  T\\\yi)^_ 

5^^? 

counsel^ 

pi.  TW, 

ninn 

desert, 

pi.  niinn 

nh 

garden, 

pi.  nib 

^^??- 

lady, 

pi.  nibrs 

T  •    t: 

ship, 

pi.  ni'^'zs: 

2.  Feminine  nouns  in  n  (or  n_)  substitute  the  plural 
for  the  singular  ending,  and  reject  the  preceding  vowel,  if 
it  be  Hholem  or  derived  from  Tsere ;  otherwise  they  restore 
it  to  what  it  would  have  been,  if  n  had  not  been  appended, 
§  44. 1.  2.  Nouns  in  n*' .  take  ni"  and  nouns  in  rii  take  tiy^^, 
3 


60 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  io. 


mM)2  (frojn     "Tairtj)    observance^   pi.  niitsir^ 

pi.  niSD5!;i9 

pi.  ni^^ianx 

pi.  nipp^-js 

23l.  nii^SD 

pi.  nih; 

pi.  nippi-' 


nbiiitia  (from  ^32??)  hiife, 

ni3'^^"i55  (from  nt^li?)  reddish^ 

miV^  (from  p"'?"'"'?)  'imrse^ 

mit:  (from  5?rj)  rw?.^, 

n:^^2  (from  V^X)  touching^ 

npii""  (from  pai"^)  sucker^ 


8ing. 

ti:n3  tunic. 


pi.         sing.  pi. 

•.:■■.  •     T        ,  7  •    -:       I 

n:p|)     n^n^-a   Egyptian  looman^  xr\'hrfi 


nbsTZJ  6«7'  6/  corn^  D'^^siiJ  niDb^    Mngdom^ 


ni^Db^a    ^ 


3.  Before  tlie  dual  endins;  n     becomes  in    ;  and  nouns 
in  n^  follow  tlie  rule  of  other  Segliolates,  §  44.  11.  3. 

r\%yi    tliiglh^     du.  Q>^3n^         f^^-J    folding-dooi\  du.  Q>^'b^ 
nsixj    Z/^^,         du.  ornsio         nbis;  6^^6>?^A,  du.  ^"^M^, 


nsTU 


^^ai 


du.  a;^n5T3D         ntnp  Z>^'^6^8, 


du.  n^nicnD 


VOCABULAEY     13. 


15^5   n.  m.  f.  a  stone 
ni^K   n.  m.  jEdom 
"yt^^   n.  f.  a  well 
lii?n5   n.  Giheon 
bi'ij    adj.  ^r6(2^,  Z<2;'{7^ 
"^in   n.  m.  nation 
TTijn   adj.  new 
nib   V.  K.  2^0  cajptiire 


^b')a   V.  K.  ?^6>  reign 

^t   n.  (with  art.)  Ai 

^"S   n.  f.  (:?^'^^ 

l"!    adj.  (•"4"?)  '^nnc\  many 

nyn   n.  f.  6^;^7 

•f'ii?   V.  H.  to  cast 

n;j^n  n.  f.  ip^'^.^^)  fig-t'^^ee^fig. 


§  46.     Construct   State. 

1.  When  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  dependence 
on  another,  the  fii'st  is  put  in  the  construct  state.     A 


47, 


rORMxVTION    OF    THE    COIS'STRUCT. 


51 


noun  wliicli  is  not  so  related  to  a  following  one,  is  said 
to  be  in  tlie  absolute  state.  Thus  "il^^r  word  is  in  tlie  ab- 
solute state  ;  but  in  the  expression  ^^i2n  "ln'^  tlie  ivord  oj' 
tlie  Icing,  inn  is  in  the  construct  state. 

2.  The  construct  is  a  shortened  form,  the  speaker 
naturally  hastening  forward  from  the  first  noun  to  the 
second,  which  is  necessary  to  complete  the  idea. 


§  47.     Its  Formation, 

The  following  changes  occur  in  the  formation  of  the 
construct : 

1.  The  feminine  n^  becomes  fi_;  the  dual  u*}  _  and  the 
plural  Di .  become  ^  „  . 


"i^     garden,  const.  r25 


rob^ 


queen, 


nb5?  calf, 
nfes  lady, 


const,  rsb^ 
const.  nb^3? 
const.  n^?n 


D"^)^^     statutes,  const,  ^^y} 

D"t:2'p  judges,  const,  ''psi^ 

c:'KO   /(?^^,  const,  ^y^-] 

D;':Tij    6«r5,  const.  '^i.Tij 


2.  In  a  mixed  ultimate  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh 
so  is  Tsere  when  preceded  by  pretonic  Kamets. 


absol. 

const. 

absol 

const. 

T\ 

fish. 

^^ 

IP! 

old,            IPT 

ni*^:!? 

star. 

niis 

^^^ 

court,      lin 

t^pia 

sanctuary. 

t^'^'Q 

^33 

heavy,    'tis  or  "ins 

3.  Medial   1  commonly  quiesces  in  Hholem  and 
Tsere  ;  final  '^ .  becomes  "^ , . 


m 


n;;^     death,         const.  ni)a  ^^'^    vcclley,        const,  x^a 

tj;;n     midst,         const.  ?fin  n"^i     house,  const,  r.""!? 

nint'ff)  r  ?/;;.!:?,  const,  miffip  my.  fountains,  const,  r.irj? 

but  "ji?  iniquity,  const,  p?  '^n      /{A,  const,  ''n 


52  ETYMOLOGY.  §  48. 

4.  In  a  simple  ultimate  n  ^  becomes  Si ..  ;  other  vowels 
remain  uncliangecl. 

nio  slieejp^        const.  ™  ^2fi)3  going  fortli^  const,  ^^iji^ 

n:b'-!  shepherd^  const,  rii?'"!  xn^  A6>6'?^,  const,  i^n^ 

nilp-a  <?«^^/<?,        const,  nip-a  s^n';  fearing^         const,  ^i;" 

hiiOT  '?6y;?'^^,        const,  "rkm  ''-is  /y?^/^,  const,  ^ns 

5.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  syllable 
preceding  the  accent ;  and  if  this  occasions  a  concurrence 
of  vowelless  consonants,  a  short  vowel  is  inserted  between 
them,  §  10.  1. 


absol. 

const. 

absol. 

const. 

rn^ 

master^ 

P"I^ 

riDnn 

Messing^ 

ni"ia 

r^lT 

memor 

ial^ 

i™t 

'^^i?? 

vengeance^ 

^^)?r 

11^ 

iDord^ 

^^^ 

o^insiri 

lips, 

'insiiJ 

1?? 

cloudy 

n 

n-ipbt) 

Mngs, 

''^b^ 

^=1? 

reed^ 

n?)? 

niDin 

reproaches, 

nisin 

ri^'? 

interjpi 

-eter^ 

r5^^ 

niins 

threshing  floors 

,  nihj 

Dib 

heart,, 

nnb' 

nitinis 

beasts, 

-:  1- 

See  Table  XVII.     Declension  of  Nouns. 

VOCABULAEY    14. 

JiJ'a^  n.  Amanah  ^sij  n.  m.  (ni)  ditst 

in  int.  lo!  hehold!  ^W  n.  m.  Esau 

"int:  V.  K.  to  he  dean,  pure  "isns  n.  Pharpar 

iqb  n.  f.  iving  bip  n.  m.  (n'l)  voice,  sound 

n^ns  n.  m.  cheruh  "jb]? ,    ]!:)?    adj.    (nstop)    ^^^^^^^^^ 

"ib'a  V.  K.  to  sell  small 

^n;  n.  m.  (D**    and  ni)  Oliver 

§  48.     Paragogic   Vo^vels. 

1.  The  unaccented  vowel  n  ^  added  to  nouns  indicates 
motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  whence  it  is  called 


§49. 


NOUNS    WITH    SUFFIXES. 


53 


He  directive  or  He  local,  D'laTS  heaven^  JTQ*''^^   heaven 
ward. 

2.  Paragogic  "^ .  ,  i ,  or  n  ^  are  in  poetic  or  arcliaiic 
forms  sometimes  aj)pended  to  nouns  without  ailPecting  the 
sense,  e.  g.  ''23  ,  Gen.  xlix.  11  for  ^n  ,  in^n  Gen.  i.  24  for 
n'^n,  nnyiTiJ''  Ps.  iii.  3  for  ni^^t?-^ . 


§  49.     Nouns  ivitli  Suffixes,  see  Table  XVIII. 

1.  The  pronominal  suffixes  are  ajDpended  to  nouns  in 
the  sense  of  possessive  pronouns. 

2.  The  forms  which  they  assume  when  attached  to 
singular  nouns  or  combined  with  "^  ..  of  nouns  in  the  dual 
and  plural  are  shown  in  Table  V. 

I.  Before  the  grave  suffixes  (viz.  :  DD  ,  ^D  ,  Dn   ,  in)^ 
Nouns  of  both  genders  and  of  all  numbers  take  the 

form  of  the  construct. 

suffix. 

Drnn^      your  word 
DD^"inT     your  ivords 
□i'^nsti?    your  lips 
D Dunns'©  your  lips 
Dinsnn    your  hies  sing 
DD"'nipnn  your  blessing s. 

II.  Before  the  light  suffixes, 

1.  Singular  or  plural  nouns  with  a  feminine  ending 
adopt  the  construct  form,  only  t^  _  is  changed  to   n^. 

nsb-Q  queen,        const,  insb^  suf.  '^nsb^a  my  queen 

tn'iDb'a  queens,      const,  niibia  suf.  "^i^bb^a  ^my  queens 

ninn  Jdessing,    const,  f^s^^  suf.  '^r'S^^  my  blessing 

niDin  blessings,  const,  tro'^^  suf.  "'nbin  ony  blessings. 


nn"! 

ivord. 

const. 

^^^. 

D'l'in^ 

iDords, 

const. 

^'i^i^ 

ca^insiy 

lips. 

const. 

''bsi?' 

n'lhsTij 

lip)S, 

const. 

Thrm 

J^sna 

blessing. 

const. 

n3"^a 

niinn 

blessings. 

const. 

niiia 

2.  Siugular   or  23lural  nouns   not  having   a   feminine 


54  ETYMOLOGY.  §   49 

ending  adopt  tlie  same  form  as  before  the  absolute  plura, 
termination. 

plur.  svf. 

isi^     Jieart,    Q^nnb  ^22b  ^^   my  hearty    '^i^'p    my  liearfs 

'ns'i     tvord^   D'^nn"^  ■''in^      qny  word.,    ^^'^^.    ^^^y  tvords 

t:ttj*  judge^  D^bsp  ^h'^'p    my  judge.,    "^brJ?  my  judges 
^b'59     Mng^     t]"'i^^  '^P^^    ^^^^ 


*  The  resemblance  to  the  plural  form  does  not  imply  that  the  word  is  plural, 
but  simply  that  appending  the  suffix  produces  the  same  effect  upon  the  vowels 
and  syllables  of  the  word  as  the  addition  of  the  plural  ending. 

3.  Dual  nouns  retain  tlie  form  wliicli  tliey  have  before 
the  absolute  dual  termination. 

suf.  suf. 

D^^;     hands^  ^'I'l     my  liands^    S'^'^T^     ears^  "^itsj     my  ears 
CJ:'b;0  feet^       ^b:n  my  fcet^        D?ri?^  li]_:>s.,   ^ns'to  my  Ivps. 

III.  Before  all  suffixes,  grave  or  light, 

1.  Segholate  nouns  in  the   singular  drop  their  unac- 
cented vowel,  as  before  the  feminine  ending  n^. 

tjb^       Iting  "'sb'a      my  Mng^      ^^?r^       your  hing 

ino      covert  ''>"pp      my  covert^   d^>7P       your  covert 

Xi%b      strength       ^'k^^^    my  strength,  o^i'^^?     your  strength 
h^h       ivorh  ""bi/^s       my  work,     t]6b^s       your  ivo?'h 

t^'ih'SXi  ohservemce  ^kr^'^y^  my  ohserv,^  ciri'n^ara  your  ohserv. 
nsns     tunic  ''^f^?    "^ny  tunic,     t]Dr>!r\3     your  tunic. 

2.  Final  letters  which  are  doubled  in  the  plural,  or  in 
which  two  consonants  have  coalesced,  are  doubled. 

2i>lur.       svf. 

15      garden  D^S      ^5      ony  garden^       0^25     your  garden 
nb     lieavt     niib     ^iib      my  heeu%  Di?>     your  heart 

isiii  wheel    D-'isii^  ^isifii  my  loheel,  052?^'^  your  wheel 

pr*     stettute  D^pn    "^pn     uiy  statute  .,\f\\i'^^:^p,     your  statute 

[§13.5. 


§50. 

3.  Final  Si .  is  drop23ecl. 


IKREGULAR   NOUJS^S- 


55 


<"»?"!    sliejyherd    suf.  ^^''\    my  slieplierd^    ^ih    tliy  slieplierd 
nbpp^  cattle  suf.  '^bp'a  my  cattle^  ^ipip^  tliy  cattle 

nM   Tod  suf.  '^13'a   m^/  r6>^/,  ^rf)2  ^A^  rod 


Vocabulary  15. 

niij    V.  P.  to  destroy  bsj  v.  K.  to  fall  Jail 

nn^    adj.  6>?^6  ©£)?  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  soul^  life 

*ir|i?    prep,  c^/^^^r  •  f  nj  v.  P.  ?'6>  demolish 

c's^      n.  m.  f.  y^r^  ^nj'  v.  K.  /(9  s^^y^'^ 

rn;r2S!  n.  f.  (d\  andni)j9^7/<r<jr   qniri  v.  K.  to  burn 

^i^n     11.  m.  ^vord  ^ni?  v.  P.  to  break  iiijyieces 

^iT      n.  111.  seed  do  adv.  there 

^nb     n.  111.  (ni)  heart  Qt??  n.  in.  (ni)  oiame 

ni^)2  n.  f.  5^<225z^6 

§  50.     Irregular  JSFouns, 

1.  TJie   following   nouns  of   frequent   occurrence    are 
irregular  in  the  plural : — 

TiJ'^x  mail  plur.  C'i??^  rarely  D'^iT'^i^ 

nii^iJt  looman^  const.  n©&5    plur.        D^i^7 


ni:«  maid-servant 

plur. 

ninrs* 

n;ii  house 

j^lur. 

c-^ns 

in    S6»72. 

plur. 

■  D\^n 

ns  daughter^  ^jxi,  "^Pa 

plur. 

nib 

ni'^  6^a?/ 

plur. 

D'^)2;'  rarely  ni-a;! 

"1^5?   (?zV^ 

plur. 

D^nr   once  Q^i;^3? 

TT^-l    A^'at/ 

plur. 

Q^irxi 

2.  The  nouns  !iij  father^  T\^  brother^  and  ns  moutli 
take  the  vowel  "^  in  the  construct  and  before  suffixes, 
e.  g.  const,  "^n^  ,  suf.  "^iij ,  ti^n.s: . 


56  ETYMOLOGY.  §  ^1- 

§  51.     Imperfect   Verbs. 

Imperfect  verbs  depart  more  or  less  from  the  standard 
inflection,  as  the  nature  of  their  radicals  may  require. 
They  are  of  three  classes,  viz.  : — ■ 

I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttural 
letter  in  the  root. 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

III.  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel-letter  in  the  root. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  guttural  verbs  :^ 

1.  Pe  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  a 
guttural. 

2.  Ay  in  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  cruttural. 

3.  Lamedh  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radi- 
cal is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs : — 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun. 

2.  Avin  Doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  alike. 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs  : — 

1.  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Yodh. 

2.  Ay  in  Vav  and  Ay  in  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Vav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Lamedh  He  verbs,  or  those  in  which  He  takes  the 
place  of  the  third  radical. 

These  names,  like  those  of  the  verbal  species,  §  31,  are 
derived  from  the  verb  bi*2  to  do;  a  Pe  Guttural  verb  is 


§§   52,  53.  PE    GUTTURAL    VERBS.  57 

one  wliicli  lias  a  guttural  in  that  place  which  Pe  occupies 
in  bibs ,  that  is,  as  its  first  radical ;  and  so  with  the  rest. 


oi^. 


Guttural   Verbs, 


Gutturals  have  the  following  peculiarities  : — - 

1.  They  prefer  the  vowel  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  prefereuce  to  simple  ShVa. 

4.  They  do  not  admit  Daghesh  forte. 

Resh  shares  the  last  peculiarity,  but  partakes  of  the 
others  only  in  a  very  limited  degree. 


§  53.     Fe  Guttural   Verhs,  see  Table  VIII. 

1.  Hhirik  of  the  letters  prefixed  to  the  root  is  changed 
to  Pattahh  or  Seghol ;  to  the  latter  chiefly  in  those 
parts  or  tenses  in  which  the  second  radical  has  j^revail- 
ingly  a. 

2.  For  simple  Sh'va  the  guttural  takes  compound,  either 
Hhateph-Pattahh,  or  a  Hhateph  conformed  to  the  pre- 
ceding short  vowel.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  com- 
pound ShVa  becomes  a  short  vowel  in  an  intermediate 
syllable. 

3.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative  Niphal,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is 
lengthened  to  Tsere. 

4.  A  few  verbs,  ^vdiose  first  radical  is  i5 ,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future,  the  second 
vowel  being  Pattahh  or  Tsere.  This  is  calkd  the  Pe 
Aleph  (^s)   mode  of  inflection. 

3* 


58 


ETYMOLOGr. 


§54. 


VOCABULAEY  16. 


nnx  or  nfjij  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to 

love 
yt^^  "'  n.  m.  a  man,  each 
bix  V.  K.  (&5S)  to  eat,  H.  to 

cause  to  eat 
h)^     n.  m.  God 
X>2^  V.  'N.  to  he  verified, found 

true 
ni3N  Y.  N.  (s'b)  to  he  said 
15     n.  m.  (Q"'??)  son 


^sn   V.  K.  to  turn,  N.  to  he 

turned 
pTn   V.   K.    (fut.   a)    to    he 

strong 
f^     n.  m.  manna 
15  i?  11.  m.  servant 
nt?    Y.  K.  to  leave,  for sahe 
^^:^  Y.  K.  to  stand 
Di^r   11.  f.  (d^   and  ni)  hone 
nSb|p  11.  f.  a  curse. 


*  (li'iN;  is  the  common  word  for  an  individual  man ;  \lji:j<  is  poetic;  c'lX  is  a 
generic  term,  denoting  man  generally,  and  is  also  the  nam.e  of  the  first  of  the 
human  race. 


§  54.     Ayin  Guttural   Verhs,  see  Table  IX. 


1.  TJie  Yowel  following  the  guttural  is  couYerted  into 
Pattalili  in  the  future  and  imperatiYe  Kal  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperatiYe  in  the  other 
species. 

2.  When  the  second  radical  should  receiYe  simple 
ShVa,  it  takes  Hhateph-Pattahh  instead ;  and  to  this  the 
new  Yowel  formed  from  ShVa  in  tlie  feminine  singular 
and  masculine  plural  of  the  imperatiYe  is  assimilated. 

3.  Daghesh-forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  Yowel  may  remain  short  in  an  intermediate 
syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere,  Pattahh 
to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts  to  Hholem. 


§55.  lamedh  guttukal  veebs.  5? 

Vocabulary  17. 

1\^2    V.  K.  P.  to  Mess,  N.  Pu.  b^r)5  n.  m.  heneflt 

to  he  Messed  ^^^    v.  P.  to  drive  out 

bxj    V.  K.  to  redeem,  P.  to  nn-j  v.  P.  to ])urify,  deamse, 
defile                            ■  N.  to  be^nf^lfied 

§  55.     Lamfiedh  Guttural   Verhs,  see  Table  X. 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes  Pat- 
tahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the  femi- 
nine plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 
species. 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical  may  either  be 
changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the  latter  case,  the 
guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  Hhirik,  Hholeni  (of  the  infinitive),  and  Shurek 
suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural,  which  receives 
a  Pattahh-furtive. 

4.  The  guttural  retains  the  simple  ShVa  of  the  perfect 
verb  before  personal  terminations  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, though  compound  ShVa  is  used  before  suffixes. 

5.  When,  however,  a  personal  affix  consists  of  a  single 
vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  singular  of  the 
preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh-furtive. 

VoCABULARr   18. 

li'lij  n.  m.  lord,  master  5^'^T  v.  K.  to  soiv 

Tie  adv.  then  tt^,  adj.  deaf 

ITJ^  n.  f.  ear  S^b;*  v.  P.  H.  to  roeary,  cause 

tr^\  n.  m.  olive-tree,  olive  to  toil 


60  ETYMOLOGY.  §  56 

nib^-a  n.  f.  Mngdom  nps  v.  N.  to  he  oijened^  used 
^vti  V.  N.  to  he  loitlilield  specially  of  tlie  eyes 

"^il^  adj.  hlind  nns  v.  N.  ^<9  ^^  opened 

X!^  n.  f.  ^^^  J^^T?  V.  K.  2^(9  S67i(:/ 

y?  n.  m.  i^r^^  niSTJ  adv.  thither. 


§  56.     P^  iV^Tz,  (fs)    F^rZ'S,  see  Table  XL 

Nun,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs,  has  two  ^peculiarities, 
viz. : — 

1.  At  the  end  of  S3^11ables  it  is  commonly  assimilated 
to  the  following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written 
as  one,  and  the  doubling  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  In 
the  Hophal  Kamets-Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuts  before  the 
doubled  letter. 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
dropped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  at  the  l^eginning  of  a 
syllable  when  it  is  v/ithout  a  vowel.  A  like  rejection 
occurs  in  the  Kal  infinitive  construct  of  a  few  verbs,  the 
abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compensated  by  adding 
the  feminine  termination  n. 

"jrij  assimilates  its  last  as  well  as  its  first  radical. 
npb  has  the  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs. 

Vocabulary  19. 

ninsj  n.  f.  sister  tni'b  n.  m.  death 

ty^  n.  m.  honey  "lis  v.  H.  to  tell^  Ho.  to  he  told 

D^^'H  n.  m.  pi.  life  t'i?  v.  K.  N.  to  a^pproach 

"^V^.  n.  m.  (""^O)  ^^^\f  ^"^^?  11-  f-  incense 

rrbb  J  rm'b  for  what?  why?  Q^'^nn  i^.  vn,  ^\.  mercies^  com- 

^9^'a  n.  m.  instruction  jpcissions. 


§  57.  AYIN    DOUBLED    VERBS.  61 


§  57.     Ayin  DouUed  (5^'::?)    Verhs,  see  Table  XII. 

1.  In  the  Kal,  Niphal,  Hipliil,  and  Hophal  tlie  repeti 
tion  of  the  same  sound  is  avoided  by  uniting  the  two 
simihir  radicals  and  giving  the  intervening  vowel  to  the 
previous  lettei',  thus :  ::io  for  ^no ,  nb  for  nno . 

2.  In  the  Kal  this  contraction  is  optional  in  the  pret- 
erite ;  it  is  rare  in  the  infinitive  absolute  though  usual  in 
the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  pai'ticiples. 
With  these  exceptions  it  is  universal  in  the  species  already 
named. 

3.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both  in 
the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the  pre- 
ceding syllable. 

(1)  When  the  first  radical  has  a  vowel  (pretonic 
Kamets)  this  is  simply  disj^laced  by  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical,  349?  ^^j  ^^^'^  ?  i"Gn . 

(2)  When  the  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable,  this 
will  become  simple  u23on  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  from 
the  second  radical  to  the  first.  Then  a  Daghesh-forte 
may  be  given  to  the  first  radical  in  order  to  preserve  the 
preceding  short  vowel,  or  the  preformative  may  take  the 
simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a^  or  its  ])revious  vowel  may 
be  lengthened  from  Hliirik  to  Tsere,  Pattahh  to  Kamets, 
and  Kamets-Hhatuph  to  Shurek,  thus:  n2i9;»  becomes 
nD":  or  no^^ ,  and  "iSto-]  n'b.': . 

(3)  The  vowel,  which  has  been  thrown  back,  is  com- 
pressed as  vowels  usually  are  before  two  consonants. 
Thus  in  the  Niphal  future  and  imperative,  ^y^^, ,  no;' ; 
nncn ,  ncn  (comp.  "^^k;^ ,  n">i?i?) ;  in  the  Hiphil,  n-iicn , 
ncn  (cornp.  ^"'tap:: ,  nsbrjpn). 

4.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second  and 
third  radicals  have  been  contracted,  represents  two  con 


62  ETYMOLOGY.  §  57. 

sonants,  tlie  doubling  cannot  be  made  to  appear  at  the 
end  of  a  Avord.     But, 

(1)  When  in  the  course  of  inflection  a  vowel  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Daghesh-forte,  ^uid  the  preceding 
vowel,  even  where  it  wouhl  be  dropped  in  perfect  verl)s, 
is  retained  to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre- 
serves its  accent,  §  17.  2.  h,  nzo  ,  ^no^ . 

>         €)  I  T-7  T* 

(2)  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
l^egins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is  aided  by  inserting  o  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e 
(r.)  in  the  future.  By  the  dissyllabic  appendage  thus 
formed  the  accent  is  carried  forward,  and  the  previous 
part  of  the  word  is  shortened  in  consequence  as  much  as 
possible,  ncr-tj  niicn;  nb^,  "r^cn. 

(3)  When,  by  the  operation  of  a  rule  already  given, 
the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplication  of 
the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to  relieve 
the  woi'd  of  too  many  doubled  letters,  ^ns"^. ,  npsn. 

5.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  preserve 
the  i^erfect  forms,  sometimes  reduplicate  the  contracted 
root,  as  ^?2p,  bpbj^nn  ,  and  sometimes  give  up  the  redup- 
lication altogether  and  insert  the  long  vowel  Hbolem 
after  the  first  radical,  nnio ,  b^hnn . 

6.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  futures,  when  the  penult  is  a 
simjDle  syllable,  the  accent  is  drawn  back  by  Vav  Con- 
versive  and  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  shortened,  ^o^^ , 


T    T   -     ;  ••  T     ?  V    T  -     • 


Vocabulary  20. 


Bi5  conj.  if 

b^ii 

n 

m. 

J3aal^  lord 

nSij  V.  K.  to 

curse  ; 

Ho. 

to 

^% 

V. 

K. 

to  roll 

he  ciirsed 

V?-"} 

V 

H. 

to  critsli,  pulverize 

g    58.  PE   YODII    VEEBS.  63 

>r^  V.  H.  to  hegin  nio  v.  K.  surround 

rn^n^  n.  m.  Judali  J^3  n.  m.  (const.  ^'^)  mouth 

^i^rp  n.  m.  a  Jew  D*^is  n.  m.  ^\.face. 

Tr^vi2  11.  f.  cave 


§  58.     Pe   Yodli  (<s)    Verls,  see  Table  XIV. 

1.  The  first  radical  is  mostly  Yodli  at  tlie  beginning, 
and  Vav  at  the  close,  of  a  syllable. 

2.  In  the  Kal  future,  if  Yodh  be  retained  it  will  quiesce 
in  and  prolong  the  j^revious  Hhirik,  and  the  second  radi- 
cal will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  t'i^': ;  if  the  first  radical  be 
rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly  lengthened  to 
Tsere,^  "ip.":,  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syllable  being 
sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond  with  it,  :it?.? ; 
in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is  preserved  by  giving  Daghesh- 
forte  to  the  second  radical  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs,  r^"^ ,  pii"! . 

3.  Those  verbs  which  reject  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con- 
struct, the  infinitive  being  prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs 
])y  the  feminine  termination. 

4.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  Vav  quiesces 
in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hholein ;  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled,  it  retains  its 
consonantal  character. 

5.  In  the  Hiphil,  Vav  quiesces  in  Hholem ;  a  few  verbs 
liave  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  n^b^n ,  n^t:^:: ;  more  rarely 
still  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the  preceding  short 
vowel  is  preserved  by  doubling  the  second  radical,  ^^'^n , 

6.  In  the  Ho2:)hal,  Vav  quiesces  in  Sliurek ;  occasionally 
the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh  inserted  in  the 
second  radical,  y^r^ . 


64  ETYMOLOGY.  §  59. 

7.  In  the  Hitlipael  tlie  first  radical  is  commonly  Yodh, 
but  a  few  verbs  have  Vav. 

^^n  follows  the  analogy  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs. 


Vocabulary  21. 

br.i<  n.  m.  teiit  "^T^  v.  H.  to  cause  to  hiow 

3J!jnx  n.  m.  Ahah  let  hnoiv 

ri):5^  adv.  'where?  i»"i^  v.  H.  to  drive  out 

l(ir\  V.  H.  to  cause  to  go^     ^5&^  n.  m.  (ni)  throne 

lead  "^?7^  ^-  111-  wilderness 

©n;'  V.  K.  to  he  dry  tJSiCt:  n.  m.  judgment 


§  59.     Ayin    Vav  (fs?)  and  Ay  in  Yodh  ("'"i')    VerlSy 
see  Table  XIII. 

1.  The  quiescent  may  be  rejected  and  its  vowel  given 
to  the  preceding  radical.  So  in  the  Kal  preterite :  Dp 
for  D] J ,  where  a  is  in  partial  compensation  for  the  con-  y 
traction,  rrb  for  thyi.  Active  participle  Djb  for  D;p,  rra 
for  ri]^ ,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  sujDerseded 
by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative.  Hij^hil  and  Ho- 
phal:  Q^pn  for  D'^lipn,  a^p^i  for  D^lp!:,  np^n  for  "^y^r) ^ 
the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  prolonged  in  a  simple 
syllable. 

2.  Or  it  may  be  converted  into  its  homogeneous  vowel 
u  or  ?;  Dip,  n^n;  Dip;;',  nin:-,  the  prefix  usually  taking 
the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  a'^  u  coml)ined  with  a 
j)receding  or  accompanying  a  forms  o,  Kal  abs.  infin.  Dip 
=Mitm^  Niphal  Dip;  for  DipD . 

3.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Niphal  and 
Iliphil  preterites,  6  (i)  is  inserted  before  the  afiixed  termi- 
nations, and  sometimes  e  (^.^^  in  the  feminine  plurals  of 


§  60.  LAMEDH    ALEPII    VERBS.  65 

the  Kal  future.  In  the  Niphal  preterite,  when  the  in- 
serted i  receives  the  accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  euj)hon3/ 
changed  to  i . 

4.  In  the  Kal  and  Hij^hil  species  the  apocoj^ated  future 
takes  b  and  e  in  distinction  from  the  ordinary  future, 
Avhich  has  u  and  I,  nir"^^ ,  nir;" .  With  Vav  Conversive  the 
accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the  vowel 
of  the  last  syllalde  is  shortened,  niL^H  ,  m»^i . 

5.  (1)  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  HithjDael,  the  form  of  per- 
fect verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  aj^pearing 
as  1,  e.  g.  "i-is?,  or  as  ■•,  e.  g.  Di:p. 

(2)  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  reduplicated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Pi.  D^ip , 
Pu.  Disip,  Hith.  D'biprn . 

(3)  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the 
root,  and  the  resulting  biliteral  is  reduplicated,  Pi.  bibs  ^ 
Pu.  bsb|. 

YOCABULAEY    22. 

r?i2ni^  n.  f.  ground^  land  ^i\  n.  m.  young  man 

1?x  adv.   where  f  only  after  *inp  v.  K.  to  hury  j  N.  to  he 

l^a  ,  ]']N^  lolience  ?  huried 

HDX  adv.  whither?  ^^7)?  n.  i. former  state 

Ki2  V.  K.  (f  ut.  i^iii^-')  to  come;  D^p  v.  K.  to  arise 

H.  to  cause  to  come^  bring  l'^"!  v.  K.  to  contend 

tybn  Hith.   to   go  for  o?ie^s  nTi»  v.  K.  to  return ;  II.   to 

self  go  about  cause     to     return,     bring 

I'^b  Y.  K.  to  lodge  bach 

n^)a  V.  K.  to  die ;  H.  to  irut  nriDTJJ  n.  f.  handmaid, 

to  death 

§60.     Laonedh  Alejjh  {^':>)    F^7'^  see  Table  XV. 
1.  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains  its  con 


6Q 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§61. 


sonantal  character  only  wlieu  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in  the 
13receding  vowel,  and  if  tliis  be  Pattahh,  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets;  so  always  in  the  Kal  future  and  im23erative, 
whei'e  i5  as  a  guttural  requires  a,  "^^P:*  for  ii'i^'Q^ . 

3.  Before  syllabic  affixes  «  quiesces  in  Kamets  in  the 
Kal  preterite  J^x?^,  except  in  those  words  which  have 
Tsere  as  their  proper  vowel,  n&^n; .  In  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  it  quiesces  in  Tsere,  and  in  all 
futures  and  imperatives  in  Seghol. 

Vocabulary  23. 

^^^5  n.  Z/r  ii?"3  V.  K.  to  find 

5^'i?  V.  K.  to  create  xyo  n.  f.  Mara  (hitter) 

nin-j  adj.  clean^  ])ure  ^i3:>;  n.  f.  Naomi  {sweet) 

^^'^  V.  K.  to  go  out ;  H.  to  '^3?'  n.  m.  ]^li 

bring  out  N^jp  v.  K.  to  call 

D^r;ii^5  11.  111.  pi.  Chaldees  a'^bn-i  u.  m.  pi.  trouglis 

^.  n.  m.  (niib)  lieait  ^r\  v.  K.  to  run 
ac3^  V.  K.  to  hefuU;  N.  to  npi^  v.  K.  to  lie  doion 

le  filled ;  P.  to  fill  \kyat  n.  m.  Samnel 


§  61.     Lamedh  Re  (nb)    F^7'Z»8,  see  Table  XVI. 

1.  The  third  radical  which  is  Yodh  or  Vav,  does  not 
appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  excejDt  in  the  Kal  passive 
participle  ^'^y,  in  all  other  cases  it  is  rejected  or  softened, 
the  resulting  vowel  termination  being  usually  ex]3ressed 
by  the  letter  r; . 

The  various  j^reterites  end  in  n^. 

The  futures  and  participles  in  n.. . 


§  61.  LAMEDH   HE    VERBS.  67 

The  imperatives  in  T\^ . 

The  absolute  infinitives  in  n    or  n.^ . 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  endino^  ni . 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the 
last  radical  (though  occasionally  retained  in  j)i*olonged 
and  j)ausal  forms  ^""cri),  is  commonly  rejected,  and  its 
vowel  given  to  the  antecedent  consonant,  ^^5  for  T^^ . 

3.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  radical  '^  remains  and  quiesces  in  either  Hhirik  or 
Tsere  in  the  preterites  and  in  Seghol  in  the  futures  and 
imperatives. 

4.  The  third  person  feminine  ©f  the  preterites  retains 
the  primary  characteristic  ri^,  ^^?,  which  is  commonly 
softened  by  an  appended  n^,  ^^^lba. 

5.  Forms  not  augmented  by  j^ersonal  endings  lose  their 
final  vowel  before  sufiixes,  e.  g.  *^r^^  ,  ^^3  from  s^bj  .  Tlie 
preterite  3  fem.  takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  *nn?5  or  ^nba  . 

6.  The  final  vowel  n  is  rejected  from  the  futures 
when  apocopated,  or  when  preceded  by  Vav  Conversive, 
e.  g.  bi;"^,  bi^n  from  n'iro .  The  concurrence  of  final  con- 
sonants thence  resulting  in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  is  com- 
monly relieved  by  inserting  an  unaccented  Seghol  l^etween 
them,  Kal,  br;^  or  b^;;  from  r\^^^ ;  Hiph.  b^^ ,  b^^i  from  nb5:> . 

7.  The  final  vowel  "..  is  sometimes  rejected  from  the 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g. 
b5  for  nb5,  b^n  for  f^K^n,  binn  for  r/^^nn . 

n^n  to  be,  fut.  rnn;? ,  apoc.  T'? ,  part,  rip  . 
n;n  to  live,  fut.  s^t^!^:  apoc.  "^n^. 

Vocabulary  24. 
g;^s:  adv.  triflj/,  indeed  riia  v.  K.  to  huild 

•13  ;q^   lioio  7nucli  more,  or     n^n  v.  K.  to  he 

after    a    negative    Iwiv     "1"!^  v.  K.  to  go    doivn^  de 

much  less  sceiid 


68  ETYMOLOGY.  |§    62,  63. 

n^'^^-i;'  1  n.  Jerusalem  r\%v  v.  K.  to  make,  do,  K  to 

^"^M  <^^  he  done 

bo  V.  P.  (b?b3)  to  contain 

nb3  V.  P.  to  comjAete,  finish  nni^  v.  P.  to  command 

r.^rj  n.  f.  hed  nyn  v.  K.  ?^6>  see,  N.  ^^(9  Z'^?  -s^^t?^ 

nb^  V.  K.   ^<9   ^6>   ujj,  H.  ?f6»        ^^.9  afppear 

hrlng  iip,  offer  nb'biJ^  n.  m.  Solomon 

nbi>  n.  f.  hurnt-offering  n^iil?  adv.  (^  second  time 

^  Pointed  as  though  it  were  written  o-'^rn'^ . 


§  62.     DouVlij  Im])erfect   Verbs. 

Verbs  which  liave  two  weak  letters  in  the  root,  or 
which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belong  to  two  different 
classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exhibit  the  peculiar- 
ities of  both,  unless  they  interfere  with  or  limit  one  an- 
other. Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  K2  and  n'b  will  follow 
the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former  in  its  first,  and 
the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in  verbs  which  are 
both  ^5?  and  n"b,  the  ^  is  invariably  treated  as  a  perfect 
consonant,  and  the  n'b  ^peculiarities  only  are  j^reserved. 


§  63.      Unusual  Forms. 

1.  Verbs  belonging  to  one  class  of  imperfect  verbs 
occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another  and  closely  related 
class.  Thus,  a  i«"b  verb  may  appear  with  a  n'b  form,  or 
an  lV  verb  with  an  Hv  form,  or  vice  versa. 

2.  A  few  verbs  of  different  classes  adopt  the  peculiar 
^'v  or  l"y  modes  of  forming  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael, 
inserting  the  vowel  b  instead  of  the  usual  reduj)lication 


§§  64,  65.  NUMERALS.  69 

t^T2?  and  ©"iis,  Piels  of  tJ-Hi^ ,  ^TC^jri^  and  ^ir?5n:'  fi-om 
'i"i'5 ,  or  doubling  the  third  radical  in  place  of  the  second^ 
e.  g.  12?^,  bS^sj,  njx3  (z=.n>:)  from  r.^*:  (  =  in\2  ), 
rnnnt^n  (fut.  ninPTr^",  with  Vav  Conv.  ^nnir^:;)  from 
r.nr,  or  reduplicating  an  entire  syllable,  e.  g.  "^'i?';!^';], 
nnnnp . 

3.  A  very  few  instances  occur  of  what  may  be  called 
comi30und  si3ecies ;  thus,  Nij)hal  of  Pual  ^Si^iiD ,  Niphal  of 
Hithpael  "T^G^.?,  1222,  jnjnirD. 

§  64.      Quadriliteral   Verbs. 

The  number  of  quadriliteral  verbs  is  very  small.  Some 
adojDt  the  vowels  and  inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual 
species,  while  others  follow  the  Hij)hil. 

^  Qd.     Numerals^  see  Table  XIX. 

1.  The  cardinals  from  tliree  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the 
singular  number,  and  have  a  feminine  termination  when 
joined  to  masculine  nouns,  but  omit  it  when  joined  to 
feminine  nouns. 

2.  The  tens  are  formed  by  adding  the  masculine  plural 
termination  to  the  units,  D'^itys?  twenty  being,  however, 
derived  not  from  tioo  but  from  ten  "ii?ij . 

3.  There  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  numbers  being  used  instead. 

4.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine  ordi- 
nals, as  well  as  by  special  terms. 

Vocabulary  25. 

JiS'^i!?  n.  f.  ejilicih  ni?ns  n.  m.  Pharaoh 

t"in  n.  m.  month  T\\t  n.  f.  (O"^.)  year 

H-  n.  m.  Noah  bjjTZJ  n.  m.  shekel 
"^itbij  n.  m.  decade^  ten 


70  ETYMOLOGY  §  6Q, 

§  60.  Se]r>arate  Particles. 

1.  The  longer  particles,  whether  adverbs,  prepositions, 
conjunctions,  or  interjections,  are  written  as  separate 
words. 

2.  The  prepositions  "iHs5  after^  "bij  to^  ^1?  iinto^  b:?  %i])on^ 
and  rnn  under ^  assume  before ,  suffixes  the  form  of  nouns 
in  the  masculine  plural,  e.  g.  *^inx,  'n^in?;  ??  hetween^ 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine 
plural,  and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  ii''4  and 
r2'^2 ,  ^.ri)''^  and  irnir^ . 

3.  The  preposition  n^?  ivitli^  commonly  becomes  rii> 
before  suffixes,  e.  g.  ''ri^ ,  Dir^« ,  and  is  thus  distinguished 
from  r.x  tlie  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  becomes 
J^ii5  ^  or  before  grave  suffixes,  Tij  ^  e.  g.  ^^'^^  ^^>y%  • 


I 


i 


SYNTAX. 

§  67.  The  Copula, 

1.  The  j)reclicate  of  a  sentence,  if  a  substantive,  adjec- 
tive, or  pronoun,  may  be  directly  connected  v/itli  its  sub- 
ject without  an  intervening  copula,  DiSic  ri^nin"^nrb5  all 
Iter patlis  {^x^  ijeace,  ^^.T\  nrj  tlie  tree  (was)  good. 

2.  Or  the  verb  n;ri  to  he^  or  the  pronoun  i^^n  of  the 
third  person,  may  be  used  as  a  copula,  '^Ts'n  nn^n  "f^^'n 
the  earth  tvas  desolate^  M'^s  i5in  ^^.'^'^y^  ^^V^  the  fourth 
river  is  Eujphrates. 


§  68.   The  Article, 

1.  The  article  is  used  in  Hebrew  as  in  Eno^lish  to  dis- 
tinguish  an  object  as  one  which  has  been  mentioned 
before,  as  well  known,  as  the  only  one  of  its  class,  or  as 
distino^uished  above  others  of  like  kind. 

2.  It  is  also  i^refixed  to  nouns  employed  in  a  generic  or 
universal  sense,  ^V^^T^  gold.,  ^%^^^.  ^oisdom.  So  in  com- 
parisons, "ij^^  as  a  (lit.  the^  nest^  Isa.  10 :  14. 

8.  It  is  likewise  found  in  some  cases  where  the  English 
idiom  requires  a  word  still  more  specific,  as  a  possessive 
pronoun  :  she  tooh  vj'^^i^n  the  veil^  Gen.  24  :  65,  i.  e.  the 
one  which  she  had,  her  veil ;  or  a  demonstrative,  as  be- 
fore words  denoting  time,  Di'^n  to-day.,  ni^^n  this  year  j 
or  the  sign  of  the  vocative,  ^^isn  0  Icing  I 


SYNTAX.  §§  69-71. 


§  69.  JVouns  definite  without  the  Article, 

1.  The  following  are  definite  without  the  article : — 

(1)  Proper  nouns,  which  only  receive  it  if  they  were 
originally  appellatives. 

(2)  Nouns  with  pronominal  suffixes. 

(3)  Nouns  in   the   construct    state   before   a  definite 
noun. 

2.  The  article  is  often  omitted  in  poetry  where  it  would 
be  required  in  prose. 


§  70.  Adjectives, 

1.  Both  qualifying  and  predicate  adjectives  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

2.  Qualifying  adjectives  usually  stand  after  the  noun 
and  agree  with  it  likewise  in  definiteness,  that  is  to  say, 
if  the  noun  is  made  definite  whether  by  the  article  or  in 
any  of  the  ways  specified  in  the  preceding  section,  they 
receive  the  article,  DDn  "]%  a  ivise  son.,  r.niion  7";)5jn  the 
good  land. 

8.  Predicate  adjectives  commonly  stand  before  the 
noun,  and  do  not  take  the  article,  even  though  the  noun 
is  definite,  nn^r?  ^iis  the  ivord  is  good. 


§  71.  Demonstn^ative  Pronouns. 

1.  Demonstrative  pronouns  follow  the  same  rule  of 
position  and  agreement,  only  the  nouns  which  tliey  qualify 
are  invariably  definite,  n^^*n  D'^nn^n  theBe  things,  ri^J?? 
D'^nn'Mn  these  are  the  things. 

2.  If  both  an  adjective  and  a  demonstrative  qualify 


§§  72,  73.  •   NUMERALS.  73 

the    same   uoiin,   tlie    demonstrative  is  placed  last,  fiijn 
ri^-7n  nniiDH  this  good  land. 

§  72.    Comparison  of  Adjectives, 

1.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  means  of  the  preposi- 
tion 1^  froon^  placed  after  the  adjective  or  other  word 
expressive  of  quality,  t3^i'^?5^  ^%T}  •^^'^^  wisdom  is  letter 
than  rubies^  lit.  is  good  from  rubies ;  3^2^  b'nr^s  I  will  he 
greater  than  thou. 

2.  The  superlative  degree  may  be  expressed, 

(1)  By  adding  bb  <:/// to  the  comparative  particle  I'D, 
n"jp'^:3-b|)2  bii5  greatest  of  all  the  sons  of  the  east,  lit. 
great  from  all,  etc. 

(2)  By  an  emphatic  use  of  the  positive,  so  as  to  imply 
the  possession  of  the  attribute  in  an  eminent  degree, 
n^x^'i^  ns;^n  0  fairest  among  wo7nen,  lit.  the  fair  one,  etc. 

§  73.  Nuniereds. 

1.  The  cardinal  iriij  one  and  the  ordinal  numbers  are 
treated  like  other  adjectives,  and  follow  the  rules  of  po- 
sition and  agreement  already  given. 

2.  The  other  cardinals  may  stand, 

(1)  In  the  absolute  state  before  the  noun  to  which 
they  belong. 

(2)  Before  it  in  the  construct  state  (if  they  have  such 
a  form). 

(3)  After  it  in  the  absolute  state. 

3.  Nouns  accompanied  by  the  cardinals  from  2  to  10 
are  almost  invariably  plural,  while  those  which  are  pre- 
ceded by  the  tens  (20-90)  or  numbers  compounded  with 
them  (21,  etc.)  are  commonly  put  in  the  singular,  Q'^ii?? 
D'^itj  yntin  njTJ  twenty  years  and  seven  y xirs. 

4 


74  SYNTAX.  §§  74,  75. 

4.  The  cardinals  above  one  may  receive  the  article 
when  the  noun  is  not  expressed,  but  not  wlien  joined  to  a 
definite  noun,  Q-^ya^sn  the  fovty^  ni'^n  a-^i^s-ix  the  forty 
days. 

§  74.  Apposition. 

One  noun  may  be  in  apposition  with  another,  not  only 
when  both  denote  the  same  j)erson  or  thing,  but  also 
when  the  second  specifies  the  first  by  stating  the  material 
of  which  it  consists,  its  quality,  character,  or  the  like, 
mrriin  ij^sn  the  oxen  the  brass,  i.  e.  the  brazen  oxe?i^' 
mp^  wko  irbir  tlwee  measures  (consisting  of)  meal. 

§  75.   The  Construct  State. 

1.  When  one  noun  is  limited  in  its  meaning  by  another, 
the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state.  The  relation  thus 
expressed  corresponds  for  the  most  part  to  the  genitive 
case,  or  to  that  denoted  in  English  by  the  preposition  of. 

2.  When  the  relation  between  two  nouns  is  expressed 
by  a  preposition,  the  first  commonly  remains  in  the  abso- 
lute state;  it  may,  however,  especially  in  poetry,  be  put 
in  the  construct,  ?3b5n  "iin  mountains  in  Gilboa. 

3.  Nouns  are  sometimes  in  the  construct  before  a  suc- 
ceeding clause  with  which  they  are  closely  connected; 
thus,  before  a  relative  clause,  "ii?^?  Dipi2  the  place  where, 
etc.,  pai'ticularly  when  the  relative  is  itself  omitted, 
nbTrn-^llin  by  the  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou  roilt  send j 
and  even  before  the  copulative,  tn^ni  "^^"y^  wisdom  and 
hnowledge. 

4.  An  adjective,  participle,  or  demonstrative,  qualify- 
ing a  noun  in  the  construct  state,  cannot  follow  it  imme- 
diately, but  must  be  placed  after  the  governed  noun, 
binjn  nVn^  t\wi2  the  great  worlc  of  Jehovah, 


§§  76,  77.  THE    PKETERITE.  75 

5.  An  article  or  suiRx  belonging  to  a  noun  in  the  con 
struct  must  be  attached,  not  to  it,  but  to  the  governed 
noun,  b;^nn  ^y^^^  the  miglity  men  of  vctlor^  innr  ''l?"'bx  A^5 
idols  of  gold, 

6.  The  preposition  ^  to^  helonging  to^  with  or  without 
ix  preceding  relative  pronoun,  may  be  substituted  for  the 
construct  relation  in  its  possessive  sense,  5?fc''bxb  n'^in  the 
house  of  Elishet,  n'^isb  ntrif:  ^^kr\  her  father's  shee^x 


§  76.   Tenses  of  Verhs. 

The  Hebrew  has  distinct  forms  of  the  verb  correspond 
ing  to  the  two  grand  divisions  of  time,  the  past  and  the 
future;  but  all  subordinate  modifications  or  shades  of 
meaning  are  either  suggested  by  accompanying  particles, 
or  left  to  be  inferred  from  the  connection.  Whatever  is 
or  is  conceived  of  as  past,  is  put  in  the  preterite ;  the 
future  is  used  for  all  that  is  or  is  conceived  of  as  future. 

§  77.   The  Preterite. 

The  preterite  may  accordingly  be  employed  to  denote, 

1.  The  past,  whether  it  be, 

a.  Absolute,  i.  e.  the  historical  imperfect,  God  xna 
created. 

h.  Relative  to  the  present,  i.  e.  the  perfect,  ivhat  is  this 
that  n'^iiiy  thou  hast  done? 

c.  Relative  to  another  past,  i.  e.  the  pluperfect,  God 
ended  his  ivorh  ivhich  t\w  he  had  made. 

d.  Relative  to  a  future,  i.  e.  the  future  perfect,  he  shall 
he  cedled  holy^  lohen  the  Lord  yvr\  slicdl  have  tvashed^  etc. 

e.  Conditional,  excejpt  the  Lord  had  left  a  remnant^ 
^2"^^.?}  we  should  have  been  as  Sodom. 

f  Optative,  ^sn-b-^b  O  tltat  we  had  died. 


76  SYNTAX.  §   ^8. 

' fj.  Subjunctive,  Dr?^*^^  V-^,  in  order  that  ye  miglitfear 

2.  Tlie  j)r8seiit,  regarded  as  a  continuation  of  the  past, 
^^rras  7"^?^^  thirsty^  prop,  I  have  been  and  still  am  thirsty. 

3.  General  truths,-  embodying  the  exj)erience    of   the  i 
past,    an  ox  ^1^  laioioeth  Ms  oiviier^  oxen  always  have 
done  so,  and  always  will. 

4.  The  future,  when  described  by  the  prophets  as 
though  it  had  already  taken  place,  Babylon  nbisj  has 
fallen, 

§  78.   The  Future. 

The  future  tense  is  used  in  speaking  of, 

1.  The  future,  whether  it  be, 

a.  Absolute,  niij':^^  I  ivill  make, 

b.  Relative  to  a  past,  Elisha  ivas  fallen  sick  of  his 
sickness^  lohereof  J^^is^  he  was  to  die, 

c.  Conditional,  but  (if  it  were  my  case)  izjS'isj  I  loould 
seek  tmto  God. 

d.  Optative,  expressing  desire,  determination,  permis- 
sion, or  command,  so  ^"i^i^^  may  all  thine  enemies  perish ; 
all  that  thou  commandest  us^  nr5;p_  we  tuill  do;  of  the  fruit 
bbtkz  we  may  eat;  mine  ordinances  "VXim  ye  shall  keep. 

e.  Subjunctive,  ^9'!}5J^  l?^;*  in  order  that  my  soul  may 
bless  thee. 

2.  The  present,  when  it  is  conceived  of  as  extending  into 
the  future,  tvhy  '^3nn  wee/pest  thou  ?  lit.  why  wilt  thou  go 
on  to  weejy  f 

.3.  General  truths,  which  are  valid  for  all  time  to  come, 
rirjhtcoiisness  D^i"in  exalteth  a  uation^  it  does  so  now  and 
always  will. 

4.  Halutual  acts  or  states  continuing  for  an  indefinite 
period  from  tlie  time  spoken  of,  thus  Job  nirs?;:  did  con- 
tinuallyj  not  only  that  once,  l)ut  thenceforward. 


§§  79,  80.  PARTICIPLES.  77 

5.  Tlie  past,  in  animated  description,  as  we  use  the  pre- 
sent, then  "1""^?^  sings  Hoses. 

6.  Tlie  future  is  idiomatically  used  with  n'^b  and  DVJ3 
not  yet,  before,  whether  the  period  referred  to  is  past  or 
future. 

7.  The  apocopated  and  paragogic  forms  of  the  future 
mostly  have  a  conditional,  optative,  or  subjunctive  sense. 

8.  The  negative  imperative  is  made  by  prefixing  bi5  not 
to  the  apocopated  future,  ^S^nn'bx  Imrm  not. 


§  79.   The  Secondary  Tenses. 

1.  When  a  future  with  Yav  Conversive  is  preceded  by 
a  preterite,  or  by  any  expression  referring  to  past  time,  it 
becomes  a  secondary  preterite.  And  a  preterite  with 
Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future,  an  imperative,  or 
any  expression  indicating  future  time,  becomes  a  secondary 
future. 

2.  A  narrative  or  a  paragraph,  which  begins  with  one 
of  the  primary  tenses,  is  mostly  continued  by  means  of 
the  corresponding  secondary  tense,  provided  the  verb 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause.  If  for  any  reason 
this  order  of  the  words  is  interrupted  or  prevented,  the 
jDrimar}^  tense  must  again  be  used. 


§  80.  Particvples. 

1.  Participles  may  express  what  is  permanent  or 
habitual,  (the  Lord)  in*^  loveth  righteousness.  Passive 
participles,  so  used,  suggest  not  only  a  constant  experience, 
but  a  fixed  quality  as  the  ground  of  it,  i^ni:  not  only 
feared,  but  loorthy  to  he  feared. 

2.  Active  participles  most  commonly  relate  to  the  pres- 


78  SYNTAX.  §§  81,  82. 

ent  or  to  tlie  proximate  future,  and  passive  particij)les  to 
the  past. 

3.  In  narratives  and  predictions  the  time  of  the  parti- 
ciples is  reckoned,  not  from  the  moment  of  speaking,  but 
from  the  period  spoken  of,  the  two  angels  came^  and  Lot 
air^  was  sitting  in  the  gate  of  Sodom. 


§  81.   The  Infinitive. 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  may  be  used  for, 

(1)  The  preterite  or  the  future,  when  one  of  those 
tenses  immediately  j)recedes. 

(2)  The  imperative,  when  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence. 

2.  The  infinitive,  ^diich  is  a  verbal  noun,  may  be  put 
in  the  construct  state  before  a  following  noun,  whether 
this  be  its  subject  or  its  object.  The  construct  state  is 
also  used  after  nouns  or  prepositions,  and  sometimes  after 
verbs. 

3.  When  one  verb  is  dependent  upon  another,  it  is 
sometimes  put,  not  in  the  infinitive,  but  in  the  same  tense 
with  the  governing  verl),  ?f^n  b"'&5in  lie  ivas  willing^  he 
walked^  for  he  was  ivilUng  to  loalk^  or  walked  willingly. 

§  82.   Olject  of  Verbs. 

1.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb,  if  a  definite  noun,  or 
a  pronoun,  may  be  preceded  by  the  particle  nx . 

2.  The  subject  of  passive  verbs,  which  is  really  the  ob- 
ject of  their  action,  and  nouns  placed  absolutely,  occasion- 
a  ly  receive  ^s^ 

3.  Some  verbs,  not  properly  transitive,  are  capable  of 
a  transitive  construction  ;  thus, 

(1)  Verbs  signifying  plenty  and  want,  or  motion,  th6 


§§  83-85.  NEGLECT    OF    AGREE3rE:N^T.  79 

liouse  Q'^^f^.O  «J^  tvas  full  of  men^  ^^brrr\)^_  ^i«:^;  tliey 
^vent  out  (of)  the  city. 

(2)  Any  verb  may  govern  its  cognate  noun,  or  a  noun 
which  defines  the  extent  of  its  application,  'T'^^'3'ns  npn 
7ie  was  diseased  in  his  feet. 

4.  The  verb  usually  stands  first,  its  subject  next,  and 
its  object  last,  unless  the  emphasis  requires  a  different 
order. 

§  83.    Verbs  with  more  them  one  Object. 

1.  Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  object,  viz. : 

(1)  The  causatives  of  transitive  verbs. 

(2)  Verbs  whose  action  may  be  regarded  under  differ- 
ent aspects  as  terminating  upon  different  objects. 

(3)  The  instrument  of  an  action,  the  material  used  in 
its  performance,  its  design,  or  its  result,  may  be  its 
secondary  or  remote  object,  ^nx  ini^  ^"i^sn^^  and  they  over- 
whelmed him  with  stones^  "is?  Diijn-nij  ^'l'''^^  and  he 
formed  the  raan  of  dust. 

2.  If  an  active  verb  is  caj^able  of  governing  a  double 
object,  its  passive  may  govern  the  more  remote  of  them. 

§  84.  Adverbial  Expressions. 

1.  Adverbs  commonly  stand  after  the  words  to  which 
they  belong. 

2.  Nouns  may  be  placed  absolutely  to  express  the  rela 
tions  of  time,  place,  measure,  number,  or  manner. 

§  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement. 

1.  When  a  predicate  adjective  or  verb  precedes  its 
noun,  it  often  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 


80  SYNTAX.  §  86. 

is   to    say,    tlie  masculine   may  be  used  instead  of  the 
feminine,  and  the  singuLar  instead  of  the  plural 

2.  Collective  nouns  may  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

3.  Nouns  plural  in  form,  but  singular  in  signification, 
commonly  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  agreeing 
with  them  in  the  singular. 

4.  Plural  names  of  inanimate  or  irrational  objects  of 
either  gender  are  occasionally  joined  with  the  feminine 
singular. 

5.  The  masculine  is  sometimes  used,  when  females  are 
spoken  of,  from  a  neglect  to  note  the  gender,  if  no  stress 
is  laid  upon  it. 

6.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  are  sometimes 
employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural  subjects. 

7.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pro- 
nouns agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

§  86.   Com/pound  SuhjecL 

1.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  words  con- 
nected by  the  conjunction  and^  the  predicate,  if  it  precedes 
its  subject,  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  singular  as  its 
primary  form,  or  it  may  be  put  in  the  plural,  referring  to 
them  all,  or  it  may  agree  with  the  nearest  word. 

2.  If  the  predicate  follows  a  compound  subject,  it  is 
commonly  put  in  the  plural,  though  it  may  agree  with 
the  principal  word  to  which  the  others  are  subordinate. 

3.  If  a  predicate  refers  equally  to  two  words  of  dif- 
ferent genders,  it  will  be  put  in  the  masculine "  in  j)ref  er- 
ence  to  the  feminine ;  if  they  are  of  different  persons, 
the  predicate  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to 
the  third,  and  in  the  first  in  jjreference  to  either  of  the 
others. 


§§  87-89.  CONJUNCTIONS.  81 

§  87.  Rejpetition  of  Words, 

1.  Eej^etition  may  denote  distribution,  •".;©  nil;?  yeaf 
hy  yeai\  plurality,  "iir"i^  generation  and  generation^  i.  e. 
inany  generations^  or  emphasis  and  intensity,  pfe'  p'ij 
exceeding  deep. 

2.  In  verbs  the  absolute  infinitive  is  joined  with  the 
finite  forms  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  intensity,  tm 
twiT}  thou  slialt  surely  die. 

§  88.  Helative  Pronouns. 

1.  When  the  relative  *^tci|j  is  governed  by  a  verb,  noun, 
or  preposition,  this  is  shown  by  appending  the  appro- 
priate pronominal  sufiix  to  the  governing  word,  thou 
'T^'ip.'ins  "liyiJ:  whom  I  have  chosen^  is^'^T  'liji*  lohose  seed. 

2.  When  the  relative  is  preceded  by  riK  the  sign  of 
the  definite  object,  or  by  a  preposition,  these  pertain 
not  to  the  relative,  but  to  its  antecedent,  which  is  to  be 
supplied. 

3.  The  relative  is  frequently  omitted,  not  only,  as  in 
English,  when  it  is  the  object  of  its  clause,  but  also  when 
it  is  thesubject,«?ir/7^^/(97^S(96>^  God  ^^W  (who)  made  him. 

4.  The  demonstrative  HT  or  ^T  is  frequently  used  in 
poetry  with  the  force  of  a  relative,  in  which  case  it 
suffers  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

§  89.   Conjunctions. 

1.  The  simple  copulative  )  is  used  in  Hebrew,  where 
our  idiom  requires  different  conjunctions ;  the  relation  be- 
tween clauses  so  connected  must  often  be  inferred  from 
their  si<>:uification. 

2.  Vav  also  serves, 

4* 


82  SYNTAX.  §  89. 

(1)  To  introduce  the  apodosis  or  second  member  of  a 
conditional  sentence,  if  God  will  he  \oith  me  and  Iceei?  me 
n^ni  tlien  sliall  Jehovah  he  my  God. 

(2)  To  connect  a  statement  of  time  or  a  noun  placed 
absolutely  with  the  clause  to  which  it  relates,  on  the  third 
day  on'inx  ^%'^^  Abraham  lifted  ujp  his  eyes. 


GRAMMATICAL    TABLES. 


I.     The  Letters,  §1. 

Order. 

Forms 

and  Equivalents. 

Kames. 

Eabhinical 
Alpliabet. 

Numerical 

values. 

1 

^( 

?b^ 

Alepli 

f' 

1 

X 

2 

1 

Bh,  B 

n^a 

Beth 

3 

^ 

3 

y 

Gh,  G 

^T^ 

Gr-mel 

i 

3 

4 

"I 

Dh,  D 

nbt! 

Da'-leth 

7 

4 

5 

n 

H 

«n 

lie 

t5 

5 

6 

1 

V 

in 

Vav 

1 

6 

7 

T 

z 

rt 

Zayin 

t 

7 

8 

n 

Hh 

n^n 

Hheth 

P 

8 

9 

t: 

T 

n-"!? 

Teth 

V 

9 

10 

») 

Y 

^i"^ 

Yodh 

» 

10 

11 

3  1 

Kh,  K 

^? 

Kaph 

1  = 

20 

12 

b 

L 

"t^?' 

La'-medh 

i 

30 

13 

12   D 

M 

D^ 

Mem 

CP 

40 

14 

3     ) 

N 

r^ 

Nun 

i  = 

50 

15 

D 

S 

^^29 

Sa'-mekh 

P 

60 

16 

^ 

r^ 

Ayin 

r 

70 

17 

S)   ^ 

Ph,  P 

«s 

Pe 

c|r 

80 

18 

'^r 

Ts 

•^ni 

Tsa'-dhe 

p 

90 

19 

? 

K 

l^ip 

Koph 

r 

100 

20 

n 

R 

Tijin 

Resh 

■5 

200 

21 

w 

Sh,  S 

TP 

Shin 

C 

300 

22 

n 

Th,  T 

nn 

Tav 

P 

400 

83 


11.     Classification  of  the  Letters,  §2. 


Gutturals,  i5  n  n  y 
Palatals,  :\  'i  D  p 
Linguals,  T  i:  b  3  n 
Dentals,  T  D  s  ii? 
Labials,  n  1  12  S 
1  shares  the  peculiarities 
of  the  Gutturals. 


Weak. 


Medium, 


Strong, 


2. 

(i5  n    -1  ■>  Vowel-Letters 
]x  n  n  2?  Gutturals. 
ib)2    3  1  Liquids. 
]  T  D  2  11?  Sibilants. 

I     Aspirates  and 


Mutes. 


Serviles  nbDi  niira  frfi^.    Radicals  the  rest  of  the  Alphabet. 


Zonff  Vowels, 

Ka'mets  a  ■ 
Tse  re  e  ' 
Hholem  o  . 


The    Points,  §4. 

Short  Vowels, 

Piittahh  a  — 

Seghol  e  -^^ 

Ka'mets-Hhatuph  o  t 


Doub/fnl  Vowels. 

LIhi'rik    ~      i  ov  ^ 
Shii'rek  — 
Kib  buts  r 


:! 


tt  or  u 


Pronounce  d  as  in  father^  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in  met,  i  as  in 
machine^  i  as  in  pin,  o  as  in  note,  6  as  in  not,  u  as  in  I'ule,  u  as  in  full. 

silent  or  vocal. 

thus  "lb?  "modk, 
thus  "^b&5  %(9r. 
thus   ^:ni  °;^i. 

n  or  Ji  at  the  end  of 


§  7.     Simple  Sh  va 

_,  ,    C  Hhateph-Pattahh  -: 

Th^r        Hhateph-Seghol   ^ 

(.  Hhateph-Kamets  tt 


§  8.    Pattahh-furtive  ^  with  ^ 
words. 

§12.   Daghesh-lene  in  3  5  '^   S  &   n  removes  aspiration. 

§  13.    Daghesh-forte  doubles;    not   found  in  i5  n  n  y, 
rarely  in  "^ . 

§  14.   Mappik  in  final  t^i  when  a  consonant. 

§  15.    Raphe   ^   opposite   of    Daghesh-lene,   Daghesh- 
forte,  or  Mappik. 

§  21.    Makkeph  (")  connects  w^ords. 

§  22.    Methegh  —  second  syllable  before  the  accent. 

Si 


in. 

Til 

E  Accents,  ^16. 

DISJUNCTIVES. 

Class 

I .     Emp  crors. 

1.    Silluk 

(,) 

:p^^o 

2.   Athnahh 

L) 

I?*:* 

Class  II.  Kings. 

3.    S'gholta 

(•■•) 

'  :      : 

poMp^ 

4.    Zakeph  Katon 

C) 

T'^I?  =li?.I 

5.    Zakeph  Gadhol 

('■) 

bins  q;?T 

6.    Tiphhha 

(J 

IT  :   • 

Class  III.  Dules. 

7.  R'bhr 

(') 

•  : 

8.   Shalsheleth 

/  j  >, 

r^l!:b!i3 

9.    Zarka 

/  CS5^ 

^F?"^! 

postp. 

10.    Pashta 

/    ■»   \ 

N-JlliS 

postp. 

11.   Y'thibh 

V'*     / 

prep. 

12.    T'bhir 

Class 

V 

1  IV.   Counts. 

13.  Pazer 

/  y  \ 

^TS 

14.    Karne  Phara 

/•M"-. 

nns  "^n;? 

15.  T'lisha  Gh'dhola 

{  ^\ 

nbiia  N^^bn 

prep. 

16.   Geresh 

/"'  \ 

^15 

IT.    G'rashayim 

[  "  \ 

c^ilins. 

18.    P'-sIk 

(  ' ) 

ip^DS 

CONJUNCTIVES.     Servants. 

19.   Merka 

\ »  / 

Nsnia 

20.  MQnal.h 

\  J  j 

r;!!^ 

21.    MerlaKh'pl 

hala 

^  )) ' 

nb!iS2  Nsnia 

22.   Mahpakh 

\<  ) 

^snT? 

23.    Darga 

^  <  / 

«^1^ 

24.    Kadhma 

/  "*  \ 

^P^I? 

25.   Yerahh  ben 

Yomo 

V  y/ 

■iri-i— ,3  nn^ 

20.    T'lisha  K'tanria 

,%  . 

nsap  xi^^bn 

postp, 

«5 


IV.      Inseparable  Prepositions  and  Vav 

Conjunctive,  §§  27,  28. 

Primary  form,  3            S             b            "1 

Before  vowelless  Consonants,  S            3            b             1* 

Before  Gutturals  with  Compound  Sh'va,  the  corresponding  short  wicel 

Before  monosyllables  and  accented  syllables,  -j-  3            3             b            "^ 

"With  the  contracted  article,  the  vowel  of  the  article. 

*  Also  before  the  labials  -  ,   ^  ,  and  E  ,  but  'i  before  vowelless  Yodh. 
+  With  the  interrogative  ^523,   n"2r  ,  T'>'!Z^  or  nhh  . 

The   Preposition  "j^,  He  Interrogative,  the  Article, 
AND  the  Interrogative  Tra. 


Before  strong  consonants, 

•^ 

ri 

•n 

•n^* 

Before    vowelless    consonants  and   strong     ) 
gutturals,                                                        1 

^ 

n 

n 

ni3 

Before  weak  gutturals. 

tt 

n 

n 

n^ 

Before  gutturals  with  Kamets, 

^ 

1 1 

V 

n 

™ 

*  But  with  a  disjunctive  accent  commonly  mQ. 

Inseparable  Prepositions  with  Suffixes. 

S  I  N  G  U  L  A  E  . 

2/.    ^^  Tjb'  —  ^        ^      M^^ 


T 

m-^l 

P 

LUEAL. 

^J": 

>l3iJ23 

D=b 

VT 

K|, 

1^^ 



1..     il-A  *I2^  ^2i'J3  1^53'; 

2m.  Dia  Dsb  di|,Dii-i3  D|-J 

8 «!.   ni ,  D^iia  i:3 ,  trh  oris ,  dhti?  tin?ti ,  uri-2 

»/•     "lU?.  ig?  "|%!^  —  "7^ 


Y.     Personal  Pronouns,  §  29. 


1 

2. 

3. 


I 


SINGULAR. 


We 

j  Thou  m.  nni?,   nis^  Ye  m, 

\  Thou  /     ns* ,  -^nx  Ye  /. 

j  He  N*^n  They  m. 

\  She  K-^n,  i5nn  §  23.  3.  They  /. 

Suffixes. 


PLURAL. 

^-^^^... 

^:n?, 

DPS? 

)r)«, 

'"'?r}^ 

DH, 

n^n 

'':^ 


m.    run 


Simple.        With  union  Vo-ft 

els  of 

Verbs. 

"W;tb  Sing.  Nouns.        With  Dual  and 

1  c. 

""?,   '^.         ""P-               "^3.. 

""?■.• 

eu 

*l 

*1 

pi. 

13              12^            ID.. 

^3... 

^=.  0=,) 

^3\ 

2  «!. 

^(^?)  a!)    (^j 

5... 

(3f,) 

'I,  a) 

T., 

?pZ. 

DD 

=5, 

D?\ 

2/ 

^C?)      ^.  ,^...     t. 

^.. 

^\ 

;>;. 

1? 

i?: 

)?r. 

8  7??. 

in        in^  ,i  in.. 

^3... 

0"?...) 

i    (n,in 

.)    i\(inr.,^ni) 

^.?. 

n(i^)    D^  ,D.   D.. 

D, 

DO'..  0''2\.) 

s/. 

n         n^        n.. 

na 

T  ••• 

n^ 

n-".^ 

i>?. 

1(5^?)     1.           I. 

1, 

i%?r. 

Demonstrative, 

Masc.  Fem.  Common. 

Sing,  nr  (it)     nxT  (it,  nr)  t/iis.      Plur.  bs,  n^s  z'/^^^^^. 

Relative. 

•^T?^:  «^/^<5  or  icMc/i ;  abbreviated  form  "^  (•!»,  15,  W) 

Interrogative  and  Indefinite. 
'^'a  w/io  ?  or  whoever,     n'a  z^//«^  .^  or  whatever. 

Verbs. — Their  Species,  §§  31,  32. 

1.  Simple  act.        Kal  bi2p  to  MIL 

2.  "     pass.      Niphal 

3.  Intensive  act.     Piel 

4.  "         pass.  Pual 

5.  Causative  act.    Hiphil 

6.  "         pass.  Ilophal 
7    Reflexive 


bt:p:  to  be  killed. 


biDp  to  kill  many  or  to  massacre, 
biDp  to  he  massacred. 

b'^bpn  to  cause  to  Mil. 

b"jpn  to  he  caused  to  MIL 

Hithpael bi^pnn  to  Mil  ones  self, 
«7  ■ 


VI.     Paradigm  of 

KAL. 

Kll'JIAL. 

riEL. 

rUAL. 

Fret. 

3  m. 

'^2 

-"^r?? 

^ti?p 

'^R 

3/. 

"?"95 

j^r^i?? 

nb  tpp 

"?^R 

2  m. 

^r"^I? 

^f^Pr? 

^)^.? 

i?'^R 

2/ 

P^^5 

^bip? 

nb^op 

J^r^R 

1   c. 

^P^aij 

'^nb^pp 

^rib^p 

^rbtsR 

Plur. 

3   c. 

*9R 

fepp 

^b^p 

*"^R 

2  771. 

DlJ^ai^ 

^^r?5p? 

Dnb^p 

Qtribap 

2/ 

lJ?f?i? 

lijbt^pp 

i^r^p 

t!^W 

1   c. 

'^r^I? 

^-■b^p? 

^:b:bp 

^:^^p_ 

Infin. 

ahsol. 

bitD5 

bbpn 

btip 

b% 

constr. 

bq? 

'^^l?57 

^^P 

(^^R) 

FUT. 

3  m. 

bbp: 

bpp;^ 

^tQP' 

v^r: 

3/. 

btipn 

^^prn 

^^P^ 

bbr<n 

2?7i. 

brbpn 

it^prn 

btopn 

btsi^n 

2/ 

'^t^pp, 

^^9!?^ 

^^i^pr^ 

'?t3i5n 

1  c. 

^^I?^^ 

^<^P^ 

'^t^P« 

'^R« 

Plur. 

3  m. 

*ppr 

*''^Er 

*t^p: 

^^^R' 

3/ 

n:btipri 

n-btipn 

T  :    "It    • 

^."^tDpri 

rabapn 

2  ?7l. 

^bt:pri 

^b^p^n 

^bt^pn 

^Kj^FI 

2/ 

rijbtipn 

»^J^^p^ 

a-*^P^ 

nibtapn 

1    c. 

^^P? 

bipp 

^top? 

%.? 

Impeh. 

2  m. 

bbp 

'^pn 

>^P 

2/. 

^bt:p 

^^tfpD 

^f'^P 

Plur. 

2  m. 

fep 

^bppri 

*tcp 

wanting 

2/ 

^"r^P 

n:bt:pn 

T  ;     •  Ir    • 

rtm 

Part. 

ac^ 

^'^P 

^^tV 

pass. 

b^rop 

bbpp 

^i?R'^ 

88 


Perfect  Verbs,  §§^J3 

-38. 

EiriJiL. 

HOIIIAL. 

inTIll'AEI.. 

KAL   (W//(/.  ('). 

KAL  («</</,  C^). 

^'^I?n 

^^ppr? 

-is 

••  T 

bii'aj 

T 

rh±j)n 

nbtfpnn 

rrizs 

Mbijii: 

T     ;    nr 

r'r^pn 

tl^P:^ 

rb^pnn 

T  ;  —  T 

i^'?^pn 

F!::5pnn 

r"?5 

rbb-^ 

:  :       T 

*pibt:pn 

"-ribbpn 

Tb^pnn 

•  :  —  T 

•  :        T 

iib^ippri 

^^9P" 

^i^:£pnn 

:  IT 

:   IT 

Drbt:pn 

Drtepr; 

c^r^b^" 

Dr}-2? 

(c!j^;^) 

]^>^\i^ 

lij^^pn 

■'^rtepnn 

1^75? 

(t^?^) 

^ibhpt} 

^jbDpn 

^Dbt^pnn 

:  — T 

r,?:'a 

-t?pn 

bfcpn 

••;    T 

(btipnr:)j 

T 

bii-3 

T 

^'Ppvj 

i^PO 

biipnn 

nns 

::::'9 

^'PP- 

^^1?: 

^^E^C 

"5?" 

bit:" 

b-'bpn 

bai^n 

btopripi 

•lirn 

b?tn 

^'Pp^ 

!:!bi3n 

btpnn 

ni;n 

b^OT 

'^'t)pn 

'?"9Ir^ 

^biDpnri 

^^T?^ 

^3?OT 

-'^p^ 

'UI^N 

bt:pr:5 

"^T^ 

brc^^ 

*^^p: 

^''■^p; 

^3i:pn: 

^^??: 

*?-: 

»^Jri?P^ 

n:bi;pn 

Mjjptspr^n 

rritn 

r;:b?irr. 

^b^ippn 

i;^-,ri 

^bt:pnn 

ri^ZT) 

^5r^P5 

nrbupn 

T  :   -•:    r 

nDbfe:pnn 

"-"^T^ 

n:b?tn 

b-'t:pD 

^tcpn: 

"tf? 

b?:r: 

^'^Pl! 

btpnri 

"^? 

^ytbptj 

-btppnn 

'^T? 

^b-'tpprj 

wanting- 

^bt£pnM 

^^>Z^ 

nibibpri 

r;:b^pnr) 

5^r^^ 

^'"^I?"Q 

^•^Tr? 

-^P^^"^ 

VII. 

Paradigm  of  the 

Perfect 

s 

I  N  G  r  L  A  R 

1  com. 

2  ??i«s^. 

2/<?w. 

3  ??ias(;. 

8 /em. 

Kal  Preterite. 

Sing.  3  masc. 

^?59I? 

^1?^I? 

^^^?i? 

-^?l? 

Zfem. 

^;nBr:p 

^^^5^5 

^!?5^i? 

^rinpt:p  ^ 

nnbtjp 

2  masc. 

'?^f?i?  \ 

qnt^bt:p ) 

n^y^p 

nnbt^rp  j 

iri'r^p ) 

^fem. 

^D-ribt^i^ 

qn-"fnbr:p  ) 
rnbyp ) 

rj'j^b^pp 

1  com. 

^ri^^I? 

T'^t"^!? 

vnb^l^ 

rj'^b^i? 

Pltje.  3  com. 

'P^^^I? 

^*?I? 

^*91? 

^nnbtjp 

ri^btjp 

V.  masc. 

^a^nbiif;) 

^n^nbt^p 

ti^pibt^p 

1  com. 

iTj^ibapj 

"^=r^I? 

^n^ibt^p 

ti^ibt^P 

T        :   —1; 

Infinitive. 

^r'^i? 

^^^i? 

ibtpg 

"^'95 

Future. 

Sing.  3  masc. 

i?^T. 

^^^p: 

\  -^^m: 

iinbtip;^ } 

v'?9rj 

•  V    :  ' :  • 

I  7\f^W- 

) 

^2bt)p:  j 

nsbt^p;  J 

Plue.  3  masc. 

^p^St^i:: 

^^^^!?' 

'=i*'?i?- 

^nfep: 

ri^tpp: 

Imperative. 

Sing.  2  masc. 

^?^^l? 

^nbtip 
..  .  1^ 

D'^I? 

PiEL  Preterite. 

Sing.  3  masc. 

^f5t?p 

^^^:p 

^■^^p 

*^P 

T    :  '  • 

HiPHiL  Preterite. 

Sing.  8  masc. 

-pr^i^r^ 

^'?"^P^^ 

■^S'tppri 

"i^'^pn 

rtS'tppn 

90 


Verbs  witp 

I  Suffixes, 

S\i, 

1  com. 

2  was(j. 

Plural. 

2 /dm. 

3  ma5(j. 

8/6m. 

^3ribt:p 
!i3-ribt2p 

^3^bt:p 
rj^ribt:p 

□Dnbtsp 

V   :-  iT»: 

D-^nb^p 

D^nb^fp 

D^b^P 

D^nb^p 

D^,:bt:p 

DiTb^ir 
Qi'b^ip 

ii^='"^i? 

^Dbtip 

QibtjP 

■^^?I? 

o^^i? 

i^^r^ 

^2bt?p: ) 
^^btfp-'  i 
^]ibt:p: 

Qib^i?: 

Di^bt^p;^ 

C3bt:p: 
D^bpp;" 

^:bt:p 

°^^5 

^5Sr?p 

Ciib^P 

i?f^p 

Dbtpp 

i^^p 

^ib^tspn 

DDytpjDri 

|5r"^I?" 

isb^^I^n 

l5't2i?n 

91 


VIII. 

Paradigm 

OF  Pe  Guttural  Verbs, 

§53.     "^ 

KAL. 

NIPHAL.             HIPHIL. 

HOFHAL. 

fi^B   FUT. 

Prkt.   3  w. 

■i7b? 

17b  J :     -i^7j:?n 

—  V.IV                           •  v.  IV 

,                  1 

1 

1      bisj^"* 

3/ 

T    :  IT 

T     :    V|V                 r          •  v:  IV 

T    :  T  IT 

1     bi^T) 

2  w. 

T  :    —  T 

niT::^:     n"iii:?n 

nn7brr; 

bbjkr\ 

2/ 

piTi!;:    rn723?n 

v"""^^.  *^ 

-bi^^n 

1  c. 

^mtv 

•   :    -t.iv            •   :    -v:  iv 

^ni7b;5?n 

•   :   •"  t:    it 

bD> 

Plur.  3  c. 

"^h'zv 

.    ...|-.-                             .    V    ,v 

^^^?n 

^bD&^^ 

:        1 

2  m. 

s^ir^T"^? 

nmi2y:  mmuyri 

Qni7j3?n 

n;bD^n 

2/ 

"^7"?? 

]rrv2y:    ]^y2}T^. 

li?7'^?C; 

:          1 

1  c. 

:    —  r 

^:jctj     rn^yti^ 

^577^5  n 

njbbj^n 
bi&<2 

!     I.NFIN.    ^6S0^. 

'r\ty 

r    1"                          ••  -;    1- 

Tbrn 

■■  t:    fT 

,               Corner. 

"'•a? 

"iTbjn     i^i^n 

^^^D 

Kal  ifut.a.) 

Pin: 

FuT.  3  m. 

-'^3?- 

itT'      'rby^ 

iby^ 

3/. 

■ib:?n 

■■  T  1"                     •  -:  1- 

—  T,     IT 

pinr^ 

2/w. 

n'^^^n 

rcyri     Tbyri 

—  t:  IT 

pinri 

2/ 

^ni]:?r. 

^rcvTi  ■  '^irj3?n 

•     :    r    IT 

^PJO^ 

1  c. 

n:a3?i« 

T2y^     T7j:?j< 

ity^ 

pim 

Plur.   ?,  w. 

^"it:r 

^ii2T     r]^bT 

^r/2T 

m: 

3/ 

T  :        -:  r 

npTiijr,  npi'a^n 

T  :   —  t:    IT 

npfpTrp) 

2tn 

^n7^?n 

^TX-n      ^1^723?!^ 

^r/2yr\ 

:  T  IT 

^Pjnri 

^^Z 

T  :          :    - 

nD77b:"p}  n]77!:5ri 

n5Tb3?n 

T  :    —  t:   it 

^5Pi™ 

1  c. 

17b3?D        ThTj 

••  Ti~                        •  -:i- 

17J^D 

pm: 

IvPER.  2  m. 

^b?  • 

-i7b3?r;      i7b:j>n 

prn_ 

2/ 

'^^? 

^^^:?n    ^i^7j:^'n 

wanting 

^pjn 

P^wr.  2  w. 

^To>' 

^Tj:^n    "^i^'cyri 

^prn 

2/ 

npnt]:? 

nn7b:5?n  r)D"i7j:j?n 

Part.  ^rf. 

"1725 

i^hy'Q 

Pass. 

T^^y 

""t^'-. 

r  n  I  T 

1 

Q*?. 


IX.    Paradigm 

OF  Ayin 

Guttural  Verbs 

,  §54. 

KAL. 

XIPIIAL. 

PIEL. 

Pl-AL. 

IIITIIPAEL. 

Pp.et.  3  m. 

b^5 

^^f? 

ii?^ 

iS5 

^^5^" 

3/ 

Mbx3 

T  -;  ;  • 

r:bws:5 

nSs3 

T  -:  1 

t^^^^PH 

2  771. 

nbsB 

T  :  —  r 

rbb^ro 

T  ;    —  ;  • 

T  :  — 

rbi^r^nn 

2/ 

nbw^5 

ribwsro 

'^J^^^) 

rb.^b 

ri^5r?r^ 

Ic. 

Tib.<<:» 

^rb^ro 

*^r^5 

'^^^'^ 

vb^r^nn 

Flur.  3  c. 

*s;5 

^b^:o 

^bw^ri 

^bw^h 

•'i^^f?n 

2  w. 

onb.sr* 

dnbj<:o 

^^r^,5 

CDrfcxii 

Dnb^jnn 

2/ 

1^^"^? 

1^?^^?? 

i^rt^j 

■^f^T' 

"rib^r.rn 

Ic. 

^,3b^5ri 

:  — r 

^:b.N?:o 

^3ri«? 

rjbs^b 

^jb^r^rri 

Infix.  Absol. 

b'^^5:« 

b!!^^n 

bs3 

Constr. 

bi<3 

b^5r»r) 

••  T      • 

bk3 

••  T 

FuT.  3  w. 

b^r 

^i^jr 

••  T  : 

bk:r 

bk^n; 

3/ 

^!^^^ 

bj<3ri 

bi5--n 

bwSin 

bkr^nn 

2  m. 

bb^r^n 

^^ii? 

b.^:n 

b>?in 

bkiirn 

••  T    :    • 

2/ 

^"^S'-i^ 

'?^5^ 

'^^5^ 

"b^5bn 

•b^J^^nn 

Ic. 

^^^f^ 

-^5^ 

b&r^j^ 

•T  -: 

b^?b.s 

••  T    ;    V 

PZur.  3  m. 

*^?.' 

^-^JC 

^^^5" 

^^^•?? 

^^^^r^." 

8/ 

nhk:^u\ 

HDbi^r^n 

T  :    —  r    • 

nj^.i^^n 

n;b^5bri 

nrb.^Brn 

2  w. 

^S.NtjFl 

^b^jn 

^ib.s;3n 

^b:^bn 

^i>^5rn 

2/ 

n:b:s3n 

n:bsr.n 

M:b^^:n 

T  :   —  r    ; 

» )->!sr»rn 

r;:b;^3rri 

1  c. 

^>?f? 

••  T  • 

'^^33 

bkr.n: 

••T    ;  • 

Imper.  2  7n. 

b.<?B 

bS5 

••  T 

••  T    :     • 

2/ 

'^^? 

'1^«^- 

wanting 

vs:.r:n 

PZwr.  2  W2. 

•S^j;^ 

^b^5,5^I 

-:iT 

^^^5^J7 

2/. 

nrb:^^ 

^Jr^^n 

r  ;  — T 

n:b^^rri 

Part.  Act. 

b^^"^ 

•T    : 

bx-in-^ 

Pass. 

1 

T 

bi<y:3 

ar^ 


X.   Paradigm 

OF  Lamedu  Guttural  Verbs,  §  5o. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL." 

IIIPIIIL. 

HITOPAEL. 

Peet,  3  m. 

-      T 

r,5'd? 

nbp 

ri'^pcjn 

nbvidn 

3/. 

T  :    IT 

nnbsD 

T  ;     ;  • 

nnV^ 

nn-^bain 

T     •     ;    • 

nM!^rizn 

2  m. 

T    :  -    T 

T   :  -     :  • 

nnb"^ 

r    ;  -      • 

r    :  -     ;     • 

rr;ir-^'n 

2/ 

:    -  ~    T 

rnn?"j:p 

TTsyz- 

riM^n'iTt 

1  c. 

•    :  -    T 

"nnp'j:; 

^rin.^i? 

Pu^iZ^'^I"! 

"Pinxpi^n 

Plur.  3  c. 

"nbuj 

:    IT 

"nb'i? 

^.nb'i: 

^n^pxn 

^nbn"u:n 

2  m. 

Gnnbtr 

Drinb-i? 

DP}n">iD 

Dnnbuin 

Drin^ri'^'n 

2/ 

■j^>"^'^ 

1^^^"^'? 

it^nrj 

l^v'^n 

-nnbridn 

1  c. 

i]:nb"d 

:  -   T 

^-v^'^? 

^jnl'j 

^UmPILTI 

^Dnbrdn 

Infin.  Absol. 
Constr. 

nibiij 

r 

nbi^n 

'      T     . 

rbrir'n 

FuT.  3  w. 

nb'^^^ 

rb'^- 

^1 

rrb-^-^ 

nbm-d-^ 

3/ 

nb'i:^ 

nb^^n 

n^'in 

n-rrri 

nbn'oin 

2  m. 

nb-p'ri 

-      T     • 

nb^in 

n^b'^ri 

n'^n-uiri 

2/ 

^nbiriri 

-nbiiin 

^t}r^T\ 

-n^bcri 

"nbri-.i;ri 

Ic. 

■     :   V 

"       T    V 

n|t^ 

n^bx'.Si 

"k'^^1 

Plur.  3  ??i. 

•i'^V^: 

^Hy^^ 

MnV^':' 

^n^b^r: 

^fibra: 

3/ 

n:nbtri 

T    :  -    T    • 

n^nbtn 

n:nbcn 

r    ;  -      ;     - 

nrnbnxT, 

2  m. 

^inb^^jn 

^,nb^n 

^nr^in 

^n^b'cn 

^nbn-cn 

2/ 

HDr^b-in 

T    :  ~     : 

T    :  -    r     • 

T    :  -     -    : 

nrnp-dn 

ri:nbn^^ri 

r    :  -            ;     • 

1  c. 

nb-Tj 

-       T  - 

1  1>U^J 

n^biTj 

T3r\'ZZ 

Impee.  2  m. 

nb'ij 

nb^n 

-       T      • 

Mp'^I) 

r^'^r} 

T-^TJ^T} 

2/ 

^rb^ 

^nb'::n 

TVo? 

'^ri-'b-dn 

•^ribran 

P?wr.  2  m. 

^nb'i 

iinb^n 

•i^b-j: 

^n^b'cin 

^nbri"j:ri 

2/ 

T    :  -     : 

n^-^^^'^n 

T    : 

T    :  "     :    - 

T   :  "    -    :    • 

Part.  ^c«. 

^^'^ 

nbiT'j 

n^b-^i'j 

nbniij^j 

Pas5. 

T 

nbu:3 

T    :  • 

94. 


XI. 

rAKADUiH  OF  r 

E  iNuN   Verbs,   §  5 

6. 

KxiL. 

XIPHAI.. 

iiipriiL. 

UOPIIAL. 

KAL. 

PiiET.  3  m. 

—  r 

"cip 

n 

♦"'■^'fPr 

T  ;  • 

nd^in 

!^?™ 

2  m. 

T    :  — r 

r-^B? 

n^in 

Ti"^  3" 

rr: 

2/ 

:    :  — r 

riw'3j 

prtL'^n 

iTw^n 

:    — r 

Ic. 

•    :  -T 

T''^5? 

-rp^n 

"ric^n 

'^tl3 

PIUT.  3  c. 

:  IT 

vj;>; 

^•c;^?n 

vcr- 

:  IT 

2  m. 

crr^rg 

Dri^^D 

Dridr.n 

^t^^i 

2/. 

",n'i::o 

"i^^?? 

"iri'^T^ri 

1  c. 

:  — T 

^ir^'ij 

^ri^iri 

^r^'in 

—  T 

Infix-  Ahsol. 

T 

\i:3n 

'^••r' 

jir: 

Constr. 

^■^'^ 

■^"ijr^ 

IT"  1**1 

rn 

FuT.  3  «z. 

tr 

w  ,(^ 

^"^1 

i^C 

3/ 

"k^iri 

••  T      • 

l^in 

2  w. 

irin 

•  ••'In  »^ 

1 

1^^ 

2/ 

^"iir^ri 

"■b:|ri 

^'j:"^in 

4nn 

•    :    • 

Ic. 

■^'i^ 

ir^^^ 

'^-2^    ! 

riur.  3  w. 

^ir. 

■  iiir^r 

v:;'!*;: 

^^S"  1 

fin: 

3/ 

nr^in 

» i"'\r3ii^ 

t  1./  »« «u-l 

» iiw^ri 

("Sin) 

2  771. 

vc^n 

vc3rn 

Vw"n 

^w3n 

^jnn 

2/. 

nr^r'^n 

kaaM.M*  ^   Ban 

T    :    T    • 

n«  wT)!^ 

ri]y3ri 

(nsnn) 

Ic. 

^^r 

■•  T    • 

iro 

Imper.  2  m. 

■C3 

■^'rlrH 

"cr^ri 

15^ 

2/ 

•^•i'ri 

"'^^r^in 

^'j:-|iri 

wanting 

"rJ? 

PZ//r.  2  w. 

Vi"ii 

Vw;r>!^n 

vj:^r»n 

fon 

2/ 

r     ;  — 

T     :    ••  r    • 

r^"  w3n 

(~^) 

Part.  ^c«. 

■cib 

'd^i'j 

! 

ir:= 

Pa5«. 

'd^i; 

tv:i 

T     •.. 

1*= 

95 


XII. 

Paradigm 

OF  Ayin 

KAL. 

MPHAL. 

PI&I.S 

Pr.ET.  3  m. 

-io 

-b 

-b3 

— T 

ibio 

3/ 

nizo 

nnb 

T  — r 

nbsio 

r  :      1 

2  m. 

(^=t?) 

T              — 

nibc2 

T         — : 

n^bio 

2/ 

(^=i=) 

nine 

niicj 

nzbio 

\c. 

•    :   —  T 

^n^no 

^rnnc? 

^rinbio 

Plur.  3  c. 

:  IT 

^30 

^inbD 

— T 

^bnio 

:      1 

2  m. 

(SJ??==) 

Enizo 

dhinc2 

— : 

Dnznio 

V   :  —     1 

2/. 

(1^=5?) 

t'^o 

l^i^'^cp 

•jnnn^o 

1  c. 

^3=30 

:   —  T 

^:iio 

^:ibcp 

^DnniD 

Infix.  ^5soZ. 

T 

20 

nioH 

nbio 

Constj\ 

~9 

SO 

Sc/H 

-bio 

FuT.  3  w. 

T 

15": 

^k: 

-bio: 

3/ 

2cn 

r 

-2sn 

nbn 

2iiori 

2  w. 

ncn 

ssn 

ibn 

niion 

2/ 

•            T 

^ion 

^nbn  ' 

^boion 

•    :      1    : 

Ic. 

T 

V 

-?!^ 

^4'b:s; 

P?wr.  3  m. 

T 

^b©: 

^^?: 

^i-hnio^ 

3/. 

r      V  •..    : 

njn'bri 

T    :  —   • 

njnbion 

2  m. 

^ncr. 

^btpn 

iinfen 

^bnicn 

2/. 

T     V  \   : 

T    ; 

r::nbn 

T   :  —   • 

ri'nbicn 

T  :   ••         : 

1  c. 

T 

nD? 

-?? 

^4^bp 

Lmper.  2  w. 

:2b 

nbn 

sbio 

2/. 

^30 

^nbri 

^bnio 

•    :      1 

Plur.  2  m. 

^no 

^nbn 

^bsio 

2/ 

T         V    •.. 

r^'noH 

n:2bio 

Part.  Act. 

-rb 

obio'j 

Pass. 

n^io 

^?; 

96 


DouBiED  Verbs,  §  57. 


HIPIIIL. 

HOPIIAL. 

IlITHPAEL. 

PIEL. 

i^Ct  1 

scin 

-i^^vH 

TibiD 

ri^cn 

T   — 

-t9?? 

T           •  -: 

n-in'rcn 

^r?TP 

n*:ncr; 

n^iincn 

:    :  —          :    • 

Ti^C^D 

T^i^vH 

^pziincn 

Tp6?o 

^^cn 

iinc^n 

:       1    :    • 

v.y^'y 

dnincn 

Dn-zincn 

V   :   —       1    :     • 

C]n:c^D 

■jnincn 

"ri^^ircn 

■rcc^o 

^:incn 

iirniircn 

r.3c^o 

:iC0 

^c.c 

••     T 

niincn 

^?T? 

••  T 

2tV 

^i^'i5^'9? 

-in 

••     T 

nc^n 

-iincn 

^cxn 

nc^n 

-zippn 

"^ir?^ 

^2cn 

•      ••     T 

"2c^n 

-  ^i-ircn 

'ivP?ri 

-^^'J 

nc^s 

-i■^^•yS^? 

"i;"?^ 

^nc"^ 

^^tv 

^i::inc^ 

^ic?c^ 

nrscn 

nr-iincn 

n:^ci:cn 

"  JQcn 

imc-in 

^inircn 

^ic?cn 

n-nnircn 

n:::c"cn 

-?? 

rc^2 

^ii'^P? 

"^V^T?? 

rcn 

••    r 

in-ircn 

=I^?5 

wanting 

•    :       1    :     • 

n-"!iicri 

nr-iincn 

T    .    ••            ;     • 

T   ;    ••  .  — 

-?'^ 

1      . 

~^T?T 

T 

J 

07 


1 

1 

XIII.     Paradigm  of 

Ayin  Vav 

KAL. 

NIPIIAL. 

riEL. 

PUAL. 

Pket.  3  m. 

1=^ 

-Dip: 

D-bip 

D'bip 

3/ 

"■?i? 

rap; 

niijip 

n-b-^ip 

2  m. 

n-JE 

ini-:T>2 

nxT^ 

I?T'=T 

2/ 

^"^E 

nir^p: 

ri-fbip 

J^rrT 

\c. 

•rag 

T'^'-^P? 

•'rr^/jip 

"W^-^P 

Plur.  3  c. 

rjjb 

^■^ijiD 

^t^ij^ 

"i'fp 

2  w. 

t=n-J2 

dni/^ipj 

Dn-^/jip 

cn-r'iip 

2/ 

l^'^E 

)j;^"'-t? 

l^'r^'i? 

|J?"f='P 

Ic. 

^-"^2 

^3ii:pp 

^"fbip 

>i"±ip 

Infix.  ^Js^?. 

Dip 

Qipn 

Constr. 

Dip 

Dipn 

D"^ip 

FuT.  3  7?^. 

Dp; 

Dip: 

D-iip": 

Qiip? 

.3/ 

Dpn 

Dipn 

D-bipn 

D-^ipn 

2  m. 

Dipn 

Dipn 

D-^ipn 

Diipn 

2/ 

"'r^pl? 

"^'p^ 

rj!aipDn 

^iJsifjFi 

Ic. 

dps 

Dip^ 

l^iip^il 

D"="P? 

P^wr.  3  m. 

^-'p: 

^'-ip: 

^"-"9^'l?: 

•■-■fp: 

3/ 

n-iipn 

nr/^ipn 

r;j"4::!:ipn 

n-fbipn 

2  w. 

vr,pn 

iiripn 

^"b'fipn 

!i-japri 

2/. 

ri3"tpi^ 

n:7^ipn 

r    :     \      ' 

nrfbipr^ 

n:-^-rpn 

1  c. 

D^D 

D^ipp 

^'^P? 

D-5P3 

Impek.  2  m. 

Dp 

Dipn 

D^ip 

2/ 

r;p 

rrlpn 

"^^p 

wanting 

PZ?^r.  2  m. 

^■r,p 

^:^ipr; 

^^r'l? 

2/ 

"t-'tP 

rij'^ipn 

nr^-rip 

Part.  Act. 

^R 

Diip^J 

Pass. 

Q^p 

Dip: 

D-iipa 

oy 


AND    AyIN 

YoDn  Verbs,  §59. 

HIPHII,. 

nOPHAL. 

HITIIPAEL. 

K.U 

0")?n 

cipin 

niiptri 

in 

T 

^■fi?r? 

trbp^n 

n-fjipDinn 

T    T 

w-'pq 

(J?"#-^") 

n^^f^ipnn 

T    ;  -             T 

m-j'pn 

(n-9^w) 

r,"rbipnri 

^T^ 

"pirrpn 

(Wi^-) 

^n:^/jiprin 

''nn^    ''niin 

r^-pn 

ilTJp^-l 

:    'i    :    • 

ii2n      iiu^S 

Diitripn 

(nri2?p!iri) 

Dn/fjij^nri 

V  ;  — 

invrpri 

(■i?rP^~) 

-n^a^^j^m 

1^^^ 

>i3ri'pn 

(^:-rI2W) 

^3-;iipnri 

r.z^ 

DRH 

nin       n^n 

Q'Pv 

Q-rpnn 

^"!' 

d"p: 

DgV 

t3'^Tr^? 

•   T 

d'pn 

Dpm 

t::jiprn 

•      T 

D'pn 

DpW 

D-jipnn 

•     T 

'■^'P5? 

-7^pm 

^^j-j^prn 

•    :    'i    :    • 

•     T 

d'ps 

np^s 

t^'i^'ipnj^ 

•    r 

^■^■p; 

!i<2pr 

^:j-^"ipn': 

•  T 

njapn 

(-;5?p^n) 

nj-fj^pnn 

T   :  ••  T 

Vi-pn 

':       1 

^"j-jip^nn 

^n^nn 

nj-rPJ? 

(-"rP^P) 

nrrbiprn 

T    :    ••    »      :    • 

T   :   ••  T 

D"P3 

Dpi: 

D/jiplHj 

QPO 

D-jipnn 

1 
in 

^•^■Pv 

wanting 

rb:ai):nn 

't'^ 

>i-::-pr! 

^- 

^■rjijDnri 

^nn 

•^J'rK 

nrj/bipnri 

(^5?^) 

D'i?'^ 

D"bipn"j 

T 

ajb^/j 

' 

—                   — 

99 


XIV 

,    Paradigm  of 

Pe  Yodh 

Verbs,  § 

58. 

KAL. 

XIPRAL. 

nipniL. 

nornAL. 

KAL. 

Pret.  3  m. 

—  r 

I'iJiD 

z^mi 

— 'c^n 

.  1 

••T 

3/ 

^?t 

T    :     1 

T 

r     :        1 

•     **^'^,T 

2  m. 

T    :    — r 

T    ;   — 

rcwin 

T  :   — 

T    ;  -T 

2/. 

:    ;    — T 

rin^iD 

rc-c^^.n 

V]z^^:r. 

^^5: 

Ic. 

•    :    — T 

^nniiD 

"Piz-iin 

^rz'^^n 

'^'^i; 

Plur.  3  c. 

:  IT 

:     1 

^2"^a:in 

^Z'^^iTi 

:  IT 

2  m. 

V  :   —  : 

QFG';::iD 

Dn2\rjin 

V    :    -       1 

Drdn": 

2/. 

]tW' 

1^?'^^'? 

^nr^^in 

"jr}i";r^n 

1  V    ;  -  : 

1  c. 

:    -T 

iiDri-iD 

^,:»u:in 

^uHu^^n 

:  — T 

Infin.  ^5^0?. 

T 

nirin 

i 

T 

Constr. 

V      V 

^"4?'n 

ri-iin 

zpn 

FuT.  3  m. 

^'i??. 

•T   • 

n"ir 

z^v 

■^i*? 

3/. 

^Vx} 

-"4-:?^ 

n-^i-in 

Zt^T\ 

izii'^pi 

2  m. 

zm 

zir^n 

n-ijin 

Z^^F\ 

^Z^Pi 

2/. 

•     :iT   • 

^2-iin 

•     :       1 

^'^Z^t^ 

1  c. 

-i^:^^ 

"T     • 

n^iils 

12^^^^ 

tt'^ 

P??«r.  3  m. 

:iT  • 

^n^';?r 

:     1 

^i'~"^ 

3/. 

T   :   —  •• 

T   :     "T    • 

T   :      • 

T    :    — 

r    :   — 

2  m. 

^2zn 

^Z'Z-i^ 

^2^u:in 

:       1 

•iiri-n 

2/ 

njniin 

a-^^;^ 

njniim 

T   :    — 

n:t:a"n 

Ic. 

^'4?.? 

n^ii: 

riiD'^D 

irn^? 

iMrEE.  2  m. 

-'i? 

••T      • 

li'iin 

•oji" 

2/ 
PZi^r.  2  m. 

•     :iT    • 

wanting 

2/ 

T    : 

T    :    "T    • 

T    :    •• 

npirn- 

Paet.  ^c^. 

ni:-' 

Z^m2 

^■5'^ 

Pass. 

T 

T 

T 

T 

100 


XV.   Paradigm  of  Lamedii  Alepii  Verbs,    §  60. 

ivz\.L.         NirnAL.  riEL.  inniiL,        iiitiIpael. 

pret.  3  m.        ^i^      j<r^]  b^r^  ^"I'zn      ^kii^r^ 

T       T                                              T        ;     •  ••       •  •         :         •                                               ..     _      ;         . 

'^                        t:it                t::*  t:*  t      ■    :     '                 t    :    -   :    • 

2  m.      n^^i'js     r^^r:::  t\^-k'2  T\:vt2n    n^^r^nn 

T        T    r              T         ••    ;  •  T         ••    •  T         ••    :     •             r         ••  —    :     • 

2/.      n^^it)     r^k'2:i  r>:k^  rwsi::t:n    n.^k'::nn 

ic.      ^T.^xi^'^    '^n^^i■'^D  ^n^^r^  ^T\^T2n   ^T^k'zr^n 

2  m.    th^'1'2  nn^^r-D  d^)^•l•2  nn^:^"-:n  OMr^nn 

2/.*    ')5n:^"^";    "(i;}^?"^?  it)^?^  l^^^T*^   "i^^'^^^^r^ 

ic.      ^:^^r^    ?,:^^ri3  r,^k'2  ^:^5r^rt    ^:^r^rn 


infin.  ^55(>?.    isi:^-^      ^:i'2z        ^i^'2      ^*4;i2r} 

constr.     ^±2     ^r^n       m.'2     K^i'::n      m-irr^ 


FuT.  3  m.  ^TT  )^'4.1T^  ^ITT  ^''4'T  ^i?";n^ 

3/  ^r2V\  ^Ta7\  i^E'^n  jj^-r^n  ^k-^nn 

2  m.  i^i^n  ^i^ri  ^?';ri  ^^"i"2n  i^k'^rt? 

2/.  \^:;';n  '^iki^/^n  ^^^°2T\  \^^"r^r)  \^!i'?^ri 

i<^.  u^r^ij  b^rm  v^T5^  K"k^^  ^^'^^^-^ 

FiuT.zm.  "^ki'T  ^^^^2^,  ^k'^rT  ^^^^r9:  ^]k!^-:t;i: 

3/.  nt^i/^n  M^^i'^n  n^w^fs^n  r;:^r-n  ^:^5i•a^n 

2  m.  ^^'r2T\  ^^■4/j2n  ^lir^n  ^wS^i-^n  ^'i^^'^f^n 

2/.  riD^^i-n  nrs^i/sn  nri^i^n  rij^^i-n  nr^^fs-^rn 

1  c.  "^12^  '     «i/:25  ^^-s-^:  «"r»3  ^^k"::^,:: 


iMPER.2m.        &^r;     ^T/zti       i^-?:a      Krrn      ^5II»t^^ 
Fiur.^m.      rii^'2'2    ^^'412^1      ^^■i'2    ^^"i'^n     ^^^^^nri 

T        V    :  T        V    T    •  TV—  T        V    :    —  TV—:* 


Tx^T.Act.      •^^:I:a  ^^?«'9     t^-rrj      ^^?=r^'^ 

Pass.  i^^i'J  i^i^5 


101 


XVI. 

Paradigm 

OF  Lamedii 

KAL. 

NIPIIxVL. 

PIEL. 

Pket.  o  m. 

n3a 

T    T 

r:b':o 

T  ;  • 

nba 

T    • 

3/ 

T  :  JT 

nribro 

T  :  :  • 

T  :  • 

2  m. 

T       •      T 

P'b'3; 

T      •     • 

2/ 

•      T 

n^b'ro 
.. . . 

rfb? 

iG. 

•        •     T 

T^^'^? 

T'^? 

Plur.  3  c. 

^% 

*?? 

\b3 

2  w. 

tlfy)^> 

Dn-b:3 

0^'^? 

2/ 

]h-b-\ 

)JD"^?? 

itl? 

1  c. 

•     T 

1j']?t'? 

lrb'3 

Infix.  Ahsol. 

!T5a    . 

r 

n'5'?3 

n-^3 

Constr. 

nib's 

nibsn 

ni^3 

FUT.    3  77i. 

V   :  • 

nb'3- 

V     T   • 

3/. 

V   ;    • 

nban 

-b'3n 

2  wi. 

V   :    • 

nbsn 

•••   T      • 

nb'sn 

2/ 

'5fn 

•    T      • 

'i^T^ 

Ic. 

n^?^? 

V  r    V 

ribjs 

P?wr.  3  m. 

*?: 

^3- 

T* 

^'^5: 

3/ 

TV:* 

T      V   T      • 

ral^'^ii 

2  m. 

^!D?n 

T      • 

^b3n 

2/ 

T    /    :    • 

-r.^=^ 

n3-b';p, 

T    V  -    : 

1  c. 

nb:o 

-533 

V    T  • 

V  — : 

Imper.  2  w. 

nSn 

!^!??r* 

nb'3 

2/ 

^^? 

^br»n 

•     T      • 

^b'^ 

Plur,  2  m. 

65 

T      • 

.^^5 

2/ 

T    V  r    • 

nrVa 

Part.  Act. 

n53 

V 

nb'ra 

V  —  ; 

Pass. 

'^3      . 

r 

102 


He  Verbs,  §G1. 

PUAL. 

niPHIL. 

nOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

-& 

nh^a 

T  ;  ;     • 

nnbrn 

T  ;  :    T 

nnbunn 

Ki^. 

T    •  :    • 

»:'!?iv 

n^'^nri 

^■v= 

n^b':.n 

"IT 

n-V^nn 

T^^ 

^n^i-n 

-n'H;n 

^n^^srn 

^^. 

^^:^n 

^S?n 

^b'^nn 

t^ir^^ 

D^^b.-n 

Dn^b:..?i 

V    •• :    T 

Dh^bsnn 

V     •  —  :    • 

1"^% 

TC^^?" 

t%^ 

-n^hnn 

^=^^'B 

iirb'jri 

rA^m 

(-■'?) 

»^b';^u 

(nb^nr:) 

Pi'sa 

riS?n 

(r%) 

ni'^^nri 

^ 

nb':;^ 

nb'.r 

nV.-.r^" 

n% 

ni^n 

nb^n 

riJjrn 

'^??I:l 

inb^n 

nb^n 

Mb'r.nn 

-&n 

^b'jn 

-b:n 

-b'snn 

^)'5^ 

nb',•^^ 

V  :  — 

nb',-N 

V  :    T 

"^i^^ 

^il 

fe: 

^b;.- 

iiVsn: 

^i-i^ 

T    V  :  — 

r:j'b';.n 

T     V    :     T 

n:-b'r,nn 

^^OT 

fen 

^b;.n 

^^ir^nn 

T    V  •.  : 

T    V  :  — 

"'.^?^ 

T    V  —  :    • 

nb'ra 

nb'iinD 

V  —  :  • 

n>3n 

♦^y^pr^ 

wanting 

•  :  — 

wanting 

^y^nr; 

fefl 

^b'snn 

ra-b.-n 

T    V  :   — 

nb':a 

V  :    - 

V  —  :    • 

nb'"j 

V  :    T 

103 


XVII.    Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47. 

I.  Nouns  ivliich  suffer  a  change  in  tlie  vowels  only, 
i.     With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 


Sma.  Abs,      "lilJj^  master 
*li*l!2T  memorial 


Const,    lilJj^ 


y^b'O  interpreter  f^^^ 

Masc  ^int\  great  Fern.  Jlbll^i 


pl.  Ahs.  £:^5i:s5 


Const  ij^j 


b^ltOp^  Kal.  pass.  part.       tlb^ tDp 


Masc,  d^^bin^    rm-  £ii3i-i 

ii.     With  Tsere  in  the  ultimate. 
a.  Monosyllables 

Sing.  Ahs.         V^?  tree.  Const.      ^"^^        Pl.  ^&5.    Q''^?  Cowsf.    ^^^ 

^.  Polysyllables  having  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  penult. 

I  III 

Sing.  Ahs-.       I^^  heavy  Const.  ^Ipor'^^^      Pl.  Als.  Q^l^^         ^<?»25^.  ^Hj 
ifrtsc.  '©i'l  dry       jPm.    Htlijl  -3fasc.  tj'i'pni        ^^^m.  ^itli: 

c.  Polysyllables  having  any  other  vowel  than  Kamets  in  tlj 
penult. 

SixG.  ^&s,    tOvi^' J^^S^-  ^^"^^'    tOSitlJ    ^^-    ^&5.  t]^p5p        Co?is^.  ip3' 

Masc.  b top  KaL  Act. part.  Fcm.t\Yop  or  tlb tOp  ^«5C.  Q'^btDp       Fern-  tllbp' 


btOp!^Pielpart.         nbt)p^  or  ^btDp^         t:-'bt£)p)2 

iii.     With  Kamets  in  the  ultimate. 


illDtDp 


Sing.  Ahs.          y:\  fish 

T 

Const.        y^ 

PL.  ^&5.   tr^^i 

Const.     ^5 

'd'lp^  sanctuary 

lli^p)? 

D^P>p)p 

^^'ll? 

'"lln'l  word 

T      T 

-    : 

t2^'J?1 

^15 

*153?  cloud 

VI 

•  T  -: 

''"I 

T    •• 

25> 

•    T  : 

-^n; 

Masc.     G^DH  wise 

T     T 

Masc 

•  tD^^Dn 

i^m.  t^tOD 

bt)p5  Niph.  part. 

nbpp^ornbtDpp. 

t3^btDp:3. 

nibtij 

104. 


XVII. 

Declension  ofNouis 

fs,  §§  44- 

-47. 

iv.     With  final  n,. 

(                                                                  1 

5iNG.  Al)s.    n^1''2    appearance    Const.   (1^1/2    ^^    ^^s- 

D^^sjn?? 

C'o«5^.  'ii^1)2 

n.?K   ro.d 

n?f? 

^^^R 

'? 

:i^      Masc 

tlB-i    fiiir 

V    T 

1                           1 

Fern.     nS"'              ^<^sc.  Q^S*' 

jpem.  rils^ 

V.     Segliolates. 

imot.  Ahs. 

•jb^  king 

co«5f.  tibi  Pi^  ^^-^• 

n^?b^ 

Cow5?.    ^pb/3 

*1<nd  covert 

^r>9 

tD'^'n^D 

^isiD 

'Q'^^  strength 

Dii 

^^'^?.^ 

^^5? 

b3?3  lord 

b?? 

T  : 

^??.;^ 

^1)2  death 

ni)3 

t\^i^ 

^rilTa 

1 

-^1  t;  eye 

•^-i^?   Dual. 

tDi;;:? 

n^n^? 

V-Q  foot 

^?3 

&:bp:i 

^?51 

'ifi^  ear 

it« 

•  -  :  1 

II.  Nouns  which  double  thevr  final  consonant 

5iNQ.  Abs. 

^^■T^  camel 

T    T 

Const      b'/2^     Pl.  ^&5. 

D^|i^-\ 

Co«5f.   *i|/2!l 

1 

•^^  garden 

li 

0^55 

'55 

pn  statute 

jin 

tD-ijin 

^1^.^ 

y;fi  tooth 

*:tij      DUAL- 

^'i.P 

'5??* 

:'       Masc 

'^p;:^  small 

T  -    1: 

t^T^r? 

i^e;n.  tllSpp^ 

p72^  deep 

,      ^: 

^m 

riip9?^ 

Ahs. 

'^'^133?  Hebrew 

CoMsf. 'i^ 53?  PL.  ^&5.  Q'^'^*}!n?  orCn^:^?  Co«s/.^_^np? 

Masc. 

^-itO  fresh 

1 

Fern.       n^*lLOJ^«sc 

T  •  : 

t:^^nt3 

ni^nt) 

III.  Other  7iouns  svffer  no  change. 

SiXG.  J&s.tli 

i^v"^  garment 

Const  tD^ib^PL-^&s.  d''tp>3b)2  C'o«5t  ■'tp^iSb)? 

Masc. 

init:  good 

1^6' W.      nniLO               lfrt5C. 

D^nit: 

i'6';«.  ninit) 

b 

^PP^   Iliph.  part.     HD^pp;^  or  ^bt3p)2 

d^b^pp)?    tii!)^pp5^/2 

105 


XVII. 

Decleijsion  ofNoi 

QNS,  §§  44- 

-47. 

Nouns  loith  the  feminine  ending  n^. 
i.     With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult 

Sma.  Abs.      ni'l  fish       i 

co«sf.       t\y^,  i^  ^&s. 

T 

Con.?^.     t\'\T\^ 

1 

^^P^.  vengeance 

^         i^^f?? 

ni72f;5 

ni72p? 

ri^3^  counsel 

i^??, 

mi? 

Jn^^'.i 

nsb  lip 

T      T 

tisip  ^^^^• 

t)\^|^ 

'OSb 

ii.     From  Segholates. 

Sing.  Als.    Jl^bTS  queen 

Co«5?.       tlSb^D    Pi^.  ^&5 

m'ib);  consf 

.  niDb?? 

nitliD  covert 

nnnp 

ninriD 

mSriD 

X^yi"!^  strength 

T    :   T 

iii.     All  others. 

ni72^r 

sniTa?? 

ScfG.  Abs.        ri5!«  garden 

Const.         in 5 5    PL.  Ahs 

.       £-ll55 

Const     ^i35 

n>*112J"'  salvation 

T         : 

niitri-'. 

riiiitri-' 

: 

nli?^©'^. 

Nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  n. 

SiNa.^&s.fin5P!p  observance  Cows^.  171173'©  ?2  Pi^-  ^^s-  \ 

nilTDtpTS  (^onst. 

ni-i)3©;?3 

Jnp^V  sucker 

^f?.5l' 

nipDv 

nippr 

nb!ib!i  skull 

nib5b^ 

:  :    •: 

n*^"!^^  Hebrew-woman       Sn^^i5? 

nin5? 

m'^15> 

tllibT?  kingdom 

riiDb)3 

ni'^Dbn 

\  :    - 

m>Db?2 

106 


XVIII.   PARADIGM    OF 

N. 

OUNS    WITH 

Suffixes, 

§49. 

SiNGULAE. 

heart       2tlh 

ting       ^2 

queen     n^b'J 

hand     "1^ 

T 

Const, 

-5^ 

Tlb^^ 

Jv   V 

nsb^j 

^] 

Sing.  1  c.   my 

^i?^ 

U 

'2b-q 

<( 

*?t'^ 

u 

•T 

2  m.  thy 

^=5^ 

U 

^3ba 

u 

irjnsb-j 

u 

^T 

2/.   thy 

^==^ 

u 

^^ 

U 

ir^'^ 

u 

v: 

3  m.  his 

T  I 

u 

^■2 

u 

ih^b^j 

a 

T 

3/   her 

T  T  : 

u 

Tiib-2 

T  :   — 

u 

r  T  ;   — 

a 

TT 

Plur.  1  c.   our 

^:inb 

••  T  : 

u 

'i^iVJ 

a 

^:r}?b7j 

u 

••T 

2  m.  your 

Dinib 

u 

ci=?^"J 

(( 

t3in?b"j 

u 

Gil: 

2/.   your 

(( 

"jinnb 

a 

li^i^ 

a 

1?^?^^ 

a 

15": 

3  m.  their 

u 

Diiub 

T  T  : 

(( 

uhb-2 

T  ;  — 

u 

T  T  :  — 

u 

TT 

8/.   their 

t( 

1??^ 

(( 

1?^^ 

a 

1  tt:  - 

a 

17: 

P  LTE  A  L. 

D 

UAL. 

hearts  O^i^b  kings  D^ib?^ 

queens  rfib'J 

hands  Q'^"'^ 

•   — T 

Corts^. 

-h± 

"i^'o 

niib-J 

1 

iS'iTi^.  1  c.  my 

(( 

'??^ 

u 

'5V^ 

(( 

^r^i^Db^g 

u 

—T 

2  m.  thy 

u 

T??^ 

u 

T^^-^ 

a 

I     V        :  - 

u 

I     vr 

2/.   thy 

u 

t??^ 

u 

^:^^5? 

a 

•q^-niDb^a 

n 

]'    -T 

3  m.  his 

(( 

rin^ 

a 

rDb53 

T  r    : 

u 

rhiDb-j 

T        :  — 

u 

TT 

3/   her 

u 

T       V    T  : 

4C 

n-ib-j . 

T      VT     : 

u 

n^hijb"j 

TV          ;    — 

u 

T       VT 

Plur.  1  c.   our 

(( 

^rinb 

••  T  : 

u 

^-'?^"9 

n 

^rniDb-^ 

u 

••T 

2  m.  your 

a 

^5'??^ 

(( 

l^b'^b^ 

u 

Di-nS^b-j 

u 

03'": 

2/.   your 

(( 

u 

15'?^'^ 

u 

-i-r±b^ 

u 

"5"T 

3  w.  their 

(( 

nn-2b 

(( 

^^"^)'^ 

u 

D'H-ri^b-j 

u 

^ti'T 

3/.   their 

u 

iri^nnb 

)  V      ••   :  • 

(( 

l^}'5r^ 

(( 

u 

17-r 

107 


XIX.     Numerals, 

§65. 

Cardinals. 

Masculine. 

Feminine 

Ahsol. 

Constr. 

Absol. 

Consi'^ 

One 

T    V 

"17% 

th^ 

nn^ 

Two 

D^y^ 

^5^ 

D:ritj 

'^■■? 

Three 

T 

tb^J 

Four 

T  T  :  — 

^5?"^^ 

^'57^ 

^'?T^ 

Five 

r^fcn 

••    T 

'uj12T] 

Six 

T      • 

... .. 

•iriij 

iziD 

Seven 

T   :    • 

n?2"u3 

—    V 

ri"9 

Eiglit 

npa 

ni'M 

: 

nbb^ 

Nine 

nJBFi 

t^.^irn 

T^r\ 

rtiri 

Ten 

^nm 

'^t?^? 

^m 

SiDi? 

Eleven 

1  -^^ 

••    :  V 

Twelve 

•    ;  V 

DTrd 

Thirteen 

T    T 

mILvo!) 

T       : 

fnw 

"    :  V 

tbiij 

Fourteen 

T   T 

T  T  :  — 

.. . ._. 

i^'i^H 

Fifteen 

T   T 

T   •  -: 

.. . ... 

^'^^n 

Sixteen 

T  T 

rn^-d 

»^:]'^'? 

irii: 

Seventeen 

T  r 

T   :    • 

ri'^ 

Eighteen 

T   T 

nibiz: 

T        : 

..     .  ... 

nibii 

Nineteen 

^^? 

..    .  ... 

—  : 

Twenty 

n^nit)2?     J 

5ixty             U^m 

One  hundred 

n^*^ 

Thirty 

D'^fcbp       { 

Seventy      D^'i'^iJ? 

Two  hundred 

D^nj^^ 

Forty 

D^i^Sn^        Eighty         D^bbll' 

One  thousand 

5^bi 

Fifty 

D'lfen        Ninety        D^'i^tpH 

Ten  thousand 

iiisn 

Ordinals. 

First 

liicxn           ] 

Fifth       'iTiJ^tin 

Eighth        ^'ri2T» 

Second 

^iw 

Sixth           '^m 

Ninth        *'iiT»n 

Third 

Ittj-*!?!^               i 

Seventh    ■'i?'^!© 

Tenth       '^n'^to^ 

Fourth 

^i'^nT 

- 

108 


XX.      Consecution  of  Accents,  ^  20. 


Primary 

Sections. 

So 

m 
ft 

o 
o 

So 
ft 

'I'i 

w 

O 

D 
!i? 

C 

o 

ft 

O 

8 

cr.O 

ft 

> 

b 

*. 

V 

\ 

.(..) 

V 

,o\S 

,T) 

Xk.l 

A 

J 

A 

..(.) 

CO 

jjiS 

Secokdary 
Skctions. 

• 

.J  J 

L)  <C)\.)' 

U 

• 

Js)J,) 



H 

J 

^ 

UNPSrAL 

Sections. 

1 

1 

^p 

y  J  .J  J  J  J 

The  accents  in  parenthesis  are  liable  to  Ue  substituted  for  those  that  pre- 
cede them.  Thus  iu  the  train  of  Sillnlc  or  Athnahh  occupying  the  upper 
horizontal  line  of  the  table,  if  T'bhir  is  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
be  Darga  or  Merka ;  if  by  two,  the  second  will  be  Kadhraa  or  Munahh  ;  if 
by  three,  the  third  Avill  be  T'liblia  K'tanua. 

109 


LESSONS   IN   READING   HEBREW. 


1.  The  Pkefixed  Particles,  §§  24-28. 

In  the  earlier  reading-  lessons  the  accents  will  be  but  sparingly  employed.  The 
tone  syllable  will  be  marked  when  it  is  not  the  ultimate ;  and  an  occasional  disjunc- 
tive will  be  inserted  when  it  is  needed  as  a  sign  of  interpunction  or  to  account  for 
a  pausal  form,  §  19. 

•  T  -  :  -    -T    -  :  V    .•   -  •    IT  T    -     J   •  vv  :  '    •/ 

^^a^    :  n'lga    "lir'n'i   nnSn    njpins   '-itoni   nr6     :  npn  ^?    nnf^-a 
:nb^>a  -ii«b  D^^nDiDi  n^^  ni^s  ni^^b  tj^i    :nni?b 


2.  The  Peesoi^al  Peonouns,  §  29. 

Remaek  1.  Tlie  predicate  of  a  sentence  may  be  directly 
connected  with  its  subject  without  the  verb  to  he,  which 
must  be  supplied  in  English,  nin^  m^  thou  (art)  JeJio- 
vali;  or  the  pronoun  ^T\  of  the  third  person  may  be  used 
as  a  copula  instead  of  the  verb  to  he,  which  must  be  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  translating,  D'Ti'bx  x^n  T\p^  tlioii  art  God, 
see  §  67. 

2.  Property  or  possession  is  denoted  by  the  prep,  b  to, 
helonging  to,  e.  g.  ^^^T}  ^^'n^b  the  earth  (helongs)  to  Jeho- 
vah, is  JehovaKs,  51?  ?n  ''b  the  silver  is  mine. 

3.  The  preposition  X^  is  repeated  before  both  the  ob- 
jects, between  which  the  interval  is  indicated  ^pn^  ^1*% 
hetween  me  and  thee. 


112  LESSONS    m    READING    HEBREW. 

^irn      :  d;^^!?^  D''n*bjj{:  s^-^n  nrii^  &5'bn     :  f  n^*n-b^  nn>c-i  c'-bm 
cnbi^   nnnn     j  nnjn    "^bi    vjosn    ^b     :  on   -^b   nni?n     :  n^  osb 

:  Dbbb  ^nn  nis?  b^nic^i  -pn^  ^rn     ;  ^p::^ 


3.  Other  Pronouns.     §  30. 

Remark  4.  When  a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  joined  to 
a  noun  as  an  attributive,  it  follows  the  noun  and  both 
receive  the  definite  article,  e.  g.  i^^.r^  Di'^n  this  da?/,  Di^n 
i^^nn  that  day.  When  it  is  used  as  a  predicate,  the  de- 
monstrative stands  first  and  is  without  the  article  Di^n  nr 
this  is  the  day,  §  71.  1. 

jn-Tn  nvn  "i:?  :  K^nn  nip^n  \  n^sn  "nJjs^-bj  :  ib-nt^s-bDi  ii^n 
'^pa  niN*  Tm  \  CDb   ntcjj^:   'j^^xn   ns^r  :  rnn  n^ibi    nb^-tn   fn^^b 
"i^a  :  nin;^  ^)2  :  fnjkn-bDn  "^r^is  "j^i^  :  fi^^n-b^?  ^".i?s*  ^m-bs  i^^ii 
"i^b  :  nb^5   r.^n  ra  :  T]i)23   ^^  :  nbx   ^xi  \  nns*  ^^  :  D;^i2i^s   ^^b 

D^iaa  niTi^i  nnma  rns^a  nizj&^i  b5?i2^  a^-am  ^'tTi?  :  rnn  i<^n  ^i:)^ 

•     -    -  V    -:-  -  AT     •        I     V    T    T  •.•-:-  _     -     .  .      _    ,.    _  ....  T  V    -: 

:  ^^b-nTrii-bDi  'isic  ^b  \  r■^^{b  nnn^a 

V    -:  T  :  •    -:  '  ;  J     v    t  t  -     -     . 


4.  Perfect  Verbs.     Kal  Preterite  and 
Infinitives.     §  33. 

The  verbal  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements  ; 
thus  nnV::]?  ye  (m.)  killed  is  composed  of  '^'4'^  the  ground  form  of  the  Kal  pret. 
and  Cn  shortened  from  the  2  m,  pi.  pron.  cnx . 

Analyze  and  translate  : — ■ 

nbtj;?   j^Db-Gp   ,bit:p    ,bt2p   ,ribiop     ,^bt:p    ,!^^^5    ,  t!nbt:p 

.  "inbiop  ,  irib-jp  J  bbp 


LESSORS    IN    READING    HEBREW.  113 

Remark  5.  Both  forms  of  tlie  infinitive  may  be  used 
alone ;  but  the  construct  only  is  employed  with  j^reposi 
tions,  §  81.  2,  thusbfeb,  Vir'rin  not  biMb,  bim^  . 

-npn^  ^    :  ^i.^o  nb^rrri?     :  riirnb    n^ni    nin  "i'^to  nb^5  T\)r^^ 
^ci?  ib  in:     :  n^^^-an-n^  ^s^m'-bib     :  tj^  ^pnn     :  pn^  era     :  f^3 
n:DT^  tnirrib  ns'ij  fnkn  nrntj      tn?   nbirr^'-i^b     jnbrb  n^bsn 
"n^5  nnn-a^r     5!^b^{n  D"^b2n-bs   b^_    J?p2£;'i    nb'^n   r\-^:D     :r™n 
nsiL^n-ni?  t:r\"i)2T2J    pntnb  p^iij   :  nn^ian-bs-ns  "ibir    :n-Tri  Dvn 

:DDb  a^^T}  tjip  "13 

^  pn'n  is  followed  by  3  ,  the  usual  Hebrew  phrase  being-  to  cleave  or  adhere  in, 
where  the  English  idiona  requires  to  cleave  to.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  in  3j 
^  13.  4. 

^  bd'a  is  also  followed  by  2  j   where  our  idiom  requires  to  rule  over. 


5.       XiPHAL,      PlEL,     AND     PuAL    PRETERITES    AND    INFINI- 
TIVES,   §  34. 

A  figure  following  a  verbal  form  indicates  the  number  of  times  it  is  to  be  found 
in  the  paradigm. 

Analyze  and  translate  :— 

j'inb-jpD   j^bt:;??    jl^r"^!??    j^r"^)??   ?^-r"^fr?   7^^"^!??   ^^^^I?? 

.  t)3nbt:p5  ,  b-jpp  ,  biii;^n 

,nbDp    ,Dr)bDp    ,bt3p  j'l^btop  ,  nbfop  ,  nbiDp  , '^nbf^p  , '^nbtop 
,)nbiD|j   ,^b:pp   ,  nb^i?   ,  n^icp   ,^DbDp  ,(2)  b^p  ,iP,bi^p  ,  ^bipp 

.  DpbDp  ,  nbtop 

Remark  6.  The  sign  of  the  definite  object  lni5  becomes 
nij?  before  grave  suffixes  and  ^ii<  before  light  suffixes, 
§  06.  3,  thus  ''nii5 ,  DDnij ;  with  the  3  m.  s.  suffix  it  is  'ini^, 
with  3  f.  s.  nnb5 ,  §  29.  4. 

DDi  ^r?"»i?^P?:i  Dsn^^  ''ris^ip     :DD^:sb  )'"\kr\  ntjiaD?    nb^np  ^b 
-n^?  ^htb  ^TS^p  TObsj-njj     jn^'i-bs  ^5d    :nin;'  '^?^"^?  tin:^^'^:! 


114  lessons  in  eeading  hebeew. 

6.  The  Kemaining  Peeterites  and  Infinitives.     §  35. 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

^'btapnn  ,'^nbto):nn  ,  inbtopn ,  nb:b;:n  ,nb^bfpn,^3bt:;pn,Dnbt:f:n 
,  ^fepnn  ,  (2)  btopn  ,  b^-jj^n  ,  '^nbisjpn  ,  ^b-jppn  ,  nbibpn  ,  nbipj^n 

.(2)  btb]:nn  ,  b^t:jpn  ,bt:fpn 

Kemaek  7.  Tlie  absolute  infinitive  is  often  joined  with 
tlie  finite  tenses  of  the  verb  for  the  sake  of  emphasis, 
thus  '^r?TJ?^j?n  T^^pn  consecrating  I  have  consecrated^  i.  e. 
I  have  certainly  or  entirely  consecrated, 

tj'i'ipn  mcs!  nn-Tnn  vicln-as?  nin^b  ^^y\  tjbisn  t^'^^px)  nni5-D5 
^psn-n^i?    ^np^pn    c'^pn    :  ^tj^pnn-&5*b   t  ©as    -iicn:    D^i5n-b|)2 

tjb^n  :ib  DDnx  i^^ipnb  nDni<  D-'n'bN:^  b^^nn-^^D  t^y^an^  :nDxb^n-n5; 
nn'^npn'i    DDn&5    nb^ir^    n^^nn-nij    DDn    'innb'cn  ^    :  niDbian-b:? 

'   See  §  26. 

^  Pliiral  in  form  but  singular  in  sense,  and  therefore  taking  a  singular  verb, 
§  85.  3. 

2  Followed  by  the  prep.  3  in  the  sense  of  sending  upon  or 


7.  Kal  Futuee,  Impeeative  and  Paeticiples.     §  36. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,*i:pn  ,biDpij  ,  (2)  njV-jpn  ,bbp:'  ,br3p3  ,  (2)  bibpn  j^btpp-^ 

.  ^bpp  ,  brjp  ,  n:bi:p  ^  bt:p  ,  bbp  ,  ^ii:p  ,  '^bippp 

Remaek  8.  The  article  before  a  participle  must  some- 
times be  rendered  in  English  by  the  relative  pronoun, 
e.  g.  "i^'i^n  the  (one)  'keeping  or  (he)  '^^;7^(9  is  Iceeping. 


LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW.  115 

9.  When  the  sign  of  the  definite  object  precedes  the 
relative,  it  belongs  not  to  it  but  to  its  antecedent  under- 
stood, see  §  30.  3 ;  hence  ^ti^^  riii  means  not  whom  ox 
wliicli^  but  Mm  lolio  or  what  equivalent  to  that  %ohich, 

:  nni"!  mrx  nx  nbiz?  nir^  npyi  nrs©;^  iib  nb;"bi  ni"^  :^nznrri 
J  'ji'^223  iDWn  nin^  :  p'^i^n  15b"  nin;»  :  n^i-Tn  niar^n-bs-r.i?  ^brn 

\*^it  ^t^V\  iDDn  birJ'a^  nin^  oin  '^rii:  b'Mij-i^'b  : bjj^'iirj^'n  n-'b-r^ 

jn'b^nsn  njirabn  1? 


8.  NiPHAL,  PlEL  AND  PuAL  FuTUEES,  ETC.   §  37. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

.  (2)  njbtjj^n  ,  btjga  ,  '^btpgn  ,  ^bi:;^;!  ,  ^'^91?.^  ,  ^t?!?? 

.  ^btfjpn  ,  'ibtDg  ,  ^brop  ,  bto;:^  ,  biDjp^  ,  (2)  bipj^n 

Remark  10.  The  infinitive  with  or  without  the  prepo- 
sition b  maybe  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  as  ^i^'tpj^nb  T^b  K'b 
if6>  Z'?^^^7^  incense  belongs  not  to  thee  or  it  is  not  for  thee  to 
hum  incense. 

11.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  pronoun  may  often 
be  omitted,  thus  "i©i!|  i^^n  he  is  the  one  who  or  that  is 
the  thing  which. 

np^i'-D!?  "i^"!^"]?  Tjb  wjn  :Tt:pnb  D'^TC^ptin  D^rnbb  ''s  nirr^b 


116  LEsso:Nrs  ik  reading  Hebrew. 

9    (3^.    HlPHIL^    HOPHAL,     AND     HiTHPAEL     FuTURES,     ETC. 

§  38. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

,(2)  r.sbb^nn ,  btD;:n:^  ,(2)  b^tapn ,  ^^^ippri ,  b-j;:^  ,  b^t:p2 ,  ^^l^t^t? 

Dro      :ri£'^    ^'""^b^    D^^P^I^r?     •D':^?l"1''3    onb    DDb  Tp^12  ^pfi5 
n^x    T<2     ld:'^y   ^v   n-7n   n^sn   u^-q   nch    rr^npn-i^b     nb^sirn 
"bs   n55    nri^   n'^nt-rn     tnin^'b   nbs:'  ^^''^pri    i^'b      :bj<ni^^"bs 

••   :  •  »T  T    :    -  T    :  IT        •  a  v    -  >      t    -  •.•  :  -   ■:  •     •     :    -  •    "    :    _ 

i  nin"« 

T       : 

9  I).  The  Entire  Paradigm  of  b-jp. 

The  figures  denote,  as  before,  the  number  of  places  in  the  paradigm  repre- 
sented by  the  preceding  form. 

Supply  tlie  vowels  and  translate  : — 

,(2)  •ibt:pn  ,  Dnbt:p5  ,(2)  riDbL^p  ,(5)  '^bT:pjn  ,(3)  ^nb-jp 
,  (2)  brjp  ,  (2)  rhi2pt^T\  ,  nDbL^nn  ,  isVjpnn  ,  b^^pi  ,  (4)  nbt:pn 
^(4)  bt:pnn  ,bi:pn-i  ,(8)  bt:pn  ,(2)  Dnbt:pn  ,b^t:pi5  ,  nb-jpn 
,(10)b-jpn  ,(3)  i:bt2p  ,(12)  n-:bt2pn  ,^bt3pn  ,nbvjpn  ,^bvjp. 
(2)  bt:pnn  ,b^r)p3  ,  nbt:pnn  ,(2)  ibvt:pn  ,  (3)  b-jp-a 
'(5)  bi:pi^  ,(5)  ^b-jp  ,  nb-jp:  ,(2)  b^^-jpn  ,b-^-jp^  ,nbt:pnn 
,^b^t:pn  ,bi:pnia  ,bt2pn:  ,(5)  nb-jpn  ,(2)  r,bt:p5  ,  ^b-^tpn  ,b'jprii5 
X7)bi:p3  ,(5)b-^p"^  ,  (3)^nbi:p  ,  ib-jps  ,  (2)  n:bt:pn  ,.Dnb-jpnn 
,(2)  ^bt:p  ,"^nbt:pD  ,(2)  n:bi:pn  ,(2)  lb-jpnn  ,(2)  n-b-jprn 
,(2)  "jnb-jpn       ^'^b^-jpn     ,(5)    ib-jp^     ,(6)    nbt)p     ,inb-jp: 


LESSOTis  IN  readi:n^g  hebeew.  117 

,(3)  snbL^p  ,(2)  '^J^'=--P^  ,  ^:^t:p  ,(3)  rhzp  ,(li)  bt2p  ,^b-jp^."^ 
. -"bLjpnn  jinb-jpnn  ,(2)  b-^-jpn  ,ib-jpnn  ,-inbi:pnn 

10.  Paragogic   Ais-D   Apocopated   Future  ais^d  Impera- 
tive AND  Vav  Conversive,  §§  40,  41. 

Eemark  12.  Wlien  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  preterite  or  by  any  expression  referring  tc 
past  time,  it  is  to  be  translated  as  a  preterite.  And 
a  preterite  with  Yav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future, 
an  imperative  or  any  expression  indicating  future  time,  is 

to  be  translated  as  a  future,  8  79. 
♦    .     .  .  . 

13.  i^b  is  the  simple   negative;     b«    is   used   with  the 

future,  which  takes  the  a2)ocopated  form  if  it  has  one,  to 

express  the  negative  imperative  "T^scn  i?*b  tJum  slialt  not 

deliver^  "^5cp  b^  deliver  not. 

a^njn    nsb^n    nbisni    npyr    p3?T;^i    -l£^J1    piij    t'^^^    ib   "itwS* 
ntn^^T  nbxn  D;^i5n-nx  nin;^  J^"^"?^^  ;b:np  i5"bn  ^D■^^^-^x   ilj'':nbnb 

ITOrrrs    nnpbn  nrnin-n^  pnx-ns^  i^'^^sbni  o-'-ij^n-nx  nnpbn 
nin-"!::?  I'lp     ::?n  ^riS'  l^iCL'p-bi^     tinb^  r;^n^"'2^*  t'jj^nn  br  np:^,';i 


1 1.  Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fern.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre- 
terite. 

The  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements,  and 
their  separate  equivalents  stated;  thus  i'lfp?  he  killed  him  is  composed  of  il^j^ 
3  masc.   sing.  pret.    and  i  for  Jin     suffix  of  3  masc.  sing-,  with  vowel  of  union 


118  LESSORS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

(^),   and  is  equivalent  to    irk  ^'^7;',  '^^'r'-^P.   ^^^  killed  her  is  for   hlni:::j!?  ^ 
which  is  composed  of  n!:::p   3  fem.  sing.  pret. ,  whose  termination  becomes  n 
before  sufl&xes,  and  n  suffix  of  3  fem.  sing.,  and  is  equivalent  to   nrk  nb'-p  . 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,^nrj]5   ,i2^i:p   /nSt:]p   ,  ?]bt2;^   ,'j5bt:;p   ,dSi:]?   ,^3b'-jp  ,  fep 

.Dibt:j:   ,  •jbtpp   ,  ?J?i:p 

,  in^Djp   jdinbt:]^  ,intep  ,^5ribr)j5  ,^n^"^p  ,i='n5i:p  ,!inbt:p 

.^nnb^p  ?1?^^?!?  j^?ri^"^i?  j^^^^P 

6.  Tlie  rest  of  tlie  Kal  Preterite. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

,  tj^.b-jp    ,  Dibup    ,  "^Sibtjp    ,  ^Dfep     ,  'j^bt:p    ,  0^'^^P     ?  ^ribgip 
,D5^:bt:p    j^n^:bt:p   ,n^:bt:p   ,^^:bt:p   ,^^b'i:p   ,  oi^bt^p  ,'ji^bt:p 

.  n^:bt:p 

,  D'lnb-jp   ,  (2)    n^nbt:p   ,  "nT^^p   ,  ^-^rir^p  ,  ^^^r^bpp  ,  ipbt:p 
,(2)  I'^pbcp   ,(2)  n'^nbtop    ,  ''?''ribT:p   ,  ^?^nbt:p   ,  "?r)bt:p    ,  nnbpp 
,  ?^^ribi:p,    ^?^ribt:p    ,  ^rnb-jp    ,  ^:nbpp  ^  inbiip    ,  lir\bi:p  ,  tj-^nbt:p 
.  'j^'^nbrip  J  D5^ribt:p   ,  (2)  "'^n^ribt:p,   (2)  r^^ribT:p   ,  ^n^nb-jp 

*  This  form  belongs  to  the  first  person  of  the  preterite  as  well  as  to  the  second 
feminine,  although  for  the  sake  of  brevity  it  is  not  repeated  in  the  paradigm. 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hipliil  Preterites. 

"Remark  14.  When  a  verb  is  doubly  transitive,  either 
object  if  a  pronoun  may  be  ^suffixed  to  the  verb,  thus 
i^-itppn  means  either  lie  caused  Mm  to  Mil  or  lie  caused 
to  Mil  Mm;  nbro  Drn?:nbn  tlimi  hast  caused  tliem  to  put 
on  tunics^  but  "ij^bs-nij  Drnc^bn  thou  hast  caused  JEleazar 
to  jput  them  on. 


LESSONS    m    KEADmG    HEBREW.  119 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

jinb-jpn  ,  (2)  ^I'^rib-jpn  ,  nri'b-i-jpn  ,  Tjibb-jjpn  ,  in^b^ppn 

,  li^nbtDp  ,  nnbrpp  ,  nnbipp  ,  D?f;^btpp  ,  D^:b^p  ,  I^J^bipp  ,  ^rbipp 

.  (2)  n^pbi^p  ,  Dfep 

.  tfnairn  ,  Dnnirn  ,  (2)  vnipn  ,  T^^^nnDn 

r,5«  )m  onb  ^sp;i'i    tnsb  ib^  ''^^"I'a  ?^f7pbi  ds*i  nx  rnb  i-^x 
'^n'li'i  "itpN   bbp  ^'^nni2Tri  tjia::?  ^2:55  nrn     j  ^b^Gn  ib^5  ntjxHs 
d-rnbi  D'lTsn  y-ni;!  irnb;!  D^Ton   :  -rbpci    n^^ri'i    nyn   irin'iiD   :  l\b 
'i^nrsbn   :  d^tgh  '^:i^-'pbn  :  iiTvp^i  H^T^Tb?  10?"^  ^v^^  1^  '^P^^ 
\Dnx  nns^  "I'lrsp  ^  ?]b  orb'^nn  npi?  :  ^nnjy-^snn  mnbii^n  :  nrnsn 

'    T^  himself^  there  being  no  reflexive  pronouns  in  Hebrew,  the  personal  pro- 
nouns may  be  used  with  a  reflexive  sense. 

2  Used  adverbially,  hoio.  ^  See  §  29.  3.  *  §  See  23.  3. 


12.     Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes, 

§  43 
a,  Kal  Future. 

Remark  15.  Those  forms  in  the  Kal  future  o  which 
end  with  the  last  radical  follow  the  analogy  of  bbp;i . 

In  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  a  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical  is  not  liable  to  rejection,  but  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  before  all  the  suffixes  except  the  2  pers.  plur. 
where  Pattahh  is  retained,  e.  g.  '^^nbiT'i  not  '^pnbT?'?  from 
nbti7 ,  and  "^rnbir^  from  nbir . 

1(3.  Those,  forms  in  the  various  futures  and  imperatives 
which  have  personal  endings  undergo  no  change  befoie 
suffixes,  exce})t  in  the  fem.  plur.  as  stated  in  §  42.  2. 


120  LESSOIs^S    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,(2)  "^prjpn  ,  (2)  v'^-:pn  ,Tibt:pn  ,(4)^'rjpn  ,  D!?i:pp  , '^''''r upJ;? 

.  (2)  ^:^t2f?ri  ,  ^Vjpp  ,  ?^3^"9pD  ,  tfp'jpi?  ,  QDb-jpj; 

.  Ti^y^pn  ,  (3)  ^n^Stppn^  ,  '^rJ'"^!?^?  ,  ^'^'^^^   ,  '^P^^^l?:'  ,  r?^'^"9P:^ 

1  See  §  42.  2. 

•Q-^.-ja-rn    nin^-nr.^    :  ninp^i    J"'''?b"©2    bsn^^i    :  un-ro^^i    ri^I^H 
v^b  -^sbxi  njniir^  "b^'"25   rnj   n^r^   b^:?n   ni|^^   nsirnn   :  nbis^b 

-  :  T  -   ■•  AT         T    ■  '  :    T     :   •  t       :  •.    t     :  •  -  ■     :  -  -  '   ••  t    .    v 

:pt}B^a  ntD'^n^  ^bi3n-b«  nnbi2?'^i  nn-riT  cicin-bs-n^  npb   i  nbi:? 

^   Translate  the  future  with  vav  conversive  in  these  and  subsequent  exercises 
iis  though  a  preterite  preceded. 
'   See  Remark  7. 

h.  Piel  and  Hipliil  Futures. 

Eemark  17.  In  those  forms  of  the  Piel  future^  which 
end  with  the  last  radical,  Tsere  is  shortened  or  rejected 
l^efore  suffixes  as  in  the  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Piel  preterite. 

18.  Tsere  in  the  Hiphil  apocopated  future,  future  with 
Vav  Conversive,  and  imperative  becomes  Hhirik  before 
suffixes,  e.  g.  nnir'ri-bi?  destroy  notj  ^nn^nti'n-b^  destroy  him 
(or  it^  not. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

J  ^bbDpjj^    ,  ■jbipp;^    ,  ^:"'3i3pn    ,  ^^fep;'    ,  (2)  tsbtppn    ,  Dbb^ps 

.  nb-^rjpi?  ,  ^T^^-^T-  ?  ^!?''^!?-  ?  (4)  '^^^V^V^  ,  (3)  Q^b-^pp 
j-iDb'^i^    D^^b^^nn-rji?   ^mn-i   nsuj'sbs^   ^9^^   r,:n2n-nx   "^ntpir's 


LESSOjS^S    in   EEADIN'G    HEBREW.  121 

J  f n^rrb^:;   ^rh^rnvj^    ^rnipi^^n   nnrn    tod"i    ^i^^rn  ^3   ir^rs-n/^ 
^nirsb^    ttjuJ-^sbx;)    a^i^s    ^s^n^xj    :  b^niiJ^'-b:;?  ^ro^bt)::^  ir.y;    npb 

(".  Infinitive  and  Im23erative. 

Remark  19.  The  suffix  of  the  1  pers.  sing,  is  httaehecl 
to  the  infinitive  in  two  forms,  ^ .  exj)ressing  the  subject 
of  the  verb  "'^ifp  m^  hilling  and  *>?  its  object  "'pbipp  to  hill 
me.  The  remaining  persons  have  but  one  form,  which  is 
used  indifferently  for  the  subject  or  the  object,  '^f'^I?  thy 
hilling  or  to  hill  tliee^  ^^'^^T\  thy  causing  to  hill^  to  cause 
thee  to  hill  or  to  cause  to  hill  thee. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — • 

,  tfpipj  ,  ^nbb;^ ,  •'pDip  ,  nbb)^  ,(2)  ^ibtp;^  ,  abipj^  ,  obtpip  ,  OD^jp 
.  ^:^bt?p  ,  ^rnbtpp  ,  ]Db-jp  ,  T^b-^jp  ,  ib-jjp  ,  nbbp  ,  ^b-jjp   ,  (2)  ^pbi:^ 

jD^brap    ,Dbi2p   ,Dbtf)j:?    ,  tiibDp    ,  ^:^"%p    ,  ?^bbp    ,(2) ''bpp^ 
j^n^ib-'ippn  ,  nibitppn   ,  (2)  ^:b'^i:)pn   ,J7-i^Pp   ,v^i?i?   ,  (2)  ^2brop 

^   Of  the  two  forms  here  represented  one  has  a  suffix,  the  other  has  not. 
^  Notice  the  position  of  the  accent. 

,(2)''nbt?  ,^nbTij  ,^nbio  ,^3nbii3  ,nnt)55  ,^^"1)95^  -i^^^^  ?''"^^^ 
,(2)'^?"]^T»  jinbt?  ,Dnb'>r  ,?^nbT?  ,(2)  lanb©  ,''?nbTr  ,(2)'':nbTD 

.  inriis  ,  "r^yit  ,  t^"i12©  ,  "drat  ,  DiiaT? 

Kemark  20.  The  copulative  "i  is  sometimes  employed  in 
Hebrew  to  connect  an  action  with  the  time  of  its  occur- 
rence, where  no  connective  is  required  in  English.  In 
such  cases  we  may  use  then  a.s  its  equivalent  or  better 
still  leave  it  untranslated.     Thus  in  my  gathering  Israel 

6 


122  LESSONS  US'  keading  hebrew 

Di  '^nTtHj:?'!  then  shall  I  he  sanctified  in  them  or  luhen  I 
gather  Israel^  I  shall,,  etc.,  §  89.  2  (2). 

^TLnj^nn^  nin;!  ''?2?"''3  Q^'i^n  ^5?7;i  on  '^ntjtpPI  ^  ts^^isn-'j'a  bs'ito;' 
^:sb    n^tpjpnb    'i^"'^'ijpnb.   fnnj^  b'ln^^n     :  iiij^pb  ini^  r\'tl2'^^  :  oin 

^  The  initial  aspirate  has  Daghesh-lene  as  though  the  preceding  word  were 
^px  §  23.  3. 

^  The  accent  would  be  thrown  upon  the  ultimate  by  Vav  Conversive,  §  17.  6, 
but  for  the  following  monosyllable,  §  18. 


13.  GEi>rDER  AND  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 

Kemark  21.  Attributive  or  qualifying  adjectives  fol- 
low the  noun  to  whicli  tliey  belong,  and  agree  with  it  not 
only  in  gender  and  number  but  also  in  definiteness,  that 
is  to  say,  they  receive  the  article  if  the  noun  is  definite, 
nS™  inx  a  great  stone^  J^^i^J^i^!  15^0  the  great  stone^  §  70.  2. 

22.  When  a  demonstrative  and  an  adjective  qualify 
the  same  noun  the  demonstrative  stands  last  inib^^n  jnhi^n 
•"'^•7  these  great  signs^  §  71.  2. 

23.  Predicate  adjectives  do  not  receive  the  article  even 
though  the  noun  is  definite ;  their  usual  place  is  before 
tlie  noun,  but  they  may  also  stand  after  it  l^ifri  ribi";5  or 
nbin^  inxn  the  stone  is  great^  §  70.  3. 

24.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  the  preposition  IP 
§  72.  1,  ^i2ti  r^l^^r^  t|nini5  thy  sister  young  from  thee^  i.  e. 
younger  than  thou;  ^i?^  bis^  I  will  he  greater  than  thou. 

nan^  jD-'bii^   d^Db"^^  D^n'i  n^'is  jniij^n  fn^j^  D^^^n  'o^ht 
n^nbn  D-^p^^nn  \r\ii:hn  n^bia  ns^nn-b?  nb^^  ^nxni  trim  "i&53 


LESSONS    IN    READING     HEBREW.  123 

"inn  n-a-b:^-  \^q)  nb^^n  D"ob^n-bs  ni5  jbi^np^^b  tjb>3-!jb73  ^:sb 
Dn"^by  tj-ibTiJn  nin"ij  :nsTn  nbii^tn  nynn-bs  nx  ^rb:^"  nin;> 
"^^^  '^^  lO'-  '^3"0  "^^'^    nniion   fi^fn  :  n'p'bt-n-jia  nib^s  n-^pnst 

i^yn-i-a  nb™  i<^ni   liyn.^  r.bi-;a 

'   Vowel  of  the  noun  assimilated  to  the  preceding  Kamets  as  after  the  article, 
§  25.  3.  a. 

^   Upon  wJiat  ground,  i.  e.  for  what  reason^  why, 
^   JJlJon  us  or  against  us. 


14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Eemark  25.  Nouns  in  the  construct  before  a  definite 
noun  (including  proper  nouns)  are  themselves  definite, 
§  ()9.  1,  nipi2  a  place ^  but  p"^ijn  D^^  the  place  of  the  arh; 
nin^  "jinx  the  arh  (not  an  arh)  of  Jehovah, 

26.  Nouns  in  the  construct  state  do  not  receive  the 
article ;  they  are  rendered  definite  by  prefixing  the  article 
to  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  5,  D'^n'bi<  t[?>i<  a  man  of  God^ 
n^nbi^n  TiJ"^i5  tlic  man  of  God. 

•::    IT  •  t/ 

27.  Adjectives  or  demonstratives  qualifying  a  noun  in 
the  construct  state  do  not  follow  it  immediately,  but  are 
placed  after  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  4,  bii^n  n'in^  ai'' 
i<ni3n"i  tlie  great  and  dreadful  day  of  Jehovah. 

28.  When  the  subject  consists  of  t^vo  or  more  nouns  in 
tlie  singular  connected  by  the  conjunction  arid^  the  predi- 
cate is  commonly  ^\\i  in  the  singular  if  it  precedes  the 
suliject,  and  in  tlie  plural  if  it  follows,  §  86. 

n^n  ^bs  bb  J  n;^"n';i  n^nsi  lin^j;  :  bs,y^^  -^n'bx  liix  :  D^'ninsn  ^S23 
^•52tn  D"»'bi-n  nin-^b  ]t\  :D;^72"rn  -^nDis  :  n^^rji^jn-i  n-ibn^n  n^n'bxn 
'ii-inrn  :  lirs?  ^^-j  D''Vni  -ypv^  bp  bpn  \  ns-iTTifi-bDi  ynxn  D'^turn 

^^tn  ^^>'^^    •P^r'   "^^^^  ^"^^  °?"'^?  "'P^P'^^?!  nnx  jnnis^n  n^n 
nb^s^n  r;in;'-ni5  ^n3t3^;i  :  n^mrbs  n^ri^^a  -ji^  ic;'  :  f ixn  ^'Dbia  b^^ 


124  LESSONS    IT^T    READIXG    HEBREW. 

'^)2'^)2  ^  bb)2  pte'^  ni-'.rij  "is^s^  nrniJ:  ni-j  i^bn  i  Dili?:.  i]bh  t^  uir'^ 

•^-ip  n:^x  23.  1. 
^   The  construct  of  c^i  ,  a  reduplication  of  the  more  usual  form  i^. 

15.  !N"ou]s-s  WITH  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Eemaek  29.  The  iDrej^ositions  "inj«  after,  "-«  to,  ^^ 
iipon  and  a  feAv  others  take  the  suffixes  belonging  to 
plural  nouns,  §  ^^,  2,  e.  g.  ■'"in&5  not  ''"in^  i//^^?'  me, 

30.  The  article  before  Di^  day  limits  it  to  the  present, 
that  which  is  now  passing,  Di^n  to-day,  §  68.  3. 

DJ??'j'''3  T°^^0"^l  TTV^  Qi'^'H  "^"i"  ''^^^  ^Tp}  •  ^^5^0  3T*'?^?"'i''2  Q"'?"'^ 
D^iniion  D'^nn^n  bb)2  "in^  "in-  bsj  i^b  -^^  DD-rsr-?^^  DDnsb-bD3 

^  3.":2ll5  niay  take  a  direct  object,  or  as  in  this  instance  be  followed  by  s 
2  See  Lesson  4,  note  1 ;  also  §  39.  3.  »  §  30.  33. 

*  The  3  plur.  suf.  with  fern.  plur.  nouns  may  be  either  d     or  crr^ 
°  Upon  the  subject  of,  concerning. 

16.  Pe   Guttural   Veebs,  §  53. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  per- 
fect verb  btjp  : — 

J  ^pTnn  ,  (2)  n'-a?  ,  Yi2^;5j.  ,  n^ay?  ,  r'^rr\  ,(2)  "irs^n  ,  dp^i?? 

.  bi^  ,  ^b3i?r\   ,  roprnn  ,  prn^i 


LESSOXS    IN    READING    HEBREW.  125 

Kemark  31.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  nouns  in 
the  rehition  of  the  construct  state,  the  predicate  commonly 
agrees  with  the  first  as  the  principal  noun ;  but  it  may 
agree  with  the  second  if  this  conveys  the  main  idea.  The 
latter  is  almost  always  the  case  when  the  first  noun  is 
b'D ,  e.  g.  D^isn-bD  li^ri.^  all  the  tvaters  shall  he  turned, 

32.  If  a  predicate  refers  to  two  words  of  different 
persons  it  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to  the 
third,  and  in  the  first  in  j)ref  erence  to  either  of  the  others. 
§  86.  3. 

33.  Nouns  are  sometimes  |)ut  in  the  construct  state 
before  a  following  clause,  §  75.  3,  as  "iiffill  Dip^  the  ])lace 
ivhich  or  ivhere^  etc. 

'^hr:  "^nini  '^D-i?:     \  n^b  Di^^n-bD  "^Dsn^i     :  D^b  nn^ni  tj-.i:nb  ^sn'^ 

:  bb^b  1^  "nrfri  "i"^^!!!  :  0?^"?^  '^'^"^.:^^.  "O"^"^*^?  Di^^T?  ^  '"O"*:'"^^^ 
Dip^n  nnb  bDi5  i5b  ^bisn-bij^  D^nbb5n-i^''i5  i)2i5^]  :  l^n-r5<  TjbD5J;^_n 
Dnb  -iT2i5:^-ipi|;  aip^2  :  -ii23  ■'"a  niro  rip'b^n  ^ni^i^i^-bs  :  Ts'T 
i<2  'jTss:.':  ^  bxnir^  ^nb^^  nri?i    :  ^n"bi<  'i:^  anb  ni2^s:.i  ari^  v^i^-^b 

!^n^  "n^  nn3:?b  p-ia'^  iris*  Ti^im^ 

•    T  •   T  '  :    :   -  :        t   :    -   •  v   -:        '     :   t    : 

^   The  future  followed  by  X3  has  the  force  of  a  petition  or  request, 
'  State  the  form  and  meaning'  of  both  the  K'ri  and  K'thibh,  and  which  reading 
yields  the  more  exact  grammatical  agreement. 


17.  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  §  54. 
Ti'anslate  and  give  the  corresponding  fomis  of  bt:p  ;— 

,^3555;^    ,^-^.5;'    ;^^?:'   ,''^^?f?   ,^5^^5    •>^'7^}.    ,^^}.   ,(2)^bi{5 
,tjb&55    ,^:bi<3   ,nnbi5a  ,^b!j|:jn  ,bicip    ,(3)bi55nn  ,nb5i;j  ,  ib>^ii 

"irs:   'ip'ia    :-b  inb  ^^'n'bi?;  nin"!  nir^i;  fnijta  r.;):!;!  ^^'^s;*  ^i| 
?i'^D-a)a  nDisi^i  r^t  Thx.^^  ^iD^ini^  :  rb^^rbD  '^nsirn-biii  nir.'i-ns 

'      v   :    rr    :  t    :    rr  -:i-        '  m     :  t    :  -    -.r        '  :    v   t    -:  t  ;  t  •    :      :     •  -  :  t        : 


126  LESSONS   IN   EEADING    HEBREW. 

S^-arj?  i^bi  ibi5  ^p?T     :Dbiyb   1\'^h^   "^^5"^^^^   'H^??   f^-"*^"^'^  ^"^3 

TN  ^•^n-j-'i  a^?n?n  ^^H'^!^!]     J  i"^^?"'?''"^^^  H^T^T^'"^';'  '^v^"'  ^'^5 

mn-Ji  i^nn  Tj-^bj^  iri$     :Drn 


18.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bpp  : — 

nprn  ,n^bt?::  ,5^^^  ,^^t2?d  ,n%  ,n?T»5j  ,nbTZ)'  ,n"bT2J  ,nn'itj 

.  nnbiij^  ,  "irnbir  ,  ^rnbiij  ,  ^nnbtj  ,  n^nra  ,  nbiiJD 

"t:-       "       --T  7      •••!:       7       '-:rr:       7-"-:-       7         -    r  • 

Kemark  34.  Nouns  in  tlie  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives, 
and  pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  jDlural,  §  85.  7. 

niQi^  5?rn-bi<   tr^y-irnij  ynr  npnn   :bDi^b  Dnji  ?n'Tb  5?nT  ^nj 
:tj:^bx  "^rnb;!)'  nin;^  i^  ni^n;"     'D"}^^  niio-n^  )?li'^"'^  iDijn-bs-nfij 
r\-m^  b3?ri   T]^n5i:.^-nfi:?   nfb  nin^'   ni^n   "ip   P*?irO   '^''^^  ^^l"! 
i^p-bx    :^bisn  n^3-b«  npbn    :  nnbi?   ^nb5    :wi;  "ipS!!  ^5  ^"^^^^ 
limb  n>w   ^Dbn   tjibn     Jii^^  ^"I3DX  "i3d  -^^  -^b^^  tj'bnTa  3?:i2n 

DDnnb  "^3^-ip  :  "ii^  n^ap  nDbia^n-n5<  s^npij  :  rirrinsn  n^t^ri^  ^:]i^) 

1  The  plural  of  "(inx  is  often  used,  as  it  is  here,  in  a  singular  sense. 
^  npD  is  applied  specifically  to  opening  the  eyes ;  nns  is  the  general  term  for 
opening,  and  is  applied  to  anything  whatever. 

*  din  is  for  Ui'nn  and  consequently  does  not  lose  its  Tsere  in  the  plural. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 
Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bbp  : — - 

,®h  ,12)5  ,n;tjan  ,  ntfap  ,^fa?   ,im  ,mr^    ,(2)ti?5?  ,^k^ 


LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW.  127 

Remark  35.  The  relative  is  often  omitted  as  in  English 
tf-'nbDxn  m'^  honeij  I  gave  thee  to  eat  for  honey  wldch  I 
gave^  etc,  §  88.  3. 

r.n?i    :ii-ii<-nsi  in'^rJ^iji  i^r^^i^i  ^i^T\  ^br-rx  ^n;n  ^^nnj 

•jb  ^nnj  niTi?  ^^nb-nx  ^npni  cn-^rsb  nnp  ''n'l-jp^  '^r'a-i^  :  ?^p2 
bin?)  "jbjp  "in^  ib  nn^in-&5b  :  on^rsb  ^n^rn:^  tj^nbDisn  rnn^ 
niGV  Jn^^iin  D'^nn^n-b|  r^^?  tjbisb  t5d  n-^i^n  npin  nis^-i? 
'lb  nnb^  n]5i5i  i^in  "^rihiii  n-i^j^  n^b  x^n  Tinirs!  -  -^d  -^b  niin-^^'b 
itinn  D^:nv-'3  nin;!  n^^n  «rnbs2  :  -^i^nri  '^b--5r-i<b  nini   :n'i^\sb 

*  n^  preceded  by  b  is  pointed  nrb  before  a  guttural  and  n^S  before  other 
consonants. 

2  The  construct  of  mi'X  is  rdx  which,  before  suflfixeSj  becomes  ■'n'::i<  etc. 
See  §  50. 

20.  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 

It  is  not  easy  to  distinguish  accurately  the  significations  of  the  different  species 
of  220 .  For  the  present  the  usual  sense  of  the  passive  and  causative  species 
may  be  retained,  the  Piel  may  be  rendered  to  surround  entirely^  and  even  the 
unmeaning  surround  one's  self  may  be  tolerated  in  the  Hithpael,  which  is  not  ia 
actual  use. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bt:;p : 

;(2)nbn  ,mi:D  ,rip3D  ,1156  ,^30  ,  ^^6  ,  (3)nb  ,nD  ,ninp 
j^Discs  ,isip^  ,JGn  ,n5n  nss  ,162  ,nbp  ,  ncp  , '^aon  ^'^npn 
.f^nic;'  ,(2)  ^49?  ""^I??  ?  °^^?9  ,  ^^^^^^P  ,  ^r^?  ,  5^2?? 

,^530;'  j^w?;"  ,^4'iP^9?  i^'^^^'^'d  ,^?^n  ,^c^i<  ,=ibx  ,(2)nr3cn 

.  Dip;'  ,  nnnb;'  ,  ^nnbn  ,(2)  ^sinb^ 


128  LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

Remark  36.  Singular  predicates  and  prononns  are 
sometimes  employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural 
subjects,  §  S5.  6,  ^^nn  T?'r|5^  blessed  is  every  one  of  those 
lies  sing  thee. 

37.  The  conjunction  )  may  be  used  to  introduce  tlie 
apodosis  or  second  member  of  a  conditional  sentence, 
§  89.  1,  if  thou  wilt  not,  etc.,  ^p^^^l  ^^^<^^^  shall  cleccve  to 
thee,  etc. 

nr\i?  -1^-1^1  T5?n  nni^  n^iij  irbi^n  nibb^n-bs  ^n  ^pnnn  TO^.it: 
nin;'-b2?  bi5  :  nny'sn  ^s-bx  nib^5  n^Dn^^  ^^^  "^'JSic'^i  :  rn'f  n 
ninnr^a    n^^    ^i^nri    D'^mrj^r-'jia    r.^^in^i-nK    •in-gb    bnn    :  tjj-i'i 

IT  :  :     •  -  I  -    T  •     -:  I  :-:'-••:  -     •  •     ••    -:   it  :  •   t    :     - 

bisn   biSD    i^^sb   bb?b   nil^nn   ittj^    -^D^^ia    D'^'i^n^^n    ^^k-a    n^ 
J  bj^nijp;i-b3  ^^'is^n  ^bn5  bns:  n-tn  ai^n  n\:2b 

1    ^"^r'l  i.  e.  Todh  superfluous  ;  according  to  tlie  Masoretic  direction,  there- 
fore, it  is  to  be  neglected  in  reading  the  word. 

^  With  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  in  place  of  Tsere. 

21.  Pe  Yodii  Verbs,  §  58. 
Translate  and  give  tlie  corresponding  forms  of  btOj?  : 

Kemark  38.  Tbe  interrogative  n  is  employed  in  simple 
direct  questions,  s^^nsjn  shall  I  live?  in  indirect  questions 
D^  is  moi'e  usual;  inquire  J^^l^^  D^  whether  I  shall  live. 

39.  In  a  disjunctive  question,  direct  or  indirect,  the 
first  member  is  inti'oduced  by  T\  and  tlie  second  by  Db? , 
e.  ^.,  fc^b-D^  vni^-a  niiirnri  ivilt  thou  l^ee])  (or  in  dependence 


LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW.  129 

on  a  previous  verb,  [to  hww^  tvJiether  tliou  wilt  Iceej)) 
Ills  commandments  or  not? 

ni-i^*  niro  "ini)2  bb-]  i^b  ^d  m  nninn  ^^n^j:"  ''nb^-rb?  ^^i 
^b  jf-ijjn-bDn  ^:b;)  "i^  ^^  ^J^iri  jn«n:^  n-^2  b?  nirp  "in--Tri5 
D?"^?!^"]  ♦^"'■;;!n¥  ^bisrnn^.  ^D^-br  mr.'i  ■'■a  t]^-;;:?-^^^  n^-iin 
5"'b-^n    D:i5n-b3-n^    nirp    tiinirri    :  on-'bnjj-b^    iDb^:i    cnVr;in 

^  Pret,  witli  Vav  Conversive.  ^  §  52.  1.  =^  §  50.  3.  ^^  §  48.  1. 

22.  Ayin  Yav  and  Ayin  Yodii  Yerbs,  §  59. 

The  Piel  of  C^ip  means  to  raise  :  tlie  Niphal,  which  is  not  in  use,  may  in  this 
exercise  be  rendered  to  be  risen. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  b-jp  : 

,  ^'aip"?  ,  nnii3ip2  ,  (2)  ^T^T^t\  ,  i:^ib  ,  i^'i^'p  ,  (2)  D^p  ,  (2)  ap 
,  (3)  ^top  ,  ^2i)2^p2   ,  ais'^p?   ,  nisip;   ,  nipo    ,  (2 )  Dips   ,  ^.a^p: 
,  'i^snp  ,  ^"Q^p  ,  n^sip^  ,  (2)  nr^a-aipp  ,(2)  n:^ripn  ,  (2)  ar)^^ip 

.  Ti^^p  ,  ia^p  ,  vb^ 

,ihwpn  ,  (2)  ^n^i    ?  (3)  ^"""^    ,  ^^''X^    ,  ^Oi^''"i    ,  "^"ii    ,  ts'bipn:' 

Remark  40.  When  the  predicate  precedes  its  sn])ject, 
it  sometimes  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 
is  to  say,  it  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  instead  of  the 
feminine  and  in  the  singular  instead  of  the  plural,  §  55. 1. 

41.  The  conjunction  i  may  be  emphatically  used  be- 
tween a  noun  placed  absolutely  and  the  clause  to  which 
it  relates,  §  89.  2,  the  hlessing  r^in?^  it  shall  even  he 
given,  etc. 

6* 


130  LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

42.  A  present  action  conceived  of  as  unfinislied  and 
continuing  in  tlie  future  is  exj^ressed  by  the  future  tense, 
§  78.  2,  i^inn  'j'^i^ia  tvlience  art  tJiott  cooning  f  tlie  action 
being  regarded  as  still  continuing,  whereas  in  ^^^^  tM'Q 
^vhence  have  you  coime  ?  the  action  is  viewed  as  at  an  end. 

^^i*?  ^^!]  QI?t^  •'^f^''^'?  ^''^  ^=i^T2J  :nD^n  niTNi  i\y\2,  n^irfn  ^b 
'Tj'irini^ffii  i\^v  "^pbij  T\ir\  j'jpn'aigb  nrntjn  tj;'J^'i:2^^  ni^  ri-aip^sb 
'T'5?n  ^DTSJiybsj^  ^nbiD^i  :  ni^-in  n^ni«:n-b5<  ^'inhirni  ^bn-iti^  ^  bbn 
-bx  :n^"ab  "ri^-^ia:^!  ^^"ip!^!)  5nin:i  r"^i!?"i^^  Q^r^'-^bs  '^nirn  niai^b 
^ir^a  'in'b^^  ^':r!'^^;  '^^^  ^"^^  Tl^^  ''P'?^  "^^^^:?-'i  ^'^^.  ^^'p^  ^'?^:^ 
riDnsn  nin^i  :«inn  i:^x'52'^  tjbn  r.jsk  :^5j|i?  Dtcn  n^^-ajs*  ^n-rn 
^brp3  n^pbnn72n  n^"i?3b  n:roi   ^'p^i^b   ^nnsts  K^nn  ^t^__  nb^-'in 

i  §  50.  1. 

^  Supply  the  noun  "place"  as  the  antecedent  of  the  relative,  which  is  itself 
governed  by  a  preposition  not  expressed.  Complete  the  Hebrew  sentence  by- 
supplying  the  ellipsis  in  both  cases.     See  §  30.  3. 


23.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  §  60. 

The  Piel  of  5i!i72  may  for  the  sake  of  distinction  be  rendered  to  find  out. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  btOjp  : — 
■,  niiim   ,  nb^iip    ,  (3)  &{ii??  ,  ^^^V:^^.   ,  (2)  njxii^n  ,  ^%i^^ 
.  M'^Ta^  ,  ^njk^T2s:  ,  n!i5;k^  ,  ^Di5i^^  ,  (2)  nj^i^sn  ,  (2)  r-.r^^i^n 

Remark  43.  The  verb  ^"^12  takes  a  direct  object  in  the 
Kal  to  he  full  (?/ anything,  and  in  the  Niphil  to  he  filled    i 
with  anything ;  in  the  Piel  to  fill  something  tvWi  some-    " 
thing,  it  may  have  two  objects. 


i5^p  n^p     tnsTT'::]   1\)\^   nDiii   mil?  ^n^5'^p-^5•b  ^'^)k^^  ^"j  t?^*'ip"'^P 
:  b5^)2   -^b    li^np   ^-a^^a    ^b   n:i{Spr\-bi5    ■jn-'bi^   n^i^ni  •    :  Ti-^n'bx-bs^ 

T    T  •        t'        v):  A-  I. IT  •  r         ■.•»:■  -  '   •••     ■•  ■•  IV 


LESSONS    I]^    READING    HEBREW.  131 

^m  rs^ri^  ^:i^  :D':'cn-n«  f-ixn  i<b^ni  Di^i«:  -fit's  tD^^K^s  d^^ 
"ib-i^na  "lirrj  nb   :  ri^-n  ]ni^rrn^  Tjb  rnb  ^  d^v^??  "i^^^^  ^^r^*^'"'^^ 

:  D-^n'bi^ 

^   See  §  18. 

24.  Lamedh  He  Verbs,  §  61. 

nby  in  Kal  means  to  reveal,  i.  e.  to  uncover  a  secret,  in  Piel  to  uncover,  in 
Hiphil  to  exile,  i.  e.  to  uncover  or  strip  a  land  of  its  inhabitants,  in  Hithpael  to 
uncover  one's  self. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bi:)^ : — 

,  'ib^n  ,  nbro  ,  (2)  n'iro  ,  mba   ,  ^ibj   ,  ^r^jj    ,  nnbj  ,  ^ba  ,  ^ba 
,nb:^i2    .r-b'yq    ^^hT\    ,  n-'ba    ,^b5    ,  ^ba   ,^^a    ,nrb'a    ^Dn-ibro 
j^b'.^!'  ,°??^   ,nbr^"   ^^^V^OI    ,  ^V??    j'"'^?-    jf^'^JvO   ,  (2)  nbr^n 

^l^b^bD;'  i^b  D-^72i^n  ^-ari  D^^'a-irn  nin  f^gn-b:^  a^!?"bs:  nt;.^  D:"'2S*n 
n'^3-ni^  Ti'^nb  nb"biij  nibDp  *'n;^i  :  ^n^:2  '\t)^_  n-Tn  n;^nn-'3  cii^ 
■jn^i  :  "jiynr^a  vbbJi  njjn?  ^itJi^D  n'^rTi?  nb'btj-bi<  nin-«  xn^i^  nirp 
n":.n  i^b  D^  n-'by'iiriJj  ntiisn  :nibb  b3?h  r-.^'n-^b  nar-a  ii^  rns 
r.^,^  "iTTiJt-bs  ns:  ^,ir?^'^  :  binr-^ir^b  ^nb^  nir^^jj  :  t-\rcir\  ni^  ^p  -  nsisia 

^  See  Remark  20,  Lesson  12, 

'  ''S  /m*/  or  it  may  be  translated  but,  to  which  it  is  often  equivalent  after  a 
negative. 

^  The  feminine  in  the  sense  of  the  neuter. 


25.  Numerals,  §  65. 

Remark  44.  In  stating  dates  cardinal  numbers  are 
commonly  used  for  the  year  and  day,  and  ordinals  fop  the 
month. 

45.  The  age  of  persons  is  idiomatically  expressed  by 
the  words  li  son  or  na  daughter  prefixed  to  the  term  of 


132  LESSONS    IX    READING    HEBREW. 

their  life,  tliiis  nji?  njbtD-'j^  soil  of  eiglU  years  i.  e.  eight 
years  old. 

See  also  the  rules  in  §  73. 

ni^inns^    :a"'"ir2ii;  D^^ri:    :ir'^^  D^iLW    :D^:n  mri^   tn^'a;^  ni^'bt^ 
nttj^n  n^'ii^p  ^:tij  :D^t);i  nir\?j  js-i^'inni^©  tn'^rro  r.:jntj  ta'^pbia 

jnb^b  D^375"i:^'i  Di^  Q'^^s'i^  \r\fi2i:^  Q'^S'^-i^  D^nij  :D^Trj  Q-^rip 
")3  m:^  D^^irn-nin  JO'^'a^  n:btj-]^  tD'^pn'n  d^stl*  tQ^r^^  d^^;" 
tnr'i:^  nb^^  ntf'btD  n'^nbn  '^nic^  ic^n  '.iDto  "in^  r.p-tD  q-^idViSj 
n^pini^'^  D^nip'  :nb.^n  n^^njsi^n  rniiJS?  D^riiiJ"  JD'^^jb!:  ni?^>  0^:1? 
:D^ni5tii  D^s^nipi  ntj'bip  qb&5  D^"iip2?i  a;^]!^  :n:©  nii^ia  »£^  r-o^y 
rii^s'ii^s  2?n^^  n:t'3   :  mnb  inb5  oi'^in  '^i^r^n  iinna  D^niS  n:_o 

:bpirn-n^ir^bp    lai^n  n^^^nn  im^nsb  n^i^itsn  orins^     :'©in  ^w 

^  Observe  the  distinction  between  t^ie  predicate  and  the  attributive. 
2  §  65.  3. 


The  End  of  the  Deluge.     Genesis  8,  1-9. 

ins*:  "TtTi^  n-brisn-bs-ni^^,   n;^nn-b|  n!«i   nb-ni^   h^T}b^_   "ibpi 
t^T'V^  TO&'^I     •D^'^n   ^ini^^  f"iKr;-b:^  nin  ts^v^'bi?^  "^i?;!!^   J^jria 

n:ni     :  Di;'  n^'o'i  D^'^^'an  nlp-a  a^^n  ^nDn^_n  nitj;  tjibn  fiijn  by^ 

^it^^n  ^^"ii  ir'"inb  "inxn  ^"i^is?3  ^^^iB?n  le^hn  "i^  nioni  tjibn  i^n 

,T  r  I-:   -.  vt   ••    -      I      '     -  ■;       -  J-   :   •  -  a  r   t    ;     -       1    (v    •  •    :  i-  r    t    iv  J 

n^?2;a-55'bi    J  5^^7^'^!  ^'r.^  '^?^  3"''^^!  "^'^Sn  ni^ib  ipj^a  r^Di^n-ni$ 
:  nnnrrb^i  ^^bi?  tnr\)^  i^n^n  nhp^'^,  ii'^  nb-^sj^'i 

IT     ••      -  V  VT    ••  ft  /••  T   -  T       ■••  >T     •    -  T  .i-       ;     •   - 


LESSONS  IN    READING    HEBREW.  133 


The  Creation  and  Pall.    Genesis  1-3. 
CHAPTER  L     ^^ 

/T :    IT        >    V   T    T  :  )    V   .T   T  >••  :  •    v-   t    -  /••  k  jt  t  <       ■•    . 

^)2i5^"i  :  n^isn  '^ra-bs'  nsn^ra  Q-^n'b^  n^ni  cinn  ^rs-br;  tjt'm  ^nni  3 

V       /  -  -IT   -       <••   :  -  V   v:  -    :  •        v:        -      j  :  a    :       J"  :  -         '     v   i  :  t 

^*"^,p  ^rnbi  n"p  nii?b  1  o^nb^*  N^^p^i  :  ^r^-nn  rni  ni^^n  i-ia  n^^nbi^  n 
^n^  D^nbis:  'ir^^i  3  :  "n^  nip  ^pn"'^n"ii  n-ns^-nrnj  r.b^b  6 
^■^pnn-rss*  °T^"^^  ^'?,-'^  •  °^'^9^  D'^'9  f  5  b-i'nn'Q  ^n^i  a^^n  ^inn  r^j^n  7 

J  ^it  D'^'p  '^i>ii"°^n';'n  ^'n3)""^n;^j  x:i'^^'d  ?'^Jj^b  D'^ri'b^.  fc^^p!*]  :  Ip'TPJ  8 
^n:?5  Q-pp-b^  Q-l-Q-ifn  nnn^  q;-!??!  rp;^  Q^'b^?  "^■'s^^i         s  9 

D"^Bn  mpT2b^  v^N  n'liJs^b  1  n'^n'b^  ^^P^n  j  p-'in^^  nt'a^n  nsnn^  •» 

•    V-   -         /••*:•:  I     •••    V  T   T <■        •.•:  t  1;  •  -  '  i-  •  :  i-  at  t  -    -  iv  x   i"  : 

"p^^n   ^'^^T\    Q'^n'b^   ni2^^;^    :  nrj-^s   E'^n'b^   i<^;i   d^";q;i    ^5^^p  ii 
^nrtib   v^i  ii'^y^  ni^:5?  ^^i^f  f  "i^^n   t^^-'ni   :  p"^n;^i  T'^^J^;l■b2?  12 

}  lp-voi    f'^^rrb:?   ^^'scrh   D^bt^Ti  s^'^jnn   nhi^^b   rrn    j  a^tei  -Jia 
nb'>j3^T2b  Snr*n  ni^s'arrni^  D^bnrin  rh^rir;  y^'T^_  Q'^Kbs:.   r^^^^'i  16 

r.bi'in^  Di^5  ^^pbn   :  fiiin-b^  '^''^A'b  '^':^*^V^  T^^'^  D^ri'bs*  cr«  is 

fiig  D^iizn  ^^n^r^i  a-^Kby:  n-js^^n  s  t'^^'^n':^.  ni;'  nph-'n^;i  5 
iinn^l     :  Q""^*!!?!   r^pn  ^}T^'^.    T"^^T^?    ^^'^^    ^"""^^    ^at^    ^'5.?  ^^ 

:  nitp-ip  Q^nbs*  i>*n^]  ^riiji-ab  qss  qi>'"b3  n^n  cnp-ob  Q^^vzn  ^^snig 

•  -   -  .     -    -  <  :     •  :  J   :  a       ••  v        •"  'T  '  v  »t  :  -    **■** 

^r,n->,  'n  V.  1. 


134  LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

23 

f-}X-in;'n)    iri9.;i;i    n^nn   nb^-ab   r\^n  m:    y^kr\   is^iin   d-'TT-js: 
26  -iTo;^;^]  :  ni"j-^3  D^nb.s;  x7^i]T  iriD-^iab  nic^s^n  tizyb'D  n^n  nrrb 

nnj?:^    ^dt    irib5   i^n^    n^n'bjsj   Dbi;:n   itbi^s   i3^i^rrr«  ,  c^'n':^ 

28  ^nn^    ^ns   D-^n'bij: .  dhb   "i-a^^    D^n'b^?    ori^   ty-in:^^    :  d?^«    i^^5 

29  "  niriy-bs-nx    nb)   'innj   h^n  n^n'bi?   "^-atk^^^    \  '|^"iN;n"b:^   f^i?:"P^n 
»5  I  bbbi  n-j^t^n  qii'-b^b'i  i^-iijii   n^n-b^bi   :  nbpN^b  ti^n;j   D^b  riT 

31  -»r.;'n    n72"^n;'i   "lijia  ^^'^"n^ni  np?  nt;s;-b3-r,«   n^n'bx  a^^^^^ 

3D        J  ^mn  n\'»  niph 

CHAPTEE  11.      n 

3  "b2)3  rin'>2?  in  is   ini^    tc'ip'^i   ^i?-^nu;n  Di^-n.s*    Q^n'bsc    ti^n'^i 

T     •  -     T  <  J-  A  y..  |.  .  _  .        .      .     _  J  ..  •        v:  '  ■•   <T  :   - 

4  t3;^'airn  rni^bin  nbx         s        :  niici^b  Q^n"bs;  s^nn— irx  inpj^b^ 
n  n^i!)  I  bbi  :  D'^tJttJi  pb5  Q'ln'bi^  nin^   nit^^^  D"'^n  D.s-n-nn  n^*rn 

-■  J  :  •    i»    T  :         F     v   ;••  V        v:  it       :  »  -:  :  at  ;    it    •    ;         )     v    it    t  : 

■>■••  -:i-  V  :  IT  T    -:   IT  v  \.    -.  i-         I  ■     -  jt    t   ;  f     v    t    t  -  •  ,t        : 

7  "nx   D^inbi^   nin'i   ^^''''i    :  n-ja^b^n   ^:E-b^-n^5   nptni   ^'^s^rn'a 

••"  T        :  V       •  -  IT  T    -:   IT  ;•■  :  t  V  'IT     :     •   :  I     v  at   t      '    • 

8  ^nij   Dt9  Di^_^^i   nnp;a   l^is^a  i^   D^vb^5    nin^i   r^:^;]   :  ri^n  rsrb 

:5)ni  nitp  n^^n  ^in  ^^n  ^ina  □^':nn  f^i  bDN-^cb  nrji  ri5;"".'^b 
^  M^jani^b    n^-^ni    "i^s^    d'c^-q'^    '^rrt^si   n^-'prnb    "i^i?^    is*^'i   *^,r.:i 

11  rib-iinri    7"i^-b3    n^    nnbn   55^n    li^ij^s)    "in^'n    dtj?    :  n^'^,^"! 

12  J  DntiJn  pc^i  nb^nn  OiW  nii:  ^^inn  rn^^n  nnr^   :  nn-7n  dt»— llr^5 

-      I     -         I  :■   r:  :  -    v     :     -  ;t  a  v    -         I     v    it  t  v-"- I  iTi     -  it  v    '1 


LESSONS    ITT    EEADIN^G    HEBREW. 


135 


.•nnt)  N^n  "^^"^n-in  *in;nn  n^i^^s^  nrnp  tfbhn  :^^n  bpin  ^it'^bii-ri 
:  nitiirbi  rn-iTj)  )'jk']-}^    ^^"'n?::^    Oj^n-n^   Q^^l"'^^    ^0"?  ^g^l  ^d 

:n^^n  nip  1372^  ^bD&?:  Di;;ii  ^i  ^i^p  bDi^^n  i^b  5?^i  nit:  r.^^^in 
^T?    ib-rto«    i-nnb    n^s*n    ni;'n   nr^-j^b    D^n'bjj?    n-r.";'   "^^^^t  is 

D^i^n  ib-jinp^i  nuJi?  'bbi  ib-Knp^-n"?a  ni^'ib  ans^r-bi^  i^n^^i  ^^M^^ 
qi^bi    n^n-in-bDb    ni^b'i?    D>^n    ^np'^T     :  i'^ir    K^.n    n^n    tss  ^ 
nin^'   'bD'^n    t  i^."\:3   nrs?  b^^^^^-^b  n7^bi  n^bn   r^n   bbb^  D:tii'n  21 
•111)3  nho^i  rh^^bi:^  nn^  np^i   r:3"i^i   m^jrr':;^?  ri-n^nn  1  D'n'bx 

IT   r  J    :   •  -  T        :     -     •  -    -  ( -  •  -  I  AT     •  -  IT  T    IT  -  VT  •■    :     -  i- 

umb  D"i5n-"|^  npb-n2}x  :?b^n-ri5  1  o'^n'bic  nin-^   p'^n    :  nsnnp  22 

,T    •  :  VT   T    .T      '    •  Ij-  r  •.•    -:  VT  ••    -  •.-  f-  T        :  »    .•  •  -  r     iv    : 

iij^s-nr?^':   "j^-b:^   :  ri^rnnj^b  Tr^ij^  "^s  ni^i^   ^^n)^7  tmb  '^';}T?3'^  24 
Dn-'riT  rn^n   :  in«  -liunb  rm  ip,Tr&53  pnii   i-E^-nsJi  "i^nx-rx  na 

~   V    ••    :  •«    :  !•  -  IT   •••  /T  T  :  s.  t  :  :     •    :        •    j-  t  i  *    •  v   t 

nffiiiJsni  ;5$bi   ini23i<"i  D"i«n  D'-ii^nr 
CHAPTER   III.     ^ 

S'Oi^^i  D'^n'bx  nSn*^  rm  n©i5  rnt^n  r^n  ^212  u-n^  "n^T^  inm^  x 

A-        v!  JT       I  IT  T  !:•  -:  :•    T    -  j-   -  t  jt    t  t  t    -  •      « 

'^)2^^\^    \  pn   72?   bbia  fe«n    jj^b    a-'h'bx    n-QS-'^^   ?>^    ^■£^:n-b^{  2 

...  ,   -  liT    -  I    <■•  V.      •  ;  I  J  •  :■:  J-     T  r  *  "<  '      •    JT 

^f2)k^^  :  i^^'an-is  '^^  ^2?an  .i^bn  ^37272  te^n  tkb  D'n'b^  t;:^^  4 
DDbDiii^  bi'^3  "^i  D"'b''5^  ?7"''  ^?  •  T^f^'pJ?  ni'D"i5b  n-jb'M-bs^  tnsn  n 
n-i^Kn  i5nni   :  ::?nn  nii:  '^j-i";'  D-'n'bN^s  Dn^^'ni  DD^.py  •y^*^?']  ^^"^^  c 

•      :     -  :  I     ••    T  <T    :  V  :  •  -      ■•  it  j  t    -:   i-  y  :  t    -:    i-  :  I      •■    t  j' 

w  n:rijbEni    :  boi^^i  'ni^v  r^iy-^i^b-an  "jnnn   bj^^n]  i;^"?:^  n;?_r,]  7 
:nni^n  onb  ^irj5>^_^  nbs^n  Thv  ^.nsn^i  en  D^n^  ^5  "i"7;."i  tn^ri23 
xnnp^^i    n'>n   n^nb    153    tibnnri    c'^n'bN    n';n;'    b'-p-rx    ■i'qi/.l  s 
nin;^   ^!^?'''^    •  T?0   T?    T'^?^   D^n"b^5   nin;^    \:s)2    "'nt'^^   c^^n  9 
153   "^nzfo-r    Tjbp-nj^    "i'52i5'^"n    :  r.r.i?  ^^b   n'5:^^n    Oj^tr.-:^*    n'^r'bs:  1 

D"!i5n   nrs^i    J  nbDx   ^3i3T2-bDX    '^pbnb   !n\^i^,:2   "iTr«    ri-n-'irn  12 

at   t    it  V       I  -  T   :   it   T  IV    •  T    -:  r   :     ■    :  I      v-     •     •  jv   ":  J     ••    t       <    •    *: 

p-izi  -HN  Tcai  V.  25. 


136  LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

13 -iiai^^T     tbDJ^n    r?T)^    ''l"^?^,3    ^^D    ^1^^   ™??    '^^;^'    J^^^vJ 

^D^^i'^n  tni-n  nk^^n  -nribJini    rr^o  n^rn^  nir^^b  n-^n'^s;   nin;' 

14  hp^  n^'iK   nj^-T  n^ig?  15  irnrrrbjs^  1  a'^n"*:>«  j-;'in:'  -i-js^n   :  b^i^j 

16  n^s*  n^s^n-b^         D        5^5?  ^stTii'n  nr^^^   ii^jj^n   ^2^,ii^;i  i^^n 
tfnipriTn  rftr^^-bij^  Q^n  i^ibn  n^gn  ^D'nni  tj;in^^  ha-ps^  r.s'iri 

-'■.•:•  ij  :         T   :    -    T         J-  -    r  jt  t  :  '  it  t    :  •  v  : 

T    T    -:    IT  <T  -:  AV     •  V-  J  ••  I         .       .     .  ,y    -.  (      ,.    T       J 

18  rfb   n-i^^ri  'i'^':i'jl   fijpi    :  'n^^^n  ^^^^  bb   nsbDi^n    "jin^s^n  ^n^^S/^^ 

19  -b:^   ^^w  TJ  nnb   bs^n   s^i'^l^^  m^   \  ^\}^y}    ^V.^."^'^  ^^5^r 
5  i^np^i    :  nTiiJn    "i2^°b^^i    'nt^k   "^'^^^"^'^   P^^gb   nr^/2')2    "15   ^^.b-i^^n 

21  nin-i    't)?:;^    :  ^n-bs   e^   nrn'^n   j?;^,n  ^5   r^^n   inrs^  ar   a^^tn 

22  i^^;^i  s  :  d'ijiib^:]    "I'^'s?   t]±r.^  'inrtfb^   d^i<'b    n'^n'b^;: 
'^'^2?i  s?n;  nrj  n^^b  ^siDia   'in^^s  n^^n   Q'lJi^r;  'jn  DVi'b^^  n-r^ 

23  ^nnbr;ij   :  Db^b  ^ni  bj^i   D^^nn   ygi^   s^^    hj^bi   i^;^   nbt^^-js 

24  icni^i    :  DOT  npb  niT3b5  nt^i^n-n^  -ih^^b   ps^-p-a   D^n'b^  nSn? 

■.•  .T  :  1-  IT    •  K-  -^  iv   -:  T   T    -:  jt  •.•  ":  i-  '  v  /,••       I  -     •  <  n 


Masoretic  Notes  Explained. 

^i^nn  'n     .     .     .     .     Large  Betli. 
«T:5?r  'n     .     .     .     .     Small  He. 
p'llis?  nni^  l»:^^     .     .     .     .     Dagluesh  after  Sliurel^ 


LESSONS   IN   WRITING   HEBREW 


1.  The  Prefixed  Paeticles,  §S  24-28 


Translate  into  Hebrew: — • 

A  house  and  field.  A  field  and  a  lionse.  In  a  house. 
In  the  house.  To  a  house.  To  the  house.  As  a  house. 
As  the  house.  From  a  house.  From  the  house.  The 
house  in  the  field.  From  the  house  unto  the  field.  Light 
and  darkness.  Day  and  night.  From  night  to  night  and 
from  day  to  day.  Darkness  in  the  night.  Light  in  the 
day.  As  the  sun  in  the  heavens.  The  darkness.  The 
evenino\  Evenino;  and  mornino:.  As  the  sea.  Liorht 
from  the  sun  in  the  day  and  from  the  moon  and  from  the 
stars  in  the  nio'ht.  Bread  from  the  field  for  man  and  for 
beast.  And  flesh.  And  the  flesh.  And  from  the  flesh. 
Aud  to  the  flesh.  As  flesh.  Not  day  nor  (lit.  and  not) 
nio-ht.     From  sun  to  stars.    From  the  sun  unto  the  stars. 


o 


2.  The  Persoistal  PKONoriirs,  §  29. 

Direction  1.  In  conformity  with  Remark  2  on  page  111, 
■|)()ssessives,  when  not  immediately  followed  by  the  object 
possessed,  are  to  be  rendered  by  the  preposition  b  tliw^^j  I  am 
ray  helovecPs  and  my  beloved  is  'mine  ''^  '^'ini  ^y^"^  ^^r^._ . 
Tlie  verb  to  liave  must  be  paraphrased  by  the  same  pre- 
position, e.  g.  You  have  a  brother  nx  DDb  lit.  a  brother  is 
to  you ;  He  has  no  sou  p  ib  i^^?  lit.  there  is  no  son  to 
him. 


138  LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

Ye  77iasG.  I  and  he.  Tliey  7nasc.  and  tliey  fe7n.  She 
and  iiionfein.  Ye  fern,  and  we.  In  us.  In  them  (?7z. 
and/.).  In  me.  In  her.  In  thee  (m.  and/.).  In  you 
{m.  and  /).  From  eternity  unto  eternity  thou  art  God. 
From  God  to  us.  From  me  to  you.  We  are  in  the 
house,  ye  are  in  the  field.  He  is  in  the  light,  I  am  in 
darkness.  The  earth  is  Jehovah's.  The  silver  is  mine 
and  the  gold  is  his.  Heaven  is  thine.  God  is  for  us. 
God  is  not  like  man.  We  are  like  you.  He  is  like  us. 
The  house  is  yours,  and  the  field  is  theirs.  The  sea 
is  his.  The  bread  is  mine.  I  have  no  bread  in  the  house. 
We  have  a  brother;  he  is  still  living.  You  have  no 
brother.     There  is  no  beast  in  the  field. 


3.  Other  Pronouns,  §  30. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — ■ 

This  house.  In  this  house.  This  is  the  house.  That 
field.  From  that  field.  That  is  the  field.  God,  who  is 
in  the  heavens.  Who  is  in  the  heavens  ?  The  bread, 
which  is  in  the  house.  What  is  in  the  house  ?  Who  am 
I  ?  What  are  we  ?  These  stars.  These  are  the  stars. 
From  this  day.  In  this  day.  Whose  is  this  house? 
Whose  is  that  bread  ?  The  place  in  wdiich  we  are.  The 
land  in  which  I  am.  Who  is  this  masc.  f  What  is  this 
fern,  f  Who  ai*t  thou  fern,  f  Is  this  ^  thou  ^  masc.  ? 
This  field,  in  which  thou  art.  The  land,  from  which  they 
are.  These  waters,  which  are  from  the  sea.  Jehovah  is 
mine  and  I  am  his.  Ye  are  light  in  Jehovah.  We  be 
long  to  the  day :  we  belong  not  to  the  night  nor  to  dark- 
ness. 


lessons  in  writing  hebrew.  139 

4.  Perfect  Verbs.     Kal   Preterite   and   Infinitives, 

§33. 

Write  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitives  of  -t^jp,  "lis  and 
bStD'  in  all  tlieir  foi'ms  as  they  appear  in  the  paradigm, 
with  tlie  proper  signification  attached  to  each. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — • 

She  killed.  They  killed.  We  killed.  To  kill.  Thou 
(masc.)  killedst.  I  killed.  Ye  (masc.  and/jm.)  killed. 
He  killed.     Thou  (fern.)  killedst. 

Thou  (m.  and/.)  wast  bereaved.  We  were  bereaved. 
Ye  (m.  and/.)  were  heavy.  She  was  bereaved.  I  was 
heavy.  They  were  heavy.  He  was  heavy.  He  was  be- 
reaved.    To  be  l}ereaved. 

Direction  2.  In  Hebrew  sentences  the  verb  commonly 
precedes  its  subject,  and  both  precede  the  object  unless 
the  emphasis  requires  a  different  collocation,  e.  g.  i^^? 
Dl^'Qirn  rii5  n^n'bs^  God  created  the  heavens.  But  if  a  per- 
sonal pronoun  be  either  the  direct  or  indirect  object  it  is 
usually  placed  immediately  after  the  verb  D'^n'bjs*  ib  ^nj 
tJ^D'n   God  cjave  to  him  projyerty. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

I  shut  the  house.  She  shut  the  door.  He  shut  the 
heavens.  They  ruled  over  this  land.  Who  gave  you 
(Heb.  to  you)  those  vessels  ?  To  whom  did  he  give  this 
field  I  What  did  they  give  me  ?  The  sun  ruled  over  the 
day  and  the  stars  ruled  over  the  night.  Thou  didst  pour 
water  from  the  heavens  upon  the  earth.  He  poured. 
She  gave  us  gold  and  silver  in  the  vessels.  They  gave 
to  him  honor  and  majesty.  They  kept  the  command 
ment.     We  kept  the  Sabbath.     God  gave  us  a  command 


140  LESSOIS^S    IIT    WRITING    IIEBEEW. 

ment  to  keep  tlie  Sabhatli.  He  rested  in  this  clay,  be- 
cause it  was  the  Sabbath.  The  darkness  was  veiy  great. 
I  dwelt  in  the  house.  They  dwelt  in  the  field.  This  is 
the  bread,  which  Jehovah  has  given  to  you. 


5.    NiPHAL,  PlEL,  AND  PuAL  PRETERITES    AND  INFINITIVES, 

§34. 

Write  the  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  preterites  and  infini 
tives  of  btSjp  with  their  significations. 

Translate  : — 

He  was  killed.  To  be  killed.  I  was  killed.  We  were 
killed.  She  was  killed.  Thou  (m.  and  /!)  wast  killed. 
Ye  {7n.  and  /.)  were  killed.     They  wxre  killed. 

They  massacred.  They  were  massacred.  She  was 
massacred.  I  massacred.  Ye  {pn.  and  /!)  massacred. 
We  massacred.  To  massacre.  To  be  massacred.  Thou 
(m.  and  /!)  wast  massacred.     He  was  massacred. 

The  house  was  sanctified.  The  tabernacle  and  the  ark 
were  sanctified.  Thou  (m.  and  /!)  wast  sanctifieds  Ye 
(m.  and  f,^  were  sanctified.  To  be  sanctified.  To  sanc- 
tify this  day.  This  is  the  day,  which  Jehovah  has  sanc- 
tified. They  sanctified  this  place.  I  sanctified  the  taber- 
nacle and  the  vessels  which  were  in  it.  Ye  were  sepa- 
rated from  them.  The  day  was  separated  from  the  night. 
We  were  separated  from  you.  He  was  separated  from 
us.  We  were  separated  from  him.  They  subdued  the 
land.  They  were  subdued  before  you.  Ye  were  sub- 
dued. He  has  sworn  to  gather  you  to  tliis  land.  Tiie 
door  was  shut  in  the  place,  in  which  they  were  gathered. 
What  did  ye  gather  ?  We  gathered  bread.  Flesh  was 
gathered.  They  have  sworn.  We  have  sworn.  She  has 
sworn. 


lessons  in  writing  hebrew.  141 

6.  The  ke^eaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives,  §  35. 

Write  tlie  preterite  and  infinitives  with  tlieir  significa- 
tions in  the  Hij^hil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  of  ^'^p^ . 

Translate  : — 

I  caused  to  kill.  She  killed  herself.  They  killed 
themselves.  Ye  {m.  and  f.)  were  caused  to  kill.  To  kill 
one's  self.  To  cause  to  kill.  To  be  caused  to  kill.  We 
w^ere  caused  to  kill.  Thou  (^n.  and  f.)  killedst  thyself. 
He  caused  to  kill. 

We  separated  the  silver  from  the  gold.  He  separated 
the  darkness  from  the  light.  Thou  didst  separate  Israel 
from  all  the  nations  which  are  in  all  the  earth.  I  was 
made  king.  Thou  wast  made  khig.  Is  it  a  little  (thing) 
to  be  made  king?  A  little  bread.  A  little  flesh.  A 
little  gold.  A  little  silver.  They  cut  oif  the  nations. 
The  nations  were  cut  off.  Bread  was  cut  off  from  the 
house.  Bread  and  oil  were  cut  off.  We  were  cut  off. 
She  cut  off  man  and  beast  from  the  land.  They  caused 
the  kingdom  to  cease.  He  made  the  kingdom  small.  We 
made  small.  Whom  did  she  destroy?  What  did  she 
destroy  ?  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  didst  jDurify  thyself.  I  did 
not  purify  myself .  She  purified  herself.  Ye  Qm.  and/.) 
purified  yourselves.  They  brought  the  water  near  to  the 
king  David  and  he  poured  it  out  before  Jehovah.  He 
consecrated  the  oil  and  anointed  the  ta])ernacle,  the  ark 
and  all  tlie  vessels.  We  consecrated  all  the  silver  and 
the  o'old  to  Jehovah. 


o 


i. 


Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and  Participles,  §  36. 

Write  the  Kal  future,  imperative  and  j)artici23les  of 

^bi> ,  and  the  futures  of  "lis  and  b'iw. 


142  LESSONS    Ui    WRITING    IIEBEEW. 

Translate : — 

Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  kill.  AYe  shall  kill.  I  shall 
kill.  He  will  kill.  They  (m.  and/)  will  kill.  She  will 
kill.  Ye  (m.  and  /)  will  kill.  Kill  ye  (m.  and  /.). 
Killed.     Killing.     Kill  thou  (m.  and/!). 

Thou  wilt  rule  over  us.  He  will  rule  over  them.  The 
stars  shall  rule  over  the  night.  The  sea  shall  not  rule 
over  the  earth.  Rule  thou  over  the  nations.  He  is 
rulino^.  She  is  rulino-.  "We  are  ruling:.  Y^e  shall  rest  in 
the  Sabbath.  Eest  ye  {m.  and/)  with  me  in  the  house. 
Keep  thou  (m.)  this  beast.  Keep  thou  (/)  that  lu'ead. 
AYho  is  keeping  the  silver?  Jehovah  is  keeping  Israel. 
Jehovah,  who  is  keeping  Israel,  will  also  keep  us.  God 
shall  keep  thee  in  the  day  and  in  the  night.  We  shall 
dwell  in  heaven.  Shut  (m.  ^7/.)  the  door.  I  shall  shut 
the  srate.     She  is  shutting:  the  house.     The  viro-ins  are 

0.0  o 

dwelling  in  the  house.  The  wild  beast  is  dwelling  in  the 
field.  He  will  subdue  all  the  nations  which  are  under 
heaven.  Thou  shalt  be  clothed  with  majesty  and  splen- 
dor.    I  will  kee23  what  I  have  spoken. 

8.    NiPHAL,    PlEL,    AND    PuAL    FuTURES,    ETC.,    §  37. 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  of  bb)P . 

Translate  :  — 

We  shall  be  massacred.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  massacre. 
She  will  massacre.  I  shall  be  killed.  He  will  be  killed. 
Thou  {rti.  and/)  wilt  massacre.  They  (m.  and/)  Avill 
be  massacred.  Be  thou  (m.  and/)  killed.  Massacre  ye 
(m.  and/).     Killed.     Massacred.     Massacring. 

Y^e  will  be  separated  from  us.  They  will  be  shut  in 
the  house  until  the  morning.     All  the  people  will  be 


LESSOI^S    IN    WHITING    HEBREW.  143 

sanctified.  The  company  will  be  sanctified.  These  viv- 
gins  will  be  sanctified.  Those  nations  will  be  sanctified. 
We  shall  be  sanctified.  Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  be  sanctified. 
Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  be  sanctified.  I  shall  be  sancti- 
fied. Jehovah  will  be  honored.  Be  ye  honored.  I 
Avill  honor  them  who  honor  me  (lit.  the  [ones]  honor- 
ing me).  I  will  sanctify  the  priests.  He  will  sanctify 
them.  They  will  sanctify  us.  It  belongs  to  the  priests 
to  honor  this  house.  It  is  not  for  me  to  honor  him. 
They  will  speak  to  thee.  To  whom  will  ye  speak  ?  God 
is  speaking  to  us  from  heaven.  Wilt  thou  speak  to  me  ? 
Speak  ye  to  them.  I  will  take  heed  that  I  do  not  speak 
evil.  Will  the  gate  be  shut  ?  Will  they  be  shut  up  in 
Jericho  ? 


9.    HlPHIL,  HOPHAL,  AND    HiTHPAEL    FuTURES,    ETC.,    §  38. 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  of  bbj . 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  be  caused  to  kill.  We  shall  kill 
ourselves.  Kill  thyself  {m.  and  /!).  Causing  to  kill 
Thou  (in.  and/)  wilt  cause  to  kill.  Cause  ye  (^?7i.  and 
/'.)  to  kill.  They  (m.  and  /.)  ^vill  kill  themselves.  I 
shall  be  caused  to  kill.  Killing  one's  self.  Caused  to 
kill.     He  will  be  caused  to  kill.     She  will  cause  to  kill. 

I  withheld  the  rain  from  you.  I  shall  cause  it  to  rain 
upon  this  field  and  I  shall  not  cause  it  to  rain  upon  that 
field.  Thou  wilt  clothe  them  with  (lit.  cause  them  to 
put  on)  splendor  and  majesty.  He  will  clothe  the 
heavens  with  darkness.  Clothe  (2  m.  s.)  all  the  nations 
with  joy  and  gladness.     He  will  be  made  king  and  will 


144  LESS0X5    IX    ^VRITIXG    HEBREW. 

be  honored  in  all  the  land.  Ye  will  be  caused  to  reio'n. 
We  shall  be  caused  to  reio^n.  Thou  wilt  be  caused  to 
reign.  What  shall  I  offer  to  God  ?  Shall  all  the  rem- 
nant he  cut  off?  Joy  shall  be  cut  off  from  Israel.  All 
these  nations  shall  be  cut  off.  Shall  we  cause  the  work 
to  cease  ?  Who  shall  separate  us  from  him  ?  What  shall 
separate  him  from  us  ?  I  am  separating  between  good 
and  evil.     He  shall  cause  them  to  dwell  in  the  land. 


10.   Paragogic  axd  Apocopated  Future  axd  Imperative 
AXD  Vay  Coxversive,  §§  40,  41. 

DiRECTiox  3.  In  narrating  the  past,  the  first  verb  is 
commonly  to  be  put  in  the  preterite  and  the  succeeding 
ver])s  in  tlie  fnture  with  Yav  Conversive,  jjrovided  the 
verb  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause.  If,  however, 
any  verb  of  the  series  is  for  any  reason  removed  from  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  and  so  separated  from  the  con- 
junction, it  must  be  put  in  the  preterite,  §  79.  2. 

4.  In  a  paragraph  relating  to  the  future,  the  first  verb 
is  commonly  to  be  put  in  the  future  or  imperative,  as  the 
case  may  be,  and  the  succeeding  verbs  in  the  preterite 
with  Yav  Conversive,  provided  they  stand  at  the  begin- 
ning of  their  own  clause.  But  if  anv  verb  of  the  series  is 
separated  from  the  conjunction  by  an  intervening  word, 
it  must  be  put  in  the  future. 

5.  A  negative  imperative  must  be  translated  by  bi^ 
with  the  future,  the  a2:)ocopated  form  being  used  if  one 
exists,  §  78.  8. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — ■ 

He  anointed  me  and  caused  me  to  reign  instead  of 
David.      They  drave   out  the  nations  and  subdued  the 


LESSOJSrS    IT^"    WRITI]S^a   HEBREW.  145 

land  and  d\7ext  in  it.  Tliou  wilt  gather  tliem  from  all 
the  nations,  and  cause  tliem  to  dwell  in  this  land,  and 
thou  wilt  reign  over  Israel  forever  (lit.  to  eternity). 
Ye  sh.all  keep  tlie  commandment  and  be  separated  from 
the  nations  and  be  consecrated  to  me,  and  ye  shall  be  great 
from  sea  unto  sea.  Cleave  thou  unto  me  and  thou  shalt 
keep  the  covenant  which  I  have  made  (lit.  cut)  with  thee 
and  thou  shalt  honor  me.  Ye  shall  not  foraret.  ForQ:et 
not  ye  what  I  have  spoken  to  you.  Take  heed  that  ye 
forfret  not  the  Sabbath  to  rest  in  it  from  all  work.  Wilt 
thou  not  withhold  me  from  evil?  Withhold  not  mercy 
from  me,  O  Jehovah,  and  I  will  keep  (parag.  fut.)  this 
commandment.  Cut  them  not  off.  We  gave  them  l)read 
and  made  (lit.  cut)  a  covenant  with  them.  Pray  reign 
over  this  people.  Shut  the  door.  Pray,  shut  the  door. 
Thou  wilt  not  shut  the  door.  Do  not  shut  the  door. 
We  will  shut.     Let  us  shut. 


11.   Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fem.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre- 
terite. 

Write  the  3  m.  and  /.  sing,  of  the  Kal  preterite  of 
bibjp  with  suffixes,  adding  to  each  form  its  pro^^er  signifi- 
cation. 

Translate  : — 

He  killed  them  {on.  and/!).  He  killed  him.  He  killed 
us.  He  killed  thee  {m.  and /!)  He  killed  me.  He  killed 
you  (jn.  and  /.).     He  killed  her. 

She  killed  us.     She  killed  you  {m.  and  /.).    She  killed 
me.     Slie  killed  her.     She  killed  them  (m.  and/.).     She 
killed  him.     She  killed  thee  {on.  and  /.). 
7 


140  LESSOI^S    IIS"    WRITING    HEBREW. 

I).  The  rest  of  the  Kal  Preterite. 

Write  the  remaining  parts  of  the  Kal  j^reterite  of  bi:]5 
with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

They  killed  you  {^n.  and  /.).  Ye  killed  them  {in.  and 
/.).  I  killed  her.  Thou  (m.)  killedst  me.  I  killed  thee 
{in.  and  /.).  We  killed  him.  They  killed  me.  They 
killed  her.  Ye  killed  us.  Thou  (/.)  killedst  him.  We 
killed  you.  Thou  (//z.)  killedst  her.  Thou  (/.)  killedst 
her.  Thou  (m.)  killedst  him.  Thou  {f.^  killedst  me. 
He  ke23t  you  {in.  and/.).  She  kept  him.  Ye  kept  us. 
Thou  (7/2.)  didst  keep  her.  Thou  (/.)  didst  keep  me. 
She  kept  you  {in.  and  /.).  We  kept  them  {rn.  and  /*.). 
They  kept  us.     I  kept  thee  {in.  and  /.). 

He  anointed  him.  He  anointed  me.  Thou  (???..)  didst 
anoint  us.  Thou  didst  anoint  them.  They  sent  thee  {in. 
and  /.).  She  sent  her.  Ye  sent  him.  We  sent  you  {in. 
and  /.).  She  forgot  me.  Thou  (/!)  didst  forget  her. 
We  forgot  her.  I  forgot  him.  He  washed  them  (m.  and 
/).     I  washed  you  {in.  and  /.). 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  pre- 
terite of  ^t:jp  with  suffixes. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  ambiguous ; 

He  massacred  them  {m.  and  /.).  We  massacred  you 
(m.  and  /.).  She  massacred  us.  Ye  massacred  us.  Ye 
massacred  them  (m.  and  /!).  They  massacred  us.  Tliey 
massacred  you  {in.  and  /.).  Thou  {in.  and  /.)  didst  mas- 
sacre us.     He  massacred  you. 

They  caused  me  to  kill.  Pie  caused  you  (m.  and  /.) 
to  kill.  She  caused  to  kill  them  (m.  and  /.).  They 
caused  to  kill  her.     She  caused  thee  {in.  and/.)  to  kill. 


LESSONS    IN    WEITING   HEBREW.  147 

Ye  caused  me  to  kill.  Ye  caused  to  kill  liim.  I  caused 
tliee  (?/z.  andy!)  to  kill.  I  caused  to  kill  tliem  {m.  and 
y.).  Thou  {pn.  and  /.)  didst  cause  to  kill  lier.  Thou 
(m.  and  /.)  didst  cause  us  to  kill.  We  caused  to  kill 
him.     We  caused  you  to  kill. 

He  made  me  great.  He  made  us  great.  He  made 
them  (m.  and /.)  great.  He  honored  you  (m.  and/.). 
He  honored  him.  He  honored  her.  He  JDcreaved  thee 
(^m.  and  /.).  Ye  gathered  them  (m.  and  f.).  She  gathered 
us.  We  honored  her.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  didst  honor  him. 
She  honored  him.  She  honored  her.  I  gathered  you  (m. 
and  /!).     They  honored  me. 

They  caused  him  to  reign  over  Israel.  Ye  caused  me 
to  put  on  the  garments.  He  caused  Eleazar  to  put  them 
on.  A  wild  beast  overtook  him  in  the  field.  Thou  hast 
caused  us  to  dwell  in  this  place.  I  have  cut  them  off 
because  they  did  not  honor  me.  Thou  hast  separated 
them  from  all  the  nations  which  are  upon  the  earth.  Ye 
brought  him  near  to  the  tabernacle.  The  sword  has 
bereaved  her,  and  she  has  neither  father  nor  daughter  nor 
brother  (lit.  to  her  is  not  father  and  not  daughter  and 
not  brother). 

• 

12.    Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with   Suffixes, 

§42. 

a.  Kal  Future. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Kal  future  of  bbj 
w^ith  sufiixes. 

Translate : — 

He  will  kill  us.  She  will  kill  us.  I  shall  kill  you  (vi. 
and  /.).  Thou  wilt  kill  her.  We  shall  kill  him.  She 
will*  kill  them.  They  will  kill  her.  Ye  (m.)  mil  kill 
her.    Thou  (/.)  wilt  kill  her.     Thou  (/.)  wilt  kill  me. 


148  LESSONS   IN    WEITING    HEBREW. 

Ye  (m.)  will  kill  tLem.  Tliey  will  kill  you  (m.  and 
/).  Thou  (/)  Avilt  kill  us.  She  will  kill  thee  (m. 
and  /!). 

Jehovah  will  keep  us  from  all  evil.  Thou  (m.)  wilt 
keep  them  (m.  and  f.\  They  {pn.  and  /.)  will  remember 
me.  I  shall  remember  them.  Who  will  j'emem]3er  him  ? 
Will  he  remember  her  ?  Will  she  not  remember  you  (m. 
and  f.)l  I  do  not  know  (79?'^^.)  him  and  how  shall  I 
remember  him  ?  We  sliall  remember  thee  (?/^.  and  /!) 
and  not  forget  thee.  This  is  the  house ;  wilt  thou  (m. 
and  /.)  remember  it  ?  Tliis  is  the  commandment ;  will 
they  keep  it  ?  Whose  are  these  garments  ?  I  shall  put 
them  on.  Behold  this  babe  !  will  the  mother  forget  it  ? 
(The)  Lord  will  surely  (cths.  injin^  remember  you. 
Thou  (?/?.  and  /!)  wilt  not  forget  me.  Do  not  thou  {ini, 
and  y.)  forget  me. 

I).  Piel  and  Hiphil  Futures. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  future 
of  ^t:ip  with  suffixes. 

Translate  : — 

Slie  will  massacre  them  {m.  and  /.).  Will  ye  (w.  and 
y.)  massacre  us  ?  He  will  massacre  you  (m.  and  /.). 
He  will  cause  thee  (m.  and  /!)  to  kill  me.  He  will  cause 
to  kill  thee.  Thou  (m.  and  /!)  wilt  cause  her  to  kill  us. 
I  will  cause  him  to  kill  them.  They  {in,  and  /.)  will 
cause  me  to  kill. 

Thou  (772.)  wilt  deliver  them  and  they  will  honor  thee. 
The  Lord  has  remembered  us  and  crowned  (future  with 
Vav.  Conv.)  us  with  honor  and  majesty.  He  will  not 
destroy  me.  Let  him  not  destroy  me.  Jehovah,  who  is 
dwelling  in  Zion,  will  sanctify  the  people  and  deliver 
them  (Heb.  sing.  suf.  referring  to  peoj^le)  frojn  all  evil 


LESSONS   I]^    WRITING    HEBREW.  149 

and  cause  tliem  to  dwell  in  this  j^lace  forever.  I  will 
cause  tliee  to'put  on  sackclotli,  and  will  cause  joy  and 
gladness  to  cease  and  will  utterly  {ahs.  iiifin?)  cut  tliee 
off.  Thou  wilt  gather  us  and  make  us  great.  We  will 
separate  her  from  the  assembly.  All  the  virgins  shall 
honor  her. 

G,  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

Write  the  Kal  infinitive  of  bi3j5  Avith  suffixes  and  give 
the  different  significations  of  eacli  form. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  am- 
biguous and  giving  the  alternate  significations: — 

To  kill  you  (m.  and  f^.  To  kill  them  {in.  and  /!). 
To  kill  her.  To  kill  him.  Kill  (m.  .9.  and^^Z.)  her.  Kill 
{in.  s.  and^^.)  him.  My  killing.  To  kill  me.  Our  kill- 
iug.  His  being  killed.  Massacre  (^m.  s.  and  pi.)  them. 
To  massacre  you  (in.  and/".).  His^nassacring  us.  Your 
being  massacred.  Cause  (m.  s.  and  pi.)  him  to  kill  the 
woman.  My  causing  you  to  kill.  Her  causing  to  kill 
them.  To  cause  him  to  kill  me.  To  cause  me  to  kill 
him.  To  cause  to  kill  thee  (m.  and  /.).  Their  being 
caused  to  kill  her. 

To  keep  me.  To  keep  him.  To  keep  thee  (m.  and  /.). 
To  keep  us.  To  keep  them  (m.  and/.).  Keep  (m.  s.  and 
pi.)  them.  My  keeping  the  commandment.  Remember 
(m.  s.  and^;/.)  me.  Here  am  I  (Heb.  ""^fn,  behold  me), 
send  me.  Hear  us.  Deliver  (m.  s.)  us.  Crown  (m.  s.  and 
pi.)  him.  To  honor  her.  He  has  sworn  to  (use  the  prep.) 
gather  us  and  to  cause  us  to  reign  with  him.  Honor  him 
and  he  will  not  forget  to  honor  thee.  Sanctify  us  and 
bring  us  near  to  thee.  Gather  the  priests  to  the  sanc- 
tuary; honor  them  before  all  the  people;  clothe  them  with 
(Heb.  cause  them  to  put  on)  salvation. 


150  lessors  in  writing  hebrew. 

13.   Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 

Translate  : — 

A  great  war.  The  great  war.  It  is  a  great  war  (Heb. 
the  war  is  great).  This  war.  This  great  war.  This 
great  and  evil  war.  Great  wars.  The  great  wars.  These 
great  wars.  These  great  and  evil  wars.  These  wai's  are 
great  and  evil.  Wars  are  great  evils.  He  nttered  (Heb. 
cried)  a  great  cry.  I  will  make  (Heb.  cut)  a  new  cove- 
nant with  them.  New  garments.  These  garments  are 
new.  There  are  the  new  garments.  He  caused  me  to 
put  on  these  new  garments.  He  rent  the  new  garment 
which  was  upon  him.  A  great  kingdom.  He  shall  reign 
over  all  these  great  kingdoms.  Many  wells.  Large 
rocks.  An  evil  beast.  Good  commandments.  Many 
and  great  nations.  Large  figs.  These  large  figs.  These 
figs  are  large.  The  large  figs  are  very  large.  These  figs 
are  larger  than  those  figs.  Those  figs  are  better  than 
these.     War  is  worse  than  (Heb.  evil  from)  famine. 

14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Direction  6.  Observe  that  where  a  short  vowel  is  in- 
serted in  the  construct  plural  agreeably  to  §  47.  5,  the 
first  syllal)le  is  intermediate  and  a  following  asj^irate  will 
not  take  Daghesh-lene,  §  9.  a. 

Translate  : 

A  house  of  a  king.  The  house  of  the  king.  In  the 
king's  house  are  vessels  of  gold  and  vessels  of  silver. 
The  vessels  of  silver  are  more  than  the  vessels  of  gold. 
The  vessels  of  gold  are  smaller  than  the  vessels  of  silver. 
The  priests  of  Jehovah  burned  incense  upon  the  golden 
altar  (Heb.  the  altar  of  gold).    Who  will  shut  the  doors 


LESSONS   IN   WRITING    HEBREW.  151 

of  the  house  ?  The  rivers  of  the  garden.  The  waters  of 
the  sea.  The  cattle  of  the  earth,  the  beast  of  the  field, 
and  the  fowl  of  heaven.  This  is  the  sign  of  the  covenant 
which  I  have  made  with  you.  The  mercy  of  Jehovah  is 
from  eternity  and  to  eternity.  The  blessing  of  Jehovah, 
the  God  of  all  the  earth.  The  kins^s  of  the  nations.  The 
stones  of  the  field.  The  gates  of  the  city.  The  field  of 
Edom.  The  stars  of  the  morning.  Will  ye  not  keep  the 
commandment  of  the  king  ?  The  good  commandments  of 
God.  The  great  day  of  Jehovah.  Aaron  and  Eleazar 
offered  them  upon  the  altar. 


15.  Nouns  with  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Direction  7.  Nouns  having  sufiixes  are  definite  and 
require  attributive  adjectives  joined  to  them  to  take  the 
article,  §§  69,  70. 

Write  the  nouns  ^2'^  tvord  and  ©55  soul  in  both  num- 
bers with  the  sufiixes  in  their  order,  adding  to  each  form 
its  signification. 

Translate : — 

Thou  shalt  hear  my  voice  in  the  morning.  He  put 
(Heb.  gave)  the  ark  of  God  in  its  place.  His  mercy  is 
to  eternity.  She  caused  him  to  put  on  his  new  garments. 
He  will  subdue  the  nations  under  us.  Thou  wilt  subdue 
them  under  our  feet.  I  will  clothe  her  priests  with 
(Heb.  cause  her  priests  to  put  on)  salvation.  My  priests 
shall  be  clothed  \dth  righteousness.  Ye  shall  kee23  my 
Sabbaths.  I  have  kept  thy  commandment.  Hear  my 
cry.  She  will  wash  her  head,  her  hands,  and  her  feet. 
He  anointed  my  head  with  (a)  oil.  The  nations  and 
their  kings.     His  holy  tabernacle  (Heb.  the  tabernacle  cf 


152  LESSO^S^S    Iiq-    WRITING    HEBREW. 

liis  holiness).  My  iigliteoiis  God  (Ileb.  God  of  my 
righteousness).  He  will  not  forget  his  covenant.  His 
voice  is  breaking  •  in  pieces  rocks.  My  foot.  My  feet. 
His  foot.  His  feet.  Their  feet.  He  has  given  salvation 
to  his  king.  Ye  are  dwelling  in  your  house.  This  is  my 
field.     Thy  field  is  larger  than  our  field. 


16.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §  53. 

The  intransitive  verb  'irS'  to  stand  does  not  in  strictness  admit  of  a  passive, 
and  accordingly  never  occurs  in  tlie  Niphal.  That  species,  as  found  in  the  para- 
digm, may  in  these  exercises  be  rendered  as  though  '  stand '  had  its  transitive 
sense,  he  teas  stood,  etc. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  ^h^  to  stcmd,  the  Kal  future  of 
^iij  to  cat,  and  the  Kal  future  and  imjDerative  of  ptn  to 
he  strong. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and/.)  stood.  We  shall  stand.  They  {in.  and 
f.)  will  stand.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  stand.  Stand  thou 
(m.  and/)  I  shall  stand.  To  be  stood.  I  was  stood. 
She  was  stood.  Ye  {in.  and/)  will  be  stood.  Be  ye 
{m.  and/)  stood.  He  shall  be  stood.  We  shall  cause 
to  stand.  Thou  shalt  be  caused  to  stand.  Thou  {in.  and 
/)  wast  caused  to  stand.  They  were  caused  to  stand. 
They  caused  to  stand.  Caused  to  stand.  Causing  to 
stand.  I  shall  eat.  Ye  {m.  and/)  will  be  strong.  Be 
thou  (m,  and/)  strong.     She  will  eat. 

The  curse  was  turned  to  a  blessing.  I  shall  turn  day 
to  night.  Turn  (thou)  these  stones  to  bread.  Darkness 
shall  be  turned  to  light.  I  shall  cause  them  to  eat  bread. 
H(i  caused  his  people  to  eat  manna.  Have  ye  not  eaten  % 
What  have  you  (Heb.  is  to  you)  to  eat?  There  is  no 
bread  to  eat.     It  shall  not  be  eaten.     The  priests  shall 


LESSORS    IN    WEITIISTG    IIEBEEW.  153 

eat  it.  Eat  no  bread  in  this  place.  Ye  sliall  not  eat  from 
tliis  tree.  Ye  have  forsaken  me  and  I  will  forsake  yon. 
Will  ye  forsake  me  ?  Thou  shalt  serve  him  and  he  will 
not  forsake  thee.  Serve  Jehovah  with  all  thy  heart  and 
with  all  thy  soul.  All  the  nations  shall  serve  him.  Who 
is  Jehovah  that  I  shall  serve  him  ?  It  shall  be  said  to 
you,  Ye  are  my  peo2:)le  and  I  am  your  God.  The  words 
of  Jehovah  were  verified.  He  is  a  living  God  and  an 
everlasting  king  (Heb.  king  of  eternity).  He  is  king  of 
kings. 

17.  Ayin  Guttural  Veebs,  §  54. 

The  verb  bNJ>  has  in  Kal  and  Niphal  the  sense  of  redeeming^  in  Piel,  Pual,  and 
Hithpael  that  of  polluting. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  bi5j  . 

Translate : 

He  will  redeem.  Thou  (m.  and/!)  wilt  redeem.  Re- 
deem ye  (m.  and  f.)  They  redeemed.  She  was  re- 
deemed. Be  thou  {m.  and /.)  redeemed.  They  {on.  and 
f.)  will  be  redeemed.  We  polluted  ourselves.  Polluted. 
Polluting.  Thou  {m.  and/.)  pollutedst.  Ye  (m.  and  /.) 
were  polluted.  She  polluted.  Pollute  ye  (m.  and  /!). 
Pollute  thyself  (m.  and/.).  We  shall  be  polluted.  They 
(on.  and/)  will  pollute.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  pollute 
yourselves.     I  shall  pollute. 

I  will  bless  him  with  all  my  heart.  God  ^vill  l;)less  us. 
He  has  blessed  us.  Bless  ye  (m.)  Jehovah.  Bless  Jeho- 
vah, ye  virgins  of  Israel.  He  went  to  bless  his  house. 
His  seed  shall  be  blessed  in  the  earfch.  He  will  bless  thee 
and  thy  seed  after  thee.  Ye  shall  l)e  blessed  in  him  I 
cried  unto  thee  in  the  night  and  thou  heardest  my  voice. 
We  will  cry  with  a  loud  (Heb.  great)  voice  to  him  that 
7* 


154  LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

sitteth  (Heb.  to  the  [one]  sitting)  in  the  heavens.  Cry 
not  to  me ;  cry  unto  the  gods  wliom  ye  have  served. 
Wash  ye  youi'  liands  and  your  feet.  Wash  thou  me  and 
I  shall  Ije  clean.  Cleanse  your  hearts  and  not  (^i?)  your 
garments.  I  will  cleanse  you  from  all  evil.  Forsake  evil 
and  serve  me.  He  drove  out  the  nations  from  before  us 
and  we  dwelt  in  their  land.  Thou  hast  redeemed  us. 
The  God  of  Israel  is  thy  Redeemer. 

18.  Lamedii  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 
Write  the  paradigm  of  n^©  to  send. 

The  Piel  of  this  verb  may  be  rendered  for  the  sake  of  distinction  to  send  away. 

Translate : — 

To  send.  To  send  away.  To  be  sent.  To  send  one's 
self.  To  cause  to  send.  Thou  {in.  and  /.)  didst  send. 
We  shall  be  sent.  I  shall  send  myself.  Cause  thou  {rii. 
and  y.)  to  send.  He  will  send  away.  Thou  {in.  and  /'.) 
wast  sent.  Ye  {m.  and  /.)  will  cause  to  send.  Sending. 
Sent.  Causing  to  send.  He  will  cause  to  send.  She 
will  be  sent.  Thou  {rn.  and  y.)  \V'ilt  send  thyself.  They 
(m.  and  y.)  will  send.     Send  ye  {m.  and  y.). 

He  will  sow  his  held.  It  is  time  to  sow  thy  seed 
Sow  good  seed  in  thy  field.  Bad  seed  which  should  (Heb. 
shall)  not  be  sown.  These  fields  shall  be  sown  to-day.  Tlie 
sower  {part?)  went  to  sow;  and  in  his  sowing  {inf.^  these 
fell  on  the  way  and  the  fowls  of  heaven  ate  them ;  these 
fell  on  the  rock  and  these  on  good  ground.  The  field  is 
the  whole  earth ;  the  seed  is  the  word  of  God ;  the  sower 
is  the  Son  of  man  and  his  servants  whom  he  has  sent  in 
his  name.  Didst  thou  (m.)  not  sow  good  seed  in  thy 
field?  Didst  thou  {f.)  hear  what  he  said  to  thee?  It  is 
good  to  hear  thy  voice.  She  Avill  be  heard.  To  be 
heard.      He  will  open  the  house.      The  heavens  Avere 


LESSONS    I]!T    WRITING    HEBREW.  155 

opened  and  a  voice  was  heard,  This  is  my  Son,  hear  him. 
Who  shall  open  the  eyes  of  the  blind?  The  deaf  shall 
hear.  His  clothes  (were)  rent  {Kal  ][)ass.  ])art^  and 
ashes  upon  his  head.  Forget  not  his  commandments. 
Thou  shalt  not  be  forgotten.  He  wdll  not  withhold  any 
(bb)  good  fi'om  us. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 

The  Kal  and  Niphal  of  11*:>5 ,  though  given  in  full  in  the  paradigm,  are  each 
but  partially  in  use,  and  as  they  are  identical  in  signification  they  are  made  to 
supplement  each  other.  The  Niphal  is  found  only  in  the  preterite  and  particiiDle  ; 
the  Kal  in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  ttJ^J  to  ajyjyroacli  and  the  Kal  of 
inj  to  give. 

Translate  : — 

Approach  thou  {on.  and  /.).  She  will  approach.  Tliey 
(m.  and  f.^  will  approach.  Approaching.  To  approach. 
We  approached.  Ye  {on.  and  /'.)  approached.  I  ap- 
proached. I  shall  apj^roach.  I  shall  be  caused  to 
approach.  Thou  (on.  and  f.~)  causedst  to  aj^proach. 
Cause  ye  {on.  and/!)  to  approach.  Thou  {on.  and/.) 
wilt  cause  to  approach.  He  will  be  caused  to  approach. 
Caused  to  approach.  To  cause  to  approach.  To  give. 
Ye  {on.  and  /)  gave.  Thou  {on.  jr.nd  /)  gavest.  We 
gave.     We  shall  give.     Give  thou  {on.  and  /!). 

Give  {imp.  ovith  He  paracj^  (to)  me  thy  field.  I  will 
give  (to)  thee  instead  of  it  a  field  better  than  it.  Ask 
from  me  and  I  will  give  thee  the  nations.  He  ^vill  give 
me  a  new  heart.  Ye  gave  me  bread  and  I  ate  Thou 
gavest  this  land  to  him  and  to  his  seed  forevei*.  He 
sware  to  give  us  this  good  land.  Thou  wilt  give  I'aiii 
upon  the  earth.     He  will  give  them  into  our  hand.     He 


156  LESSONS    IT^^    WRITIXG    HEBREW. 

said,  Giv^e  me  thy  hand ;  and  lie  gave  liim  his  hand. 
What  will  ye  give  me?  I  know  (pret.)  that  he  will  not 
suffer  (Heb.  give)  you  to  go.  I  shall  take  a  little  honey. 
Take  half  of  the  blood  and  put  (Heb.  give)  it  U2:)on  the 
altar.  I  have  (see  Direction  1,  Lesson  2)  no  silver  and 
gold  ;.  I  shall  give  thee  all  that  I  have.  Tell  me,  I  pray 
thee,  what  he  said  to  thee ;  withhold  not  a  word  from 
me.  And  he  told  her  all  that  was  in  his  heart.  They 
did  not  tell  us  the  half.  It  was  told  to  the  kina:  and  to 
his  servants. 


20.  Ayin"  Doubled  Verbs,  §  .57. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  nno  to  surround^  and  the  Piel 
of  ^i?  to  excite. 

Translate  : — 

He  surrounded.  We  surrounded.  They  surrounded. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  surrounded.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  didst 
surround.  She  surrounded.  I  surrounded.  I  was  sur- 
rounded. He  was  surrounded.  Ye  (m.  and  f.)  were 
surrounded.  She  was  surrounded.  They  were  surround- 
ed. Thou  {m.  and  /.)  wast  surrounded.  We  were  sur- 
rounded. We  shall  be  surrounded.  We  shall  surround. 
Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  be  surrounded.  They  (m.  and/.) 
will  be  surrounded.  Ye  (??2.  and  /.)  will  surround.  I 
shall  surround.  Surround  ye  (m.  and/).  Be  thou  (m. 
and/)  surrounded.  Surrounded.  Surrounding.  To 
surround.     To  be  surrounded. 

They  surrounded  entirely.  We  shall  surround  entirely. 
Surround  ye  (m.  and/)  entirely.  I  caused  to  surround. 
SiiC  (Tiused  to  surround.  She' was  caused  to  surround. 
Ye  (m.  and  /)  caused  to  surround.  He  caused  to  sur- 
round.    We  caused  to  surroiuKl.     They  were  caused  to 


LESSONS    IN   WEITING    HEBREW.  157 

suiTouncl.  They  caused  to  surround.  Cause  tliou  (771. 
and  f.)  to  surj'ound.  I  sliall  cause  to  surround.  Tliey 
(m.)  sliall  be  caused  to  surround.  Causing  to  surround. 
Cause  ye  (m.  and  /!)  to  suri'ound.  Ye  (m.  and  f.)  shall 
cause  to  surround.  Surroundino:  one's  self.  We  excited. 
They  {m,  and  /!)  shall  excite. 

I  have  begun  to  give  you  this  land.  Thou  hast  Ijegun 
to  speak  to  him.  Begin  to-day.  The  famine  began  this 
year.  In  those  days  (§  50)  Jehovah  began  to  send  into 
Judali  the  king  of  Edom.  She  began  to  ask.  We  l^egan 
to  demolish  the  statues  and  the  pillars.  They  began. 
They  (}n.  and  /.)  will  begin.  They  rolled  the  stone  from 
upon  the  mouth  of  the  well.  The  stone  is  very  great ; 
who  shall  roll  it  for  us  ?  He  is  rolling  himself  upon  the 
ground.  I  shall  curse  thy  blessings.  He  began  to  curse 
and  to  say,  I  know  (p?'ct.)  not  the  man.  Curse  ye  bit- 
terly (al)S.  infn.)  the  city  and  its  inhabitants  (Heb.  the 
[ones]  inhabiting  it).  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  sliall  eat 
])read  this  day.  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  will  not  hearken 
to  the  words  of  this  covenant.  I  took  thee  to  curse  them 
and  lo !  thou  hast  blessed  them.  Thou  shalt  not  bless 
them  and  thou  shalt  not  curse  them. 


21.  Pe  Yodii  Verbs,  §  58. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  lib';)  to  dwell^  and  the  Kal  of 
ir"n;>  to  he  dry. 

Translate : — 

To  dwell.  Dwell  thou  (m.  and  /'.).  He  will  dwell. 
Ye  {on.  and  /.)  will  dwell.  I  shall  dwell.  Thou  {m. 
and  f.)  wilt  be  dwelt  (in).  She  was  d^velt  in.  Be  thou 
{m.  and  f.)  d\\'elt  in.  Causing  to  dwell.  They  were 
caused  to  dwell.     They  caused  to  dwell.     She  caused  to 


158  LESSONS   IN    \f KITING    HEBREW. 

dwell.  We  were  caused  to  dwell.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  were 
caused  to  dwell.  Cause  ye  (m.  and  /.)  to  dwell.  She 
^vill  be  caused  to  dwell.  I  shall  cause  to  dwell.  Thou 
(^m.  and/.)  shalt  be  dry.  Be  ye  {m.  and/.)  dry.  To 
be  dry. 

Hast  thou  known  ?  Will  he  knoAv  ?  Wilt  thou  let 
me  know  or  not  ?  Will  he  go  ?  Let  me  know  whether 
he  wdll  go  or  not.  They  will  go  to-day.  Hast  thou 
remembered  the  commandments  of  Jehovah  ?  Wilt  thou 
keep  them  or  not  ?  He  knows  (^lyret.^  whether  thou  wilt 
keep  them.  Thou  knowest  whether  he  will  keep  them  or 
not.  Wilt  thou  bless  him  oi*  curse  him?  Who  shall 
dwell  in  thy  holy  place  (Heb.  place  of  thy  holiness)  ? 
Art  thou  my  son  or  not  ?  Tell  {He  parag?)  me,  I  pray 
thee,  whether  thou  art  my  son  ?  Tell  me  whether  thou 
art  my  son  or  not.  Will  the  tree  stand  or  fall?  He 
caused  us  to  go  in  the  wilderness,  where  ^  we  wearied  him 
and  did  not  walk  in  his  ways.  Where  did  ^ve  weary  him  ? 
H  Jehovah  be  (the)  God,  go  after  him;  and  if  Baal, 
serve  him.  Whither  thou  wilt  go,  I  shall  go.  This  is  the 
man  to  whom  ye  shall  go.  To  whom  shall  we  go  ?  thou 
hast  the  words  of  life.  H  ye  will  serve  me  with  all  your 
heart,  then  (  Vav  witli  jpret.  Eem.  37)  will  I  cause  you  to 
dwell  in  this  land  forever. 

'  Observe  in  this  and  the  following  sentences  the  distinction  between  the  rela- 
tive and  the  interrogative. 

22.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodii  Verbs,  §  59. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  D^p  to  rise  and  the  Kal  of  l^"i  to 
contend. 

Translate  : — 

Ye  (m.  and  /.)  rose.  He  rose.  They  rose.  We  rose. 
She  rose.     They  {m.  and  /.)  will  rise.     Kise  thou    {in 


LESSOT^S    IN    WRITIN^G    HEBREW.  159 

and  y.).  We  shall  rise.  He  will  rise.  Rise  ye  (m.  and 
f.).  To  rise.  Eising.  Risen.  To  be  risen.  Ye  (iti, 
and  /.)  will  be  risen.  I  shall  be  risen.  Thoii  {m.  and 
y!)  wilt  be  risen.  She  was  risen.  We  were  risen.  I 
was  risen.  Thon  {in.  and  /!)  wast  risen.  Pie  was  risen. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  were  risen.  They  were  risen.  He  will 
be  risen.  He  raised.  We  shall  raise.  He  will  be  raised. 
He  was  raised.     Raisins*.     Raised. 

T  caused  to  rise.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  caused  to  rise.  She 
caused  to  rise.  He  caused  to  rise.  They  caused  to  rise. 
Thou  (on.  and  f.)  didst  cause  to  rise.  They  (m.  and  f.) 
will  cause  to  rise.  Thou  {in.  and/'.)  wilt  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  ye  (m.  andy.)  to  rise.  We  shall  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  thou  (m.  and  /!)  to  rise.  Causing  to  rise.  I  shall 
be  caused  to  rise.  They  were  caused  to  rise.  Raise  thy- 
self {ill.  and/!).  She  raised  herself.  Thou  (m.  and /.) 
didst  contend.  I  contended.  He  contended.  She  will 
contend.     Contend  thou  (m.  and /!).     Contending. 

He  came  to  his  house.  They  came  to  him  and  ate 
bread  with  him.  Whence  hast  thou  come  ?  Whence  are 
ye  coming  ?  Whither  didst  thou  go  ?  Whither  art  thou 
going?  Wilt  thou  come  to  me  to-night?  Come  and 
lodge  with  me.  Bring  thy  father  and  thy  mother  with 
thee.  We  came  to  the  well  and  there  was  no  water  in 
it.  Bring  [ye]  my  tunic.  Gold  and  silver  shall  be 
brought.  They  brought  to  him  gold  and  incense.  She 
shall  return  to  her  former  state.  Return  from  your  evil 
ways  and  serve  Jehovah.  We  are  from  dust  and  shall 
leturn  to  dust.  The  viro^ins  will  return  ]:>rino'ino'  water 
from  the  well.  Bring  back  the  silver  which  ye  have 
taken  from  me.  They  brought  him  back  to  the  city  in 
joy  and  gladness.  They  shall  be  brought  l)ack  to  this 
land.  He  shall  die.  We  shall  die.  They  put  him  to 
death.     He  was  put  to  death.    She  shall  be  j^ut  to  death. 


igo  lessons  in  writing  hebeew. 

28.  La.^iedii  Alepii  Yeebs,  §  60. 
Write  tlie  j)aradigm  of  i^i^  to  find. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (in,  and  /.)  found.  We  were  found.  Tliou  {in, 
and  /.)  didst  find  out.  They  caused  to  find.  I  found 
myself.  He  was  found.  To  cause  to  find.  To  l)e  found. 
Finding  one's  self.  They  {in,  and /!)  will  cause  to  find. 
Ye  {m.  and/.)  will  find.  She  w^ill  be  found.  He  w^ill 
find.  Ye  {in.  and /)  will  find  out.  Find  ye  {in.  and/..). 
Cause  ye  {in.  and /!)  to  find.     Ye  w^ere  found. 

I  shall  call  to  him  and  he  wdll  hear  my  voice.  They 
called  the  name  of  the  city  Ur  of  the  Chaldees.  Call  ye 
this  young  man.  Call  to  me  in  the  day  of  evil ;  I  will 
deliver  thee.  Thy  name  shall  not  be  called  Naomi; 
thou  shalt  be  called  (Heb.  to  thee  shall  be  called)  Mara. 
Jehovah  brought  you  out  from  that  land.  I  shpdl  l)ring 
you  out  from  all  the  lands  in  which  ye  are  and  will  give 
you  this  good  land  which  I  sware  to  your  fathers.  He 
created  the  earth  and  the  sea ;  and  the  heavens  are  the 
w^ork  of  his  hands.  My  hands  have  created  all  these. 
Thou  didst  create  man  and  beast  upon  the  earth.  Bring 
us  out  fi^om  all  evil.  Fill  the  vessels  large  and  small 
V.  ith  water.  Thou  hast  filled  the  earth  with  thy  mercy. 
The  house  was  full  of  men  and  w^omen.  He  caused  it  to 
rain  upon  the  earth  and  filled  our  hearts  with  food  and 
gladness. 

24.  Lamedii  He  Yerbs,  §  61. 
Write  the  j)aradigm  of  Si^J . 

Translate : — 

They  revealed.     We  revealed.      She  revealed.     I  re- 


LESSONS   IN"    WRITING    HEBREW.  161 

vealecl.  Tlioii  (m.  and  /'.)  wast  revealed.  He  was  re- 
vealed. I  was  revealed.  Ye  {in.  and  /.)  uncovered. 
Tliey  uncovered.  He  was  uncovered.  We  were  uncov- 
ered. She  was  exiled.  Thou  (m.  and /;)  wasfc  exiled. 
Thou  (m.  and/.)  didst  exile.  They  exiled.  I  uncovered 
myself.  To  exile.  To  uncover.  To  be  revealed.  To 
reveal.  Thou  (m.  andy.)  wilt  be  revealed.  I  shall  re- 
veal. He  will  uncover.  We  shall  be  uncovered.  They 
{m.  andy.)  will  exile.  She  shall  be  exiled.  Be  ye  {m. 
and/!)  revealed.  Uncover  thyself  (m.  and/).  Eeveal- 
ino\ 

The  house  was  built  in  the  city.  My  father  built  it. 
He  began  to  build  it  and  my  brother  finished  it.  I  have 
finished  the  work  which  thou  gavest  me  to  do.  Y/ho 
will  build  an  altar  in  this  23lace  to  Jehovah  ?  They  built 
a  dwelling  for  him  in  Jerusalem.  All  the  nations  shall 
go  up  to  Jerusalem  to  serve  Jehovah.  To  go  up  and  to 
go  down.  They  offered  burnt-offerings  upon  the  altar. 
I  did  as  Jehovah  commanded  me.  Bring  him  up  to  me 
in  the  bed.  And  it  came  to  pass  (Heb.  it  was)  as  he  fin- 
ished to  offer  the  burnt-offering  that  (Heb.  and)  fire  fell 
from  heaven.  They  made  for  him  a  throne  of  gold. 
Solomon  built  him  a  house.  Wilt  thou  dwell  in  this 
house  which  has  been  built  for  thy  name  ?  He  went  up 
into  heaven.  He  shall  descend  a  second  time  from  hea- 
ven.    Jehovah  appeared  to  Solomon  in  Gibeon. 

25.  Numerals,  §  iST:>. 

Direction  8.  The  preposition  (/following  a  cardinal 
numl^er  must  be  expressed  by  "j^ ,  thus  D'^p^sn  I'a  n^'^n 
five  of  tlie  horses,  not  D'^c^en  ntj^n  which  would  mean 
the  five  horses  ;  onia  rii^n©'  seveii  of  them,  not  dh^^t^'  which 
would  mean  tliey  seven. 


162  LESSONS    IN    WEITING    HEBEEW. 

9.  In  compound  numbers  insert  tlie  conjunction  and 
between  the  different  denominations,  which  may  proceed 
either  from  the  higher  to  the  lower  or  the  reverse ;  thus 
for  sixty -five  write  either  sixty  and  five  oy  five  and  sixty. 

AVrite  the  masculine  absolute  of  the  cardinals  from  one 
to  ten  in  their  order.  Write  the  present  date,  year, 
month,  and  day. 

Translate,  noting  each  case  in  which  different  forms 
may  be  used,  or  in  which  the  order  of  the  words  may  be 
varied : — 

Four  heads.  Ten  seas.  Twelve  nations.  Thirty  of 
the  Philistines.  Fifty  days.  A  hundred  men.  Six  nights. 
Eight  shekels.  Three  years.  The  seven  stars.  Seven 
of  the  stars.  Seven  stars.  These  seven  stars.  Twenty 
rocks.  Eleven  women.  Nine  kin^s.  Two  vessels.  Nine 
virgins.  Five  stones.  Twenty-four  priests.  Sixty  houses. 
Sixteen  months.  Eighty  queens.  Six  hundred  years. 
Three  hundred  and  sixty-five  days.  In  the  fifth  year  of 
(Heb.  to)  king  Solomon,  in  the  tenth  month,  in  the  second 
day  of  the  monlh.  In  the  twenty-first  of  the  eighth 
month.  In  the  third  of  this  month.  The  third  [part]  of 
the  month.  The  fourth  [part]  of  the  year.  The  eighth 
[part]  of  the  shekel.  The  eighth  shekel.  Eight  of  the 
shekels.  He  is  eight  years  old.  She  is  nineteen  years 
old.  All  the  days  of  Adam  were  nine  hundred  years  and 
thirty  years  and  he  died. 


26.  To  ACCOMPANY  Gen.  1  : 1. 

Heaven.  Earth.  In  heaven.  In  earth.  The  heaven. 
The  earth.  In  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  Beo:innino'. 
In  [the]  beginning.  He  created.  God  created.  I 
created.  In  [the]  beginning  thou  createdst  the  earth 
and  the  heaven.     Creating.     God  the  creator  of  (lit.  the 


LESSONS    IN"    WEITINa   IIEBEEW.  163 

[one]  creating)  the  heaven.  He  will  create.  Thou  wilt 
create.  I  shall  create  an  earth  and  heaven.  He  was 
created  (Niphal).  We  were  created.  Thou  wast  created. 
I  was  created.  Ye  were  created.  In  [the]  beginning- 
were  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth.  In  [the]  begin- 
ning was  created  the  earth.  [There]  will  be  created  an 
earth.     [There]  will  be  created  a  heaven. 


27.  Gen.  1  :  2. 

Darkness.  The  darkness.  And  the  darkness.  In 
darkness.  In  the  darkness.  And  in  the  darkness.  Face. 
The  face.  The  face  of  [the]  deep.  The  face  of  the 
heaven.  He  was.  I  was.  We  were.  Ye  were.  Thou 
wast.  He  will  be.  I  shall  be.  We  shall  be.  They  will 
be.  The  earth  will  be  waste  and  void  (desolation  and 
emptiness).  Darkness  was  on  the  waters  and  on  the  face 
of  the  earth.  Spirit.  The  Spirit.  The  Spirit  of  God 
brooded  over  the  deep.  The  Spirit  will  brood.  In  the 
beginning  the  Spirit  [was]  brooding  over  the  waters. 
God  created  the  darkness  and  the  waters.  The  deep  was 
created.  And  the  waters  of  the  deep  were  waste  and 
void. 

28.  Gen.  1  :  3,  4. 

He  said.  They  said.  And  he  said  (Yav  Conv.).  And 
they  said.  I  said.  Ye  said.  We  shall  say.  She  will 
Fay.  We  saw.  They  saw.  He  saw.  And  he  saw.  He 
will  see.  God  [is]  seeing  in  the  light  and  in  the  dark- 
ness. The  waters  were  seen  (Niph.).  The  earth  Avas 
seen.  The  lio-ht  will  be  seen.  God  saw  the  lisfht.  Good 
light.  Light  [is]  good.  The  good  light.  The  light  [is] 
good.     God  is  good.     God  is^  (Heb.  he,  §  67,  2)  light^ 


164  lesso:n's  in  writing  Hebrew. 

He  saw  that  the  light  was  good.  God  divided  between 
the  earth  and  the  heaven.  God  [is J  dividing  l^etween 
the  darkness  and  the  light.  The  waters  were  divided. 
They  will  be  divided.  I  divided.  Ye  divided.  Thou 
wilt  divide.     Divide  thou. 


29.  Gen.  1  :  5,  6. 

Day  and  night.  The  day  and  the  night.  In  the .  day 
and  in  the  night.  To  the  days  and  to  the  nights.  To 
divide  between  days  and  nights.  We  shall  call.  We 
called.  And  we  called  (Vav  Conv.).  Thou  didst  call 
the  firmament  heaven.  I  called  the  darkness  niglit,  and 
the  light  I  called  day.  The  light  (Heb.  to  the  light) 
shall  be  called  day.  It  was  evening.  One  evening. 
One  mornino^.  One  God.  One  earth.  In  the  midst  of 
the  earth.  In  the  midst  of  the  heaven.  Between  the 
heaven  and  the  earth  (two  constructions).  God  shall  say 
to  the  waters,  Be  ye  divided.  Let  there  be  light.  Let 
there  be  darkness.  God  saw  the  firmament.  The  firma- 
ment [is]  good. 

30.  Gen.  1  :  7,  8. 

God  made  the  day  and  the  night.  Thou  madest  the 
firmament.  Thou  didst  divide  the  waters.  I  shall  make. 
He  will  make.  And  he  made  (Vav  Conv.).  I  made  the 
earth  and  the  waters.  We  were  made.  The  earth  was 
made.  The  waters  were  made.  I  made  the  heaven 
which  [is]  above  the  earth  and  the  earth  ^vhich  [is]  under 
the  heaven,  and  the  waters  which  [are]  under  tlie  earth. 
He  divided  the  day  from  the  night.  Light  Avas  made  in 
one  day,  and  the  firmament  was  created  in  a  second  day. 
And  he  called  the  ])eginning  of  the  day  morning,  and  the 
beo-innino!:  of  tlie  nisrht  he  called  eveuinsr.      A  second 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    IIEBEEW.  165 

morning.     The  second  evening.     And  it  was  so.     And  lie 
did  so. 


31.  Gen.  1  :  9,  10. 

They  were  gathered.  Ye  were  gathered.  "We  were 
gathered.  And  they  were  gathei-ed.  Ye  shall  be  gather- 
ed. To  be  gathered.  Being  gathered.  He  said  to  the 
waters,  Be  ye  gathered  unto  the  seas.  The  waters  which 
were  under  the  heaven  were  gathered  unto  one  place,  and 
tJie  waters  which  were  above  the  lieaven  were  gathered 
unto  a  second  place.  The  dry  [land]  was  seen.  The 
sea  w^as  seen.  See  thou  the  earth  and  the  heaven.  He 
made  the  waters  which  are  in  the  sea.  They  called  the 
diy  [land]  earth.  The  collection  (gathering  together)  of 
waters  shall  be  called  sea.  The  God  of  heaven  made  the 
sea  and  the  dry  land.  He  divided  the  sea  from  the  dry 
land.     He  said  and  it  was  [done], 

32.    Gen.  1  :  11-13. 

God  said  to  the  earth,  Bring  forth  (either  of  two  verbs) 
grass.  The  earth  brought  forth  herl^  and  tree.  Grass 
sprang  up.  Grass  was  brought  forth.  He  said  to  tiie 
herb,  Produce  seed,  and  it  was  so.  The  herb  produced 
seed  (according)  to  its  kind.  I  have  sown  the  seed.  Ye 
have  sown.  They  have  sown.  In  the  morning  sow  thou 
tlie  seed.  The  seed  was  sown  in  the  evening*.  The  herb 
will  produce  seed.  The  tree  will  yield  fruit.  A  fruit- 
tree.  The  fruit-tree  (§  75.  5).  The  seed  of  the  fruit-tree 
is  in  the  fruit.  To  the  tree  yielding  fruit  [there]  is  seed 
according  to  its  kind.  The  fruit,  whose  seed  is  in  it.  Seas, 
in  the  midst  of  which  are  waters.  A  day  in  which  there 
is  light.     A  night  in  which  there  is  darkness. 


166  LESSONS  11^  writi:n'g  Hebrew. 


33.   Gen.  1  :  14-16. 

Let  there  be  light.  Let  there  be  a  light  (luminary) 
One  great  light.  The  second  small  light.  Two  great 
lights.  The  two  small  lights.  Two  of  (Heb.  from)  the 
small  lights,  which  (Heb.  to  which)  they  have  called 
stars.  The  stars  will  give  light  in  the  night.  He  made 
one  light  for  the  rule  of  the  day.  The  second  light  was 
made  for  the  rule  of  the  night.  He  divided  between 
lights  and  lights  (Heb.  to  lights).  Thou  didst  divide  be- 
tween the  great  lights  and  the  stars.  God  created  the 
lights  and  said  (Vav.  Conv.)  to  them,  Give  light  upon  the 
earth  and  divide  day  from  night ;  and  it  was  so.  There 
shall  be  signs  in  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  One  sea- 
son. A  second  day.  The  third  year.  Two  years  and 
two  days.     Let  there  be  stars  giving  light  in  the  night. 


34.  Gen.  1:17-20. 

In  the  fourth  day  God  made  the  two  great  lights  and 
the  stars  and  in  the  firmament  of  heaven  he  set  (Heb. 
gave)  them.  He  set  the  firmament  above  the  earth  and 
the  ea]'th  above  the  sea.  I  gave.  They  gave.  We  gave. 
Thou  gavest.  She  gave.  Giving.  To  give.  He  will 
give.  We  shall  give.  Given.  Ye  will  give.  One  light 
ruled  the  day.  A  second  light  shall  rule  the  night. 
Thou  [art]  ruling  the  earth  and  the  sea.  God  saw  that 
the  lights  [were]  good.  He  made  the' reptiles  (collective) 
which  are  in  the  waters.  He  divided  between  the  rep- 
tile and  the  fowl.  A  soul  of  life.  The  soul  of  life. 
Thou  madest  the  soul  of  life  which  is  in  the  fowl  and  in 
the  reptile.     In  the  morning  they  flew  away. 


lessons  in  writing  iiebfvew.  1g7. 

35.  Gen.  1:21-23. 

They  were  fruitful  and  multiplied  (Vav  Con  v.)  and 
filled  tlie  earth  •and  the  sea.  The  waters  [are]  filling 
(Piel)  the  sea.  The  sea  shall  be  filled.  The  stars  shall 
fill  the  heavens.  The  movino;  soul  of  life  shall  be  fruitful 
and  multiply  upon  the  earth.  Great  monsters.  The 
great  monsters.  All  the  great  monsters  of  the  sea.  The 
monsters  of  the  sea  are  great.  God  ci'eated  them  and 
he  will  bless  them.  He  blessed  the  winged  fowl  and 
every  soul  of  life  which  he  had  made.  He  caused  the 
fowl  to  multiply  in  the  earth  and  the  monsters  in  the 
seas.  Blessed  be  God.  Bless  ye  God.  Bless  God,  O 
my  soul.  God  is  blessing  (Piel)  every  morning  and  every 
evening. 

36.  Gen.  1:24-27. 

The  l)east  of  the  earth  was  made  after  its  kind.  Man 
was  created  in  the  likeness  of  God,  and  in  his  image 
The  earth  brought  forth  cattle  and  rejDtile  creeping  upon 
the  ground.  God  made  lights  for  the  rule  of  the  day  and 
of  the  nio^ht ;  and  the  man  he  created  for  the  rule  of 
the  earth.  Thou  didst  make  man  according  to  thine 
image  and  in  thy  likeness.  Man  (Heb.  with  arti- 
cle) was  made  in  the  image  of  him  that  created  (Heb. 
the  [one]  creating)  him.  Rule  thou  over  the  fish  of  the 
sea  and  have  dominion  over  all  the  earth.  Let  the  fish 
multiply  in  the  sea.  The  fowl  shall  fly  over  the  face  of 
heaven.  He  made  them  male  and  female.  Every  beast 
of  the  earth  was  made  male  and  female. 


37.  Gen.  1:28-31. 

Subtlue;  ye  the  earth  and  fill  it  and  multiply  upon  it 
and  have  dominion  over  all  which  is  in  it.     God  blessed 


168  LESSONS   IN    WRITING    IIECKEW. 

all  that  lie  liacl  made.  He  saw  that  it  was  very  good. 
He  gave  to  the  man  the  fruit  of  the  earth  for  food. 
Thou  hast  given  to  iis  every  herb.  To  the  beast  of  the 
earth  every  green  herb  ^vas  given.  It  will  be  given.  To 
be  given.  Give  thou.  Give  ye.  See  thou  what  God 
has  made.  He  made  light  in  one  day.  In  a  second 
day  he  made  the  firmament.  In  a  third  day  the  dry 
[land]  was  seen  and  it  brought  forth  herb  and  trees. 
In  a  fourth  day  he  made  the  great  and  small  lights.  In 
a  hfth  day  bbxls  and  hsh  were  made.  In  a  sixth  day  he 
made  cattle  and  created  man  (Heb.  with  article)  in  the 
image  of  God. 

88.  Gen.  2:1-5. 

The  earth  was  finished.  The  host  of  heaven  was  fin- 
ished. The  earth  and  the  heaven  were  finished.  I  have 
finished  my  w^ork.  Thou  hast  not  finished  thy  work. 
We  have  not  yet  finished  our  work.  They  will  finish 
their  work.  Your  work  will  be  finished  and  ye  will  rest. 
These  generations.  These  are  the  generations.  These  are 
the  generations  of  Adam.  These  two  generations.  This 
day.  This  seventh  day.  This  is  the  day  which  God  has 
blessed.  This  is  the  seventh  day  in  which  God  rested, 
and  which  he  sanctified.  No  tree  was  yet  in  the  ground. 
The  earth  had  not  yet  brought  forth  herb  nor  (Heb.  and) 
bush.  In  the  fifth  day  there  was  no  man  and  beast  of 
the  field  there  was  none,  for  they  had  not  yet  been 
created. 

39.  Gen.  2:6-10. 

This  is  the  earth  Avhich  God  created  and  made  (Heb. 
[so  as]  to  make).  God  blessed  them  and  said  (Heb.  [so 
as]  to  say,  or  with  Vav  Con  v.)  to  them.  Be  fruitful 


LESSONS    IX    AVRrriNG   HEBR:eV7.  169 

Snbcliie  the  eartli  and  rule  (Heb.  to  rule)  over  it.  God 
caused  it  to  rain  and  watered  the  face  of  the  earth.  He 
causes  it  to  rain  (fut.  §  78,  3)  and  waters  the  ground. 
A  mist  [is]  ascending  from  the  sea  and  the  earth  will  be 
watered.  We  are  as  the  grass,  ^vhich  sjirouted  in  the 
morning  and  in  the  evening  shall  not  be.  This  is  your 
breath  Avhich  Jehovah  breathed  in  your  nostrils.  He 
placed  Adam  in  the  garden  which  he  had  planted  and  in 
which  he  had  caused  to  grow  every  tree  good  for  food. 
Four  rivers.  The  four  rivers.  The  four  heads  of  the 
river.  The  six  heads.  The  two  gardens.  Three  days 
and  three  nic^hts.  Five  mornino-s  and  ^ve  eveninsfs. 
One  small  star. 

40.  Gets-.  2:11-16. 

Thou  didst  form  Adam  of  dust.  He  made  the  man 
(Heb.  to)  a  living  soul.  A  great  river  is  surrounding 
the  land  in  which  there  is  o;old.  The  name  of  the  o-arden 
is  Eden.  They  called  the  garden  Eden.  The  garden 
shall  be  called  Eden.  In  the  midst  of  the  garden  were 
two  trees;  the  one  was  called  the  tree  of  life  and  he 
called  the  name  of  the  second  the  tree  of  kno^ving  good 
and  evil.  The  place,  where  the  garden  of  Eden  was,  is 
not  knoi\ai.  He  went.  I  went.  He  will  go.  We  shall 
go.  To  go.  Going.  He  took  the  man.  He  took  him. 
He  took  her.  He  took  us.  He  took  you.  He  took  me. 
He  took  thee.  He  will  take  the  tree.  Kee^D  the  seventh 
day  and  (Heb.  to)  sanctify  it. 

41.  Gex.  2:17-20. 

Adam  ate  of  the  evil  fruit  and  died.     This  fruit  is 
good;  thou  mayest  freely  eat   (Heb.  emjdiatic  infin.)  of 
it.     He  ate  it.     She  ate  it.     We  ate  it.     Thou  shalt  eat 
8 


170  LESSONS   IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

it.  Ye  shall  eat  it.  They  shall  eat  it.  Ye  ate  it.  Ye 
ate  of  (Heb.  from)  it.  It  is  not  good  for  Adam  to  eat  of 
it.  He  formed  him.  He  formed  her.  He  formed  us. 
Thou  formedst  us.  I  formed  you.  I  formed  them.  I 
formed  him.  Thou  didst  put  Adam  in  the  garden  to  till 
it.  He  tilled  the  ground  and  kej^t  it.  Every  beast  of 
the  field  came  to  Adam.  In  the  cattle  of  the  field,  the 
beast  of  the  earth,  the  fish  of  the  sea,  and  the  fowl  of 
heaven  thei'e  was  not  found  a  help  the  counterpart  of 
Adam.  God  gave  name  (Heb.  called  names)  to  the  day 
and  to  the  night. 

42.  Gen.  2:21-25. 

Adam  slept  because  a  deep  sleep  from  God  had  fallen 
upon  him  (§  6Q.  2).  A  rib  was  taken  and  was  made  (Heb. 
built)  into  a  woman  and  she  was  brought  to  him.  One 
boneo  His  bone.  His  one  bone.  Two  ribs.  Her  ribs. 
Her  two  ribs.  One  of  (Direction  8,  Lesson  25)  his  bones. 
Two  of  her  ribs.  Our  three  gardens.  Three  of  our  gar- 
dens. Four  of  their  evenings.  Five  of  your  rivers.  Six 
of  the  heads,  into  which  the  river  was  parted.  Two  of 
the  men.  Two  of  the  women.  They  two,  the  man  and 
tlie  woman.  Two  of  them.  The  woman  left  her  father 
and  her  mother  and  clave  to  her  husband.  My  mother 
has  forsaken  me.  My  father  and  my  mother  will  not 
forsake  me.  Thou  shalt  do  all  that  thy  father  and  thy 
mother  shall  command  thee. 


43.  Gen.  3:1-5. 

The  cunning  serpent.  This  tree  is  the  best  of  all  the 
trees  (Heb.  collective)  in  the  garden.  The  man  was  the 
greatest  of  all  the  men  of  [the]  east.     The  stars  are  the 


LESSONS    IN    WRITINa    HEBREW.  I7l 

smallest  of  all  the  lights  in  the  firmament.  The  sea  is 
greater  than  the  dry  [land].  Dying  (em2:)hat.  infin.)  he 
shall  die.  We  shall  die.  I  shall  die.  He  died.  She 
died.  They  died.  Dying.  He  killed  (caused  to  die). 
They  killed.  He  was  put  to  death.  She  shall  be  put  to 
death.  He  said  to  the  woman,  Thou  shalt  not  touch 
the  tree  lest  thou  die.  Touch  thou  this  fi-uit.  I 
touched  it  and  my  eyes  were  opened  and  I  knew  good 
and  evih  In  the  day  of  thy  touching  this  tree  (§  89.  3) 
thou  and  thy  wife  shall  die  (§  86.  1). 

44.  Gen.  3  :  6-10. 

The  woman's  eyes  were  opened  and  she  saw.  She  gave 
of  the  fi'uit  to  Adam  and  he  saw  and  ate.  A  desirable 
tree.  The  desirable  tree.  The  tree  is  desirable.  He  took 
of  it.  She  took  it.  Ye  took  it.  We  shall  take.  They 
(f.)  will  take.  Its  fruit  was  taken  and  eaten  and  it 
opened  her  eyes.  Open  thou  mine  eyes  and  I  shall  see. 
Both  her  eyes.  The  eyes  of  them  both.  Two  of  their 
eyes.  Their  four  eyes.  They  heard  Jehovah  walking  ^ 
She  heard  the  voice  of  Jehovah  [who  was*]  walking  in 
the  midst  of  the  trees.  I  saw  the  man  eating \  Where  is 
he  ?  Here  he  is  (Heb.  behold  him  !).  Where  art  thou  ? 
Here  I  am.  I  heard  the  tree  falling  \  The  falling  waters. 
We  saw  the  stars  fallino^  from  heaven.  The  woman  and 
her  husband  hid  themselves. 

•  The  participle  being  a  predicate  will  not  agree  with  its  subject  Jehovah  in 
definiteness,  and  hence  must  not  receive  the  article,  Remark  23,  Lesson  13. 
^  See  Remark  8,  Lesson  7. 

45.  Gen.  3  :  11-15. 

Who  commanded  thee  not  to  do  this  evil  [thing]  fern,  ? 
Not  to  hear.      Not  to  see.     Not  to  walk  in  the  garden. 


172  LESSONS    IN    WEITING    HEBREW. 

I  shall  command  tlie  stars  not  to  give  light  in  the  night. 
Who  did  this?  Didst  thou  see  the  woman  who  ate 
(Heb.  the  [one]  eating)  this  fruit  ?  Did  the  serpent  de- 
ceive the  woman  ?  Eat  ye  of  it  and  bless  Jehovah.  I 
shall  not  eat  the  fruit  which  he  has  commanded  me  not 
to  eat.  What  is  this,  the  woman  has  done  ?  What  are 
these  ?  Who  are  these  ?  The  serpent  is  the  most 
accursed  of  all  cattle.  Thy  mother  is  the  most  blessed  of 
all  women.  Thou  art  the  greatest  of  all  men.  I  told  him. 
It  was  told  to  me.  The  serpent  bruised  his  heel  (Heb. 
him  [as  to]  heel).      He  shall  bruise  the  serpent's  head. 

46.  Gen.  3  :  16-19. 

I  shall  bless  them  that  bless  (Heb.  blessing)  thee,  and 
curse  them  that  curse  (Heb.  cursing)  thee,  and  all  the 
earth  shall  be  blessed  in  thee.  The  woman  heard  the 
voice  of  the  serpent.  The  Avoman  hearkened  to  the  voice 
of  the  serpent.  The  man  hearkened  to  the  voice  of  his 
wife,  and  ate  the  fruit  of  which  God  had  commanded  him 
not  to  eat.  The  woman  bare  three  sons.  Sons  were 
born  to  him.  They  shall  be  born.  I  was  born.  We 
were  born.  These  are  the  names  of  the  sons  of  Adam. 
Whose  son  art  thou?  Return  to  dust  (ye)  sons  of  man. 
We  returned.  Have  they  returned  ?  Will  they  (/.) 
return  ?  He  brought  them  back  (caused  them  to  return). 
They  shall  be  brought  back  to  the  garden  of  the  Lord. 

47.  Gen.  3  :  20-24. 

Adam  called  (Heb.  to)  the  woman  Eve.  The  woman 
was  called  Eve.  The  woman's  name  was  Eve.  God 
called  his  name  Adam,  and  said.  Because  from  the  ground 
I  have  taken  him.    Did  he  not  call  the  man  Adam,  accord 


LESSONS    IN    WEITING    IIEBEEW.  173 

ing  to  the  name  of  the  ground  from  whence  he  had  taken 
him  ?  Men  have  given  (Heb.  called)  names  to  the  stars 
of  heaven.  God  called  the  name  of  the  firmament  hea- 
ven, and  gave  names  to  the  day  and  to  the  night.  See 
thou  the  ground  from  whence  thou  wast  taken.  Take 
ye  of  the  food  which  I  have  brought  for  you  and  eat 
of  it.  Coats  of  skin  were  made  for  the  man  and  for  the 
woman  and  they  were  clothed.  These  God  gave  to  them 
instead  of  the  fig-leaves  which  they  had  sewed  for  them- 
selves. He  said  to  him,  Put  forth  thy  hand,  and  he  put 
it  forth.  I  shall  send  (Kal)  him.  I  shall  send  her.  He 
will  send  us.  He  will  not  send  them.  He  has  com- 
manded us  not  to  send  you.  Ye  will  send  me  away 
(Piel).  We  shall  send  thee  away.  I  shall  drive  you  out 
(Piel)  from  my  garden.  He  will  keep  me.  Thou  wilt 
keep  them. 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


nx    n.   m.    (const.    ^^^^,   pi. 

ninjj)  father 
*inx  V.  K.  (i5s)  to  jperisli,   P. 

to  destroy 
15  ij  n.  m.  f.  a  stone 
^i?  n.  m.  mist^  va])or 
Dinx  n.  m.  Edom 
•jiix  n.  m.  lord^  master 
DHiJ  n.  m.  man 
tranx  n.  f.  ground^  land 
'^X'^^  n.  m.  Zar^ 
nnx  or  nnsf  v.  K.  to  love 
bnii  n.  m.   (Q'^l^n'^)  tent 
I'^ri?  n.  m.  Aaron 
^ii5  V.  K.  N.  to  shine.     H.  ^o 

c^?^s6  to  shine^  give  light 
nis  n.  m.  light 
n^x  n.  Ur 

nix  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  sign 
1^  adv.  ^Ae/Z' 
Iji^  n.  f.  (D^iTif)  ^r^r 
n^}   n.    m.    (const,    '^nx ,    pi. 

D-^nx)  brother 
nijn^c  n.  m.  J.A«J 
^nj;  adj.  <9?2^ 
ninx  n.  f.  si'si^^r 


nni?  prep,  after 

•X  adv.  (suf.  i'^i?)  ivhere? 

nn'^i?  n.  f.  enmity 

n^x  adv.  ivhere  ? 

ry:^b^^.  adv.  7/(9i^^  .^ 

l^k     (const,     r^?)     nothing^ 

there  is  not  or  '?^;<:^5  7^o^ 
'5':^  adv.  where?  only  after 

1^  ,  r^^  ivhence  ? 
TiE'^x  n.  f.  ejyhah 
T»"'i|:  n.  m.  (o'lt^if:)  m«?i,  A^5- 

Z'(^?i(^,  each 
biij  V.  K.   (i^'b)  to  eat.     H. 

^6>  (?a'?/s6  to  eat 
bi5  adv.  ?Z6>^ 
bi5  11.  m.  6'^<9(^ 

"bsj  prep,  to^  utito^  respecting 
n^55  see  nt 
nibx    commonly   in   the    pi. 

D'inbx  n.  m.  God 
nbbij  n.  m.  Eleazar 
Ci?  n.  f.  (nii2S)  mother 
DX  conj.  ?/,  in  a  disjunctive 

question  or 
TQiJ  V.  N.  to  he  verified^  found 

true 


176 


HEBREW-El^GLISH    VOCABULARY. 


S"»ii2i5  n.  Amanali 
Db"J2X  adv.  truly ^  indeed 
^•aij  V.  K.  (&?s)  to  smj,    N. 

to  he  said 
•^JiJ  adv.  whither'? 
tJi:i5  n.  m.  inan 
•'pwNi ,  "^Disj  pron.  I 
5]i?  n.  m.  (D^'Si?)  nostril^  face 
vi^  conj.    also^   even;   ''S)   q^^ 

Jioiv  much  'more  or  after  a 

negative  how  much  less ; 

Gen.  iii.  1,  is  ifc   even    so 

that  ? 
*i£x  n.  m.  ashes 
r»i'^^  1^-  f-  lattice^  window 
ni^sn^  num.  yb?^^' 
D^i'l'ii^  num.  forty 
■ji^J^  n.  m.  f.  arh 
*^^i^.  n,  m.  f.  (rii)  6'<^/'^7i,,  /a^z.^? 
nSiC  V.  K.  P.  to  curse.     N. 
.     Ho.  to  he  ctirsed 
'0^^)^_  n.  Ararat 
li^J^  n.  m.  i.fre 
™i^  n.    f.    (const.    n©N  ,  pi. 

D'^irj)  wo7nan,  loife 
niri^  pron.  w7i6>,  ivhich;  conj. 

/A<^^^,  hecause;  *^^!^3  <^.9 
n^rj«  n.  f.  (d\  and  tr\) pillar 
Ti:?  sign  of  the  definite  object 
t^^5  prep,  with 
T\b^^  m.,  nK  f.  pron.  thou 

3  prep,  m,  into^  at^  with 
ni52i  n.  f.  a  ivell 


"T^a  n.  ni.  garment^  pi.  clothes 

"S    n.    m.    sejxtration ;    i'^nb 

fyZ'    A/6^    seiKiration^    i.   e. 

'^is  V.  H.  ^6>  separate^  divide, 

K  ^6>  Z>6  separated 
ribH:a  n.  hdellium 
^ni  n.  m.  emptiness 
si^Jns  n.  f.  Z>(?«6'^,  ca^f^f?^ 
xi2  V.  K.  (fut.  Nii;)  ^,9  6'(9m^. 

H.  to  cause  to  come^  hrincj. 

Ho.  to  he  hrought 
r^  prep,  hetween 
n;'i  n.  m.  (D'^na)  house 
■^pbn  adv.  7i(9Z^,  used  with  the 

infinitive 
14  n.  m.  (d''?^)  6?(97i 
n:s  V.  K.  to  huild 
1^25?!  prep,  on  account  of 
bri  n.  m.  Baal^  lord 
"ijpi  n.  m.  myorning 
Nia  V.  K.  to  create.    K  ^^(9  he 

created 
T^i?  n.  m.  hail 
ri^nin  n.  f.  covenant 
tii?  V.  K.  P.  z^^  hless.   K  Pu. 

^6)  Z>(?  hlessed 
nSna  n.  f.  (^  hlessing 
^"^^  n.  m.  flesh 
ns  n.  f.  (suf.  inzi ,  pi.  niia) 

daughter 
n'^ina  n.  f.  virgin 

bi??  V.  K.  z^^  7'(?6/<?^m.  P.  ^^  (^($y^/-? 


HEBRBW-EIN^GLISII    VOCABULARY. 


177 


lii^na  n.  Gibeon 

biiji  adj.  great ^  large 

^%  V.  K.  (f ut.  a)  to  he  great. 

P.  to  7nalce  great 
''lii  n.  m.  nation 
linj  ri,  m.  belly 
tn^l^  n.  Gihon 
b?5  V.  K.  to  roll 
Da  conj.  also  J  even 
^^■aa  n.  m.  benefit 
15  n.  m.  (Q"'35)  garden 
tins  V.  K.  P.  to  drive  out 
Dir^  n.  m.  violent  rain^  shoiv- 

er 

pii  (fut.  a)  to  cleave^  adhere. 

H.  to  overtake 
^n^  V.  P.  to  speah 
^y^  n.  in.  word 
ttJi*!  n.  m.  lioney 
T<:y\  n.  i.  fish 
*i^  V  ^-  1^-  J^avid 
nbi}  n.  f.  (ai'r^^)  c/6>^r 
D^^  n.  m.  blood 
l^^r'^  n.  f.  likeness 
pi^is'i  11.  Damascns 
pjb^  V.  K.  H.  ?f6>  crush ^inilver- 

ize 
^T}^_  n.  m.  thistle 
1^^^  n.  m.  f.  tvay 
^'^^  V.  K.  ^c>^^rm/7^^J9,saidof 

grass.  H.  to  cause  to  spring 

np.^  bring  forth  grass 
t^iy^^  n.  m.  ^?*arS5 

8* 


•r)  art.  ?5A<^ 

n  asks  a  question. 

I'^n  u.  m.  majesty 

K^n  m.  i^-^n ,  i<in  £  23ron.  he., 

she^  it^  that 
lin  n,  m.  splendor 
n^n  V.  K.  to  be 
?F?n  V.  K.  to  go.,  loalk.    H.  ijo 

cause  to  go.,  lead.    Hitli.  to 

go  for  one^s  self  walk  about 
in,  r.sn  int.  (suf.  ''ifn)  Zo  .^ 

behold! 
TsVTs  adv.  hither 

turned.      Hith.    /<?     ^i^r^i 

"in  n.   m.   (pi.    ta'inn,    const. 

^"iv)  niountain 
'ji^'^n  n.  111.  conception 

^  conj.  a?z6? 

nr  m.  tni^T  f.  bK,  nbx  pi.  pron. 

inj  n.  m.  ^'6>ZcZ 

n*;!  n.  111.  olive-tree.,  olive 

"13 T  V.  K.  to* remember 

"lit  n.  m.  mrt^^ 

nbr  n.  f.  (f^^T)  ^^^^^'d^^ 

pi?T  V.  K.  (flit,  a)  to  cry 

np:PT  n.  f.  cry 

2?'nT  V.  K.  to  soiv.    H.  to  pro* 

duce  seed 
r^iT  n.  m.  seed 


178 


HEBEEW-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


xnn  V.  H.  to  hide.    IN".  Hitli. 

to  hide  oiieh  self 
triisn  n.  f.  apron 
bjp'^n  n.  Hiddelcel^  Tigris 
tJnn  aclj.  new 
tJ'iri  n.  m.  month 
s^^^^n  n.  Havilah 
ptn  V.  K.  (f  ut.  ct)  to  he  strong 
^'H  adj.  (5^;^)  living^  alive 
♦i*n  n.    f.    (paragog.    vowel 

in^n)    life^    living   thing ^ 

heast 
''^ti  Y.  K.  to  live 
D'^'jn  n.  m.  pi.  life 
■jil^n  n.  m.  f.  windoiv 
V3n  V.  H.  to  hegin 
ybn  V.  P.  to  deliver 
^^n  V.  K.  P.  to  desire,    N. 

to  he  desired 
■'tp-'pn  mxm.  fifth 
"jisH  n.  m.  Haman 
D^fen  nvim.  fifty 
^cn  n.  m.  hindness^  mercy 
^Dti  V.  K.  if(9  he  diminished^ 

to  fail 
^m  n.  m.  (^^n)  /^aZ/- 
l")n  n.  f.  sivord 
TiJin  adj.  (Q'^T2?'?0)  <^€ctf 
•jiijn  n.  m.  darhness 


^isita  adj.  clean^pure 

^nt:  V.  K.  ^6>  Z*^  clean^  pure. 

P.  to  purify.,  cleanse.     N. 

/o  he  purified 


3ii:  adj.  ^(9(9^ 

r,?::  v.  P.  z^o  S6>^7,  c/ey^Z^ 

0*1 1:  adv.  not  yet.,  hefore 

tbi^  V.  K.   (inf.  const.  ^3;^) 

to  he  dry 
nira;^  adj.  f.  dry  land 
S^i;"  V.  K.  to  he  weary.    P.  H. 

to  ID  ear  y.,  to  cause  to  toil 
"1^  n.  f.  hand 
"S^l  V.   K.   to  Icnoio.    H.    to 

cause  to  hnoiv.,  let  hno^o 
TTiMTi  n.  m.  Jiidah 
'''iin^  n.  m.  Jeiv 
nVn;'  n.  m.  Jehovah 
nil  n.  111.  (D'^'P^)  <^<^2/ 
rw  n.  f.  (a\)  ^7^^;^ 
qpi^  n.  m.  Joseph 
^^;    V.    K.    /(9    Z>(?a7',    JWti^ 

forth.     N.  Pu.  ^^0  />^  horn 
??>;  see  tj?n 
d;'  n.  m.  (n^i?::)  ^^a 
np?^  n.  m.  Jacoh 
i52f;i     V.    K.    i!^(9   go   out.,    go 

forth.    H.  to  cause  to  go 

fortli.,  hring forth 
pi^  V.  K.  to  pour 
^"Vi  Y.  K.  (fut.  "i^r-^^.^)  to  form 
xn;  V.  K.  (fut.  i^'i^:)  z'(9/?cw' 
n*]^  V.   K.  to   go   down.,  de» 

scend 
ppTL'^n^  n.  Jerusalem 
n*];  n.  ni.  moon 
iri-''!^  11.  Jericho 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


179 


P'1^.  n.  m.  greenness 

ffin^i  or  cn^  v.  K.  H.  to  drive 

out 
b^?ni»;>  n.  m.  Israel 
sir;'  V.   K.  to  sit^  dwells  in- 

Imhit 
I©:"  V.  K.  (fut.  'jir'^:')  to  sleej) 
5>ffi';  n.  m.  salvation 

5  prep,  according  to^  as,  like 
^15  K.   (flit,  a)  to  he  heavy. 

P.    to   honor.      N.    to   he 

honored 
^135  n.  m.  honor,  glory . 
iris  V.  K.  P.  to  suhdite.    N. 

to  he  suhdued 
ro  adv.  thus,  so 
•jnb  n.  m.  ][)riest 
isis  11.  in.  star 
bis  V.  P.  (bi^s)  to  contain 
TTi'^s  n.  111.  Cash 
^^  coiij.  for,   hecause,   that  j 

after  a  negative  hut 
Vs  n.  111.  (suf.  ife)  all,  every, 

the  'whole 
^5^3  V.   K.    to  ivithhold,  re- 
strain. N.  to  he  restrained 
nbs  V.  K.  to  coiyie  to  an  end. 

P.  to  comi^lete,  finish.    Pu. 

to  he  finished 
'^^s  n.  m.  (D'ibs)  vessel,  article 
"J?  adv.  5^.    1?  ^t  therefore 
?153  n.  f.  roing 
i<cs  n.  m.  (ini)  throne 


5)95  n.  111.  silver 

qs  n.  f.   (d:23)  ^aZ;?z  of  the 

hand,  sole  of  the  foot 
2l"iD  11.  111.  cheruh 
nns  V.  K.  ^'(9  cut,  cutofir,  nuike 

a  covenant.     H.  to  cut  oft. 

Ho.  to  he  cut  6>jf 
D"^f"ffi?  11.  111.  pi.  Chaldees 
r,:n3  n.  f.  (pL  z^i^ns,  const 

ni:n3)  titnic 

^  prep,  to,  for 

i^b  adv.  ?2.<9^ 

nb  11.  ni.  (r^isb)  heart 

nnb  n.  m.  (^i)  A^'^r^ 

iij'nb  or  tJ'nb  v.  K.  (fut.  «)  to 

ind   on,  wear,  he  clothed 

ivith.    H.  to  cause  to  jrmt 

on,  to  clothe 
t2nb  n.  m.  fiaine 
onb  11.  m.  f.  hread 
br'b  11.  111.  (nb^b  §  48.  2,  pi.  ni) 

night 
pb  V.  K.  to  lodge 
^bsb  see  D"^:? 
"ibb  V.  K.  to  capture 
npb  V.  K.  to  take.     K  Pu. 

Ho.  to  he  taken 

"i^^  adv.  very 
nic-a  num.  hundred 
"iis73  11.  ni.  (D"'.  and  m')  Z/^A^, 
luniinary 


bb^^-a  n.  m. 


/(9^6? 


180 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABULAEY. 


^i'l'a  n.  m.  tmlderness 

TO  pron.   loliatf    whatever ; 

riTzS,  rs%)  for  ^v]lat?  lolnjf 
•^C"^  n.  m.  instritction 
1?i^  n.  m.  (d"".  and  tT\^  season. 
twi  V.  K.  to  die.    Ho.  to  he 

put  to  death 
T\ra  n.  m.  death 
riiT)2  11.  m.  (ni)  altar 
r.D^  11.  f.  led 

"^1212  V.  H.  to  cause  to  rain 
^"^^  n.  111.  rain 
^^  pron.  ivho?  whoever 
D^'i?  n.  111.  pi.  water 
Yci  11.  m.  species^  hind 
^yq  V.  K.  to  sell 
i<^^  V.  K.  to  fill  or  Z^^/^^Z/.    P. 

to  fill.    X  Pu.  ^^^  Z^^/ZZ^^ 
n5s*bi2    n.    f.    (const.    riDxb^. 

Suf.    iDDiCb^D  )  ^i^6>7'y^ 

rrbnb^  n.  f.  ivar^  fighting 
l{tq  V.  K.   to   reign.     H.  ^'t* 

ccmse  to   reicjn^   to   malod 

Mng.    Ho.  to  he  made  hlng 
tfb'a  n.  m.  hing 
•isb'a  n.  f.  qtteen 
t^'dz^  n.  f.  (§  9.  7)  Uncjdom 
nibis^    11.    f.    (const,    i"?'^^^) 

Mngdoni 
nbir)9^   n.   f.    (const.   ^"'^'''9"'?) 

dominion  J  ride 
I''?  11.  m.  manna 
\Q     prep,     fromj    out    of; 


ti^i:^  n.  m.  o'est 

5?':ia  V.  K.  to  withhold^  l:eep 
hack.     1^.  to  he  withheld 

t:i?T9  n.  a  little 

t:r)9  H.  to  mctke  smcdl  ovfeiv 

i::?^  11.  m.  (n\  and  m) 
fountain 

b?ia  adv.  ahove 

rvyxi  n.  f.  (const,  f^!}?^)  <?a^6 

«?^  V.  K.  to  find 

nn^)3  n.  f.  statue 

T\yiri  n.  f.   conimandment 

r."ppn.  111.  gathering  together^ 
collection 

Dip^  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  ^9Za<?^ 

^^-q  n.  f.  J[/a7^^  (Z>2'«^^^-;') 

^^y^  n.  m.  6'^^A/^,  appear- 
ance 

^y^y^  n.  m.  Mordecai 

r\m^  V.  K.  /(9  anoint 

■jSTTia  n.  m.  tahernacle^  divell- 
ing 

bm  V.  K.  i^(9  ride^  with  2  be- 
fore its  object.  H.  to  cause 
to  rule 

t2STC^  n.  m.  judgment 

^5  particle  of  entreaty,  noiL\ 

pray^  I  pray  tliee 
"li;  V.  H.  to  tell.  Ho.  to  he  told 
"ij;  prep,  hefore^  in  the  pres- 
ence of  over  against;  nj2D 
corresponding  to^  a  coun* 
terpart 


hebeew-e:n"glish  vocabulary. 


181 


5?i?  V.    K.   to  touchy  with  ^ 

before  its  ol:)ject 
llJip  V.  K.  N.  to  ajjijroacli 
'iro  n.  111.  (d*^.  and  rii)  river 
n^D  V.   K.  to  re^t.     H.  (n^- 

or  tl'^sn)   to  cause  to  rest^ 

put^  ]?lace 
rtb   n.  m.  Noah 
T2Jn?  n.  111.  8er])ent 
5?i2;  V.  K.  to  plant 
'^ipsyj  D.  f.  Naomi  {sweet) 
"ysi   n.  m.  young  man 
n£;  V.  K.  to  hreathe^  Uoiv 
bs3  V.  K.  ^6»  /«^^,  yb^Z 
t:S2    n.   m.   f.    (n\   and    mi) 

Jiij?3  n.  f.  female 
i^irs  V.  H.  to  deceive 
D-iTTS  see  r<m 
HTair:  n.  f.  ^rm^A 
T'ri;  V.  P.  ^(?  demolish 
ins   V.   K.    ^6>  ^it'<?,  p)^^^'-    ^• 
Ho.  ^6>  ^(?  given 

iio  V.  K.  ^f6>  snrroiind 

nio  V.  K.  P.  to  shut^  shut  ^ip. 

N.  Pu.  to  he  shut.    H.  to 

cause  to  shut 
"^DD  V.  N.  to  he  shut.,  stopped 
2?bo  n.  m.  rock 
*^so  V.  P.  to  recount.,  tell 

"n?  V.  K.  to  serve.,  till 
^n?  n.  m.  servant 


nn:j  v.  K.  to  pass.  H.  to 
cause  to  pass 

"1?  prep,  uiito.,  until 

T&"^  n.  f.  company.,  assem- 
\>ly 

n?  n.  Eden 

"lis?  adv.  yet.,  hesides 

b'lS?  n.  m.  sucMing^  hahe 

apiy  n.  m.  eternity ;  0^15^^ 
forever 

C]i5?  n.  m.  foiol.,  hirds 

ri'^r'  V.  K.  P.  2^6?  /y 

"i^.y  adj.  hlind 

"li:?  n.  m.   (ni)  s^m 

3t:^  v.  K.  to  leave.,  forsake 

itb  n.  m.  help 

•^t:?  V.  P.  to  crotvn 

■^:?  n.   (with  art.)   Ai 

ri?  n.  f.  (d:' :>•:?)  6?/^ 

"i''r  n.  f.  (D^ny)  c?% 

D'i-'?  n.  m.  (D-iisn^?)  naked- 
ness^ naked 

b?  prep.  up>on^  ovei\  concern- 
ing 

nS?  V.  K.  to  go  up.  H.  to 
hring  up.,  offer 

r.b>  n.  in.  leaf 

nbi;  n.  f.  hurnt-offering 

"^bs?  n.  m.  j^/z: 

abb  see  obiy 

d:?  n.  ni.  {u^^v)  jmyple 

n^  prep,  (""i?:?  or  '^iiey)  ivith 

ni::?  v.  K.  /6>  stand 

-IS?  n.  m.   (ni)  dust 


182 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOBABULARY. 


f  ?  n.  m.  tvee^  and  collectively 
trees 

1^%  n.  m.  ])ain^  sorrow 

"jii^S^  n.  m.  j96^/?2',  sorroio 

D^:b  n.  f.  (d\  and  ni)  Z'(9?i6^ 

njb;^  n.  m.  (const,  nj??;,  pL 
D"".  and  ^li)  A6'^Z 

n^i?  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  evening 

nnb  n.  m.  raven 

Din:?  aclj.  (TO':}?)  7iaX^<?<:Z 

0^*1?  adj.  cnnnincj^  subtle 

"im  n.  m.  (ni)  lierh 

nib:^  v.  K.  to  do^  make^  pro- 
duce.   N.  to  he  done^  made 

1*?  n.  m.  Usau 

"lito?  n.  m.  decade^  ten 

^T*^?  num.  te)ith 

t^V  n.  m.  f.  (D^'riS?)  time  in  the 
sense  of  duration 

nn:?  adv.  now 

n&  n.  m.  (const,  '^s)  mouth 

liib'^s  n.  Pison 

n^nirbs  n.  m.  pi.  the  Philistines 

"^S  COnj.  Z^S^,  ^A(^?5  71(9^ 

D^iDS  n.  m.  pi. /a<?^;  ^?sb  or 
'':£"b:?  before^  in  the  pres- 
ence of 

D?lb  n.  m.  f.  time  in  tlie  sense 
of  repetition 

rij:s  V.  K.  ^6)  «9p6'?i  tlie  eyes. 
N.  to  he  opened 

*Til3  V.  K.  P.  H.  to  separate^ 
part    N.  Pu.  to  he  parted 


nns  V.  K.  to  he  fruitful 
"•is  n.  m..  fruit 
ni^-12  n.  m.  Pharaoh 
"isns  n.  Pharpar 
i^'^s  n.  Euphrates 
t2ibs  V.  K.  ^(9  ^a/l^^  6>jf  clothes 
nns  V.  K.  to  open,    N.  to  ht 
opened 

^y%  n.  m.  (D\  and  ni)  A6>6^^ 

pni  n.  m.  righteousness 

r\yi  V.  P.  z^6>  command 

t^ii  n.  f.  Z/(97i. 

obi  n.  m.  image 

:??':?  n.  f.  (const.  5^bi,  pi.  d\ 

and  rii)  side^  rih 
nia  V.  K.  P.  to  sprout^  to  shoot 

forth.  H.  to  cause  to  sprout 
Hjb^'^  n.  f.  cry 
nn?  n.  f.  {tr\%)  trouhle 

bnp  V.  P.  to  receive^  accept 

fii?  V.  P.  to  gather.  N.  to  he 
gathered 

"lij?  V.  K.  to  hury.  N.  to  he 
huried 

D"i]b  n.  m.  east 

ri^^j?  n.  i.  former  state 

n-anp  n.  f.  east 

T2J1|5  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  he  holy. 
P.  H.  to  sanctify^  conse- 
crate. N.  Pu.  to  he  sancti- 
fied. Hith.  to  sanctify  or 
purify  one^s  self 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


183 


tjip  n.  m.  lioliness^  a  lioly  n-"i  \ 

])lace  or  tiling 
nij?  V.  N.  to  he  gathered  to- 
gether 
bip  n.  m.  (rii)  voice^  sound 
a^p  V.  K.  to  arise 
f  ip  n.  m.  thorn 
Vjp,   i-jp   adj.    (ni-Jp)    //^i^?^, 

small 
^"jp  V.  H.  ^0  Z'i^?',^  incense 
rriibp  n.  f.  incense 
bb'p  V.  K.  ^6>  Z'^  //^A^,  dimin- 

islied 
n'^bp  n.  f.  (^  (?i/7*6'6 
fp  11.  m.  end 
nip  n.  m.  end 
i^np  V.  K.  to  call.    N.  Pu.  ?^o 

he  called 
nSp  V.  K.   (flit,  a)   to  come 
near^    aijproach.     H.    to 
hring  luar^  offer 
S^np  V.  K.  to  rend 
ni^n    V.   K.   (fiit.  witli  Yav 
«n'^i)    ^6>    6'^^.     N.    to    he 
seen,  a])pear 
i:^'\  11.  111.  (□■''Irxn)  head,  source 
n'^ir^^-i  11.  f.  h  eg  inning 
nn  adj.   (y^%'i)  much,  many 
rii  V.  K.  ^(9  ^<?  many,  mul- 
tijply  intrans.     P.  H.  (inf. 
abs.  ninn)  to  mahe  many, 
imdtijjly  trans. 
""T^")  num.  fourth 
bn  n.  f.   (pliT^)  foot 


K.  /6)  ?'z^Z(^,  leave  do- 
minion 

D^isnn  n.  m.  \A.  troughs 

r]T\  n.  111.  f .  (ni)  hreath,  ivind, 
Sjnrit 

f^"i  V.  K.  /6>  run 

D^rr^  adj.  merciful 

C'^n^!  n.  111.  pi.  mercies,  com- 
jyassions 

Tinn  V.  P.  ^^(9  hrood,  hover 
over 

ynn  A^.  K.  to  wash 

n"^!  V.  K.  to  contend 

iL-rn  V.  K.  to  creep 

te^"^  n.  111.  creeping  thing, 
reptile 

ti^_  adj.   (n?n)  Z^a^^,  ^z^^7 

n^n  n.  m.  famine 

r.yn  n.  f.  evil 

Vy')  n.  ni.  firmament 

niis  n.  m.   (d\  and  ni)  field 

n-^t?  n.  in.  hush,  shruh 

n-^ir)  V.  K.  to  place 

b5is  V.  H../6>  Z><?  wise,  act  wisely 

n^sbilJ  n.  f.  garment 

nrnpii)  n.  f.  gladness 

pi?  n.  m.  sachcloth 

qnir  V.  K.  ^6>  Z/^^/'/i 

•jiiio  n.  in.  joy 

rrins©  n.  f.  remna)d 
^i^-ino  num.  seventh 
:?no  V.  N.  to  swear 


184 


hebeew-Ejs^glish  vocabulary. 


^rv  f.^nir  n.  m.  seventeen 
^^yt  X.  P.  to  hreah  in  pieces 
nni?  Y.  K.   (flit.  0  and  a)  to 

rest,  cease,  Jceep  Sahhath. 

H.  to  cause  to  rest  or  cease 
nic  n.  m.f.  (suf.  inST?)  Sah- 
hath 
Dm'^'  n.  m.  onyx 
y^t  V.  K.  to  return.    P.  H.  to 

cause  to  return,  hring  hade 
vj^ilj  V.  K.  to  hruise,  crush 
nntj  V.  H.  to  destroy 
rr^t}  V.  K.  to  put 
nil?  V.  K.  to  lie  doivn 
nbt  Y.  K.  toforcjet 
tjiiJ^  V.  K.  to  suhside 
^30  Y.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  he  he- 

reaved,     P.  to  hereave 
Dii?  Y.  H.  /6)  Ws^  ea7'ly 
li'i?  Y.  K.  if6>  divell,   P.  H.  /o 

^L^'2^s<9  to  divell,  to  station 
n?T5  Y.  K.  P.  H.  ^6»  send,  send 

away,  put  forth 
^T^'^t  num.  third 
tfb'ir  Y.  H.  ^(9  cast 
riiabir  n.  m.  Solomon 
Qi?  adY.  there ;  nisij  thither 
DiT  n.  m.  (rii)  name 
b^i^^ir  n.  ra.  Samuel 
D;^'bTlj  n.  m.  pi.  heaven 
1)2  in  n.  m.  6>^7 
5^)315  Y.  K.   ^6)  7^(?ar,  witli  a 

direct  object  or  with  ^ ; 

to  hearhen 


"i^U)'  Y.  K.  to  heep,  ohserve,  N. 
to  heejy  one^s  self,  take  heed 

t'qt^  n.  m.  f.  6'^^;^^ 

nr^'  n.  f.  (d\)  year 

"^i^"  n.  m.  crimson 

^iil?*  num.  second 

D:^:t?"  m.  d:'!?!?'  f.  num.  /^/j<9 

ri'iit'  adY.  a  second  time 

n?ib  n.  m.  f.  (d\)  gate 

nnsT23  n.  f.  handmaid 

nj^t'  Y.  H.  /(9  (?<:m6'^  ^^(9  drinlc, 
to  water 

bj^ii?'  n.  m.  shelcel 

^yS2  Y.  K.  to  creep)',  teem  loith, 
increase  ahundctntly 

•f^i?  n.  m.  creeping  thing,  rep- 
tile 

^'m  num.  sixth 

ni^n  n.  f.  desire 

n:«n  n.  f.  i^^  ?}  fig-tree,  fig 

nnn  n.  f.  arh 

^rin  n.  m.  desolateness 

Dinp  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  ocean,  the 

deep 
tj^ri  n.  m.  midst 
ni^bip  n.  f.  pi.  generations 
nnn  prep,  under,  instead  of 
^31?  n.  m.  sea-monster 
"isn  Y.  K.  ?^<9  seio 
iasn   Y.  K.  ?5^  lay   hold  of 

seize 
n^'nnn  n.  f.  deep  sleep 
njb^irri  n.  £  desire 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


Aaron  pn^ 

above  ^^.^ . 

to  accej}^  ^3p  P. 

according  to  3 

on  account  of  "^"i^?? 

to  adhere  p3'7  K. 

afteo^  -iHi^ 

Ahah  ni?ni5 

Ai  '^:?n 

cdl  biD 

Amanali  n:^i5 

/6>  anoint  nc^  K. 
apron  ^y^y^. 
to  appear  ni<n  N. 
appearance  ^'^^y^ 
to  approach  '^Ti  K.  N. ; 
K. 

ark  liii^ 
article  "^^ 

as  3  ,  "itciit? 


^"^P 


ashes  "i?x 
assenihly  nny 

had  yn 

hdelliiirn  nb^n 

^'^  Z'^  n^n  K. 

^6>  Z>6'r^'r  (hring forth)  ^\T  K. 

^<?c?6^^  (domesticated)  nrinn 

Z>6<25^  (wild)  ri^n 

because  "iii^iiJ ,   ''3 

^^^  ni2^ 

before  adv.  Dyj 

before  prep,  "iji ,  '^rSb  ,  ''is-b^ 

^o  begin  bbn  H. 

beginning  rr'csn 

behold  in ,  riin 

Z'^/i^^^^  b^)2a 

^(9  bereave  bbiL'  P. 

^6>  Z>t?  bereaved  bbi?  K. 

besides  "T\^ 

between  V^i 


186 


ENGLISH-HEBEEW    VOCABULARY. 


to    hiess    ^!i3     K.    (only   in 

pass,  part.)  P. 
Messing  rona 
blind  ^^2? 
hlood  D'7 
to  How  nsj  K. 
hone  D2::b 
to  he  horn  "lb;  ]S1. 
hread  cnb' 
to  hrectk  in  pieces  "^.nij  P. 

to  hreathe  nsp  K. 

^6>  hring  xin  H. 

/^  ^r/?^,^  hach  nitJ  P.  H. 

ifo  hring fortli  N^;  H. 

i^6>  hring  fortli  children  "i^l  H. 

Jf^  hring  forth  grass  i51L^T  H. 

/^t)  Z>7'm^  near  nnp  H. 

??6>  ^^"m^  ujp  5ib:j  H. 

2f(9  Z>r6>(9i  qnn  P. 

hrother  n^f 

^<9  hruise  5]^t?  K. 

i^6>  Z>^('^/^  ri;s  K. 

^6>  Z'2^r;i.  qtib  K. 

to  hum  incense  ^^^  II. 

hum  t-offerin  g  nbb 

to  hnry  "injp  K. 

hut  (after  a  negative)  '^3 

to  call  i^np  K. 
to  capture  ^Db  K. 
^(9  cast  tjbt?  H. 


cave  nn^^a 

Chaldees  tr^^m 
clierul)  mn3 

^(9  ^^  clean  "in^  K. 

?^6>  cleanse  "int:  P. 

i?(9  cleave  {adhere^  pn"!  K. 

^<9  (?Z6>^A(?  TiJ'nb  H. 

to   he   clothed   with   f'nb   or 

Tijnb  K. 
clothes  D'^'^JSi 
collection  nip'a 
?^<9  <?6>;/Z(^  i5i3  K. 

z^(9  command  n;^  P. 
commandment  nii^p 
comj)any  nn:^ 
compassions  Q^'^l'i 
^6>  convplete  nb^  P. 
conception  li"^"in 
concerning  b:? 
^6>  consecrate  tJnjp  P.  H. 
^6>  contain  bi3  P. 
/<9  contend  n^n  K. 
corresponding  to  "ijbs 
counterpart  1^53 
covenant  n^na 
?^6>  create  x'^3  K. 

2'6>  6Te6^  12?^'!  K.,  p©  K. 

creeping  thing  toj,  pi? 
crimson  ^^'^ 
to  crown  ^'on  P. 


ENGLISH-HEBREW    VOCABULARY. 


187 


to  crush  p)?7  K.  IL,  iri^tJ  K. 

cry  npi^T ,  njpi^s 

to  cry  p?T  K. 

cunning  ^t\V 

to  curse  "I'^x  K.  P. 

curse  nbbp 

Gush  TT^ 

to  cut  nns  K. 

to  cut  off  nns  K.  H. 

Damascus  'p^^'^ 

darhness  ^tn 

daughter  na 

David  "TU 

day  ni"^ 

deaf  -(^y) 

death  t^)ii 

to  he  init  to  death  Jn^ia  Ho. 

decade  "litJ? 

to  deceive  ^^^3  H. 

the  deep  oinn 

to  defile  bsa  P.,  q:-j  P. 

i^(9  deliver  fbn  P. 

^6>  demolish  friD  K. 

^o  descend  nn^  K. 

{7mr6'  n^s^n,  n^iirn 

/6>  desire  n^n  K.  P. 

desolateness  ^nn 

^0  c^^.s^^r^y  ^ni<  P.,  nn-^  H. 

2f^  (f^^  r^^^a  K. 

to  divide  bna  H. 

to  do  riiDV  K. 

dominion  J^biriaia 

^<9  Aa^^  dominion  r\"T\  K. 


to  cause  to  drinh  T\pt  H. 
to  drive  out  ©'nj  K.  P.,  tci; 

or  tn^^  K.  H. 
dry  land  mrn^ 
to  be  dry  ©n;"  K. 
dust  "iBr 

^6>  c/'^^;^/Z  mr;"  K.,  p©  K. 
dioelling  "JSt^^ 

^6>  rise  early  DD©  H. 

east  nn]b,  niaip 

(97^  i^/i(?  east  of  b  D^il^ 

^<9  eat  bDX  K. 

Edom  aii« 
Eleazar  ij^bi^ 
^/^  '''?? 
emptiness  ^s^ia 

enmity  rin'^x 

eternity  ^^3 
Euphrates  rinss 

evening  n"i^ 

every  bb 

6w7  adj.  s?"!,  11.  n^n 


188 


ENGLISH-HEBREW    VOCABULARY. 


face  d:*?^,  n^?? 
to  fail  '^sp  K. 
to  fall  523  K. 
famine  2?"^ 
father  nij 
to  fear  ^n 
female  nn|?3 
to  make  feiv  ^T^  H. 
field  n^iri 

fi(j^fig-t^'eQ  ^?^^ 

■fighting  ^^^^ 
to  fill  sb^  K.'  P. 
^0  //?//  i5?^  K. 
to  finish  nbs  P. 
fire  T»&5 
firmament  V^^ 

fiame  tin? 

i(^  ///  ^-12?  K.  p. 
food  "yy^y^. 

foot  b^n 

for  conj.  ''^ ,  prep,  b 

forever  obiyb 

to  forget  hdtd  K. 

to  form  ^V:  K. 

former  state  «^^7P 

to  forsake  nr?  K. 

from  I'a 


^(?  he  fruitful  nn?  K. 
i^6>  ^<?/i^ZZ  i^b^  K. 

garden  ')5 
garment  "iji  ?  •^'?V^ 

^6>  (7<^^A(?r  Tni?  P. 
^(?  Z>^  gathered  together  ni]^  N 
gathering  together  n^pia 
generations  niibin 

^(9  give  light  "^i^  H. 
gladness  rirnaisj 
glory  Tins 
?^o  ^^  !jbn  K. 

256>  goforth^  go  out  ^Tr  K. 

^6>  ,^<9  UJ)  ThV  K. 

good  nii: 
God'^i^,  D-'n'bx 

^r(?(^^  bi"ij 
?^6>  ^^  great  bn^  K. 
2^6>  ma/^<^  g7'eat  b^a  P. 
greenness  p*^*^ 
ground  ™ni5 

7^a^7  ^:? 
Ilaman  "J^n 


EJ^GLISH'HEBKEW    VOCABULARY. 


189 


handmaid  nrisip 
Ilavilah  nb">nn 

incense  ^^^^^ 

to  barn  incense  'it:p  H. 

he  i5^n 
head  ilJi^'i 

^6>  ^?i  crease  abun  dan  tly  y"i  t  YL 
indeed  DJtiX 

to  hear  "Srit  K. 
to  hearhen  5?^©  K. 

^^  inhabit  nt;"  K. 
instead  of  nnn 

heart  nb ,  n^b 

instruction  ^ci:q 

lieetven  D^^tj 

/6>  ^^  heavy  1?3  K. 

^6»  ^^/yl'^  A^^dZ  -172©  N. 

heel  np:^ 

IliddeM  bpijn 
/t*  A/(f6  «3n  H. 

Jacob  ip?^ 
Jehovah  {"on^ 
Jericho  in  in]' 
Jerusalem  pbtc^i^ 

A^7A^r  n|n 

J^2^  I'l^rp 

^6>  lay  hold  of  ©sn  K. 
holiness  ©'^p 

Joseph  rioi*! 

,7^y  "jitJi? 
Judali  Tyr\r\^^ 
judgment  "C^tti 

/6>  A^^ic*?'  "rn?  P. 
liost  i?n^ 
house  t\^,% 

to  hecp  ^^^  K. 

i^6>  ^'(^^  Z><26'^'  y:^  K. 

/(9  7:<?^j?>  Sabbath  nn©  K. 

to  hover  over  qn-n  P. 

^•/7z^  n.  rri 
Mndness  non 

mucli  more  id. 
husband  ©"^x 

^^^  make  l:ing  ^fb-a  II. 
Mngdom  n^sbia ,  JiDb^a^ 

^6>  ^.7^<9'?^  SJ'ii   K. 

J  ^?« ,  ''prx 

/(?  ?<?z^  7:??,6'7/;  s?*!;  H. 

if  =« 

image  obi 

larcje  biij 

190 


ENGLISH-HEBREW    VOCABULARY. 


to  lead  ^^n  H. 

leaf  nbij 

to  leave  ^1^  K. 

lest  -J? 

to  lie  doivn  i?T?  K. 

life  n^n,  D'^^^n,  tt^d 

light  nis 

a  light  nis^a 

i^6>  give  light  *ii^  H. 

liheness  ^^^'n 

Z/^/Z6    PI? 

a  little  t)?^ 

^"(9  /^'^^6  \^n,  n;^ri  K. 

living  '^n 

living  thing  njn 

Zo/  in,  nan 

2^0  Z6»^/<76  r^  K. 

lord  ri2f ,  b:?a 

2^^  ?6>z;6  nnij  K. 
Inminary  "lii^ia 

onajesty  "^"^n 

^0  m«Z^(5  ni??  K. 

/6>  ma^(5  a  covenant  tr\2  K. 

/(9  onakefeiv  or  small  t^^'a  H- 

^6>  ?/i<2/i?6  ^m<7  tjb^  H. 

to  make  many  nnn  P.  H. 

male  '^^t 

young  man  ^?5 
manna  yq 
m.any  1*^ 


^6>  Z>^  many  nnn  K. 

master  pii? 
mercies  D''''2n'? 
merciful  D^nn 
mercy  "ID^ 
midst  ^jn 

raonth  t>yr\ 
Tuoon  n*;}^ 
Mordecai  ^TTP^ 
morning  ^^^ 
mother  D&5 
mouth  ns 

^r>>  midtijyly  intrans.  nnn  K., 
trans,  nn^  P.  H. 

naked  Diiij' 

nakedness  D'"^"'? 

name  u^. 

Naomi  ^riV) 

nation  ^^^ 

to  hring  near  n'lp  H. 

night  b;^^ 

i\^^(^A  nb 

nostril  V\^_ 

not  bx  ,  -'pbn ,  i^b 

#7z/6'7'<^  '/s  7?.6>?5  or  was  not  X^^ 

that  not  "IS 

not  yet  Dvj 

notv  (entreaty)  ^5! ,  (time)  7\rp_ 


ENGLISH-HEBREW    VOCABULARY. 


191 


to  observe  *^^t?  K. 

ocean  oinn 

to  offer  nb^  H.,  nnjj  H. 

oil  1^1? 

olive^  olive-tree  rr^T 

one  ^nx 

onyx  Dnizj 

^6>  ojyeii  nns  K. 

1^(9  6?/?^7i  the  eyes  njs  K. 

6>r  (in  a  disjunctive  question) 

out  ofyc^ 
over  b^ 

c>^<?r  against  "1J5 
overtake  pn^  H. 

^6>j9ari^  T?  K.  P.  H. 

people  us 
to  perish  "lasj  K. 
Fharaoh  nis^ns 
Pilar  par  "iS';)S 
Philistines  cncbs 

/>Z«^(?6  Dip^a 

to  place  ni3  H.,  D^to  K. 

to  plant  rjj  K. 

/^6>  J96>Z^r  p?j   K. 

j9r«y  /   I  pray  thee  ^55 

m  the  presence  ^  "Tji  ,  ''3£ib  ^ 

priest  1v}3 

^<?  produce  ntoj  K. 


i^(9  produce  seed  5^'nT  H. 
to  pidverize  pp'i  K.  H. 
j92^r(j  "lint: 
^6>  he  pure  "irii:  K. 
to  purify  "ini:  P. 
to  purify  one's  self  ir'ip  Hith. 
z^(9j92^^  ni3  H.,  ]n:  K.,  ni®  K. 
to  put  forth  nbiD  K.  P. 
?^(9  put  on  clothes  f'nb  or  irinb 
K. 


queen 


nsb^ 


^6>  (?«z^5<9  ^6>  ^'(^^/^  "^toia  H. 
^'^  receive  bnp  P. 
^6>  recount  "iso  P. 
^6*  redeem  bxa  K. 

^(9  ?*(?/^M  ?[b)2  K. 

^(?  reniemher  "^^T  K. 
remnant  riini^ir 
^6>  ^(^/^(^  s^tip  K. 

respecting  "bs? 

i^6>  r^6^^  n^D  K.,  nnio  K. 

to  return  intrans.  S^o  K. 

rib  5?b2 

righteousness  p'^i 
^c>  ?•^s^  ^<:^;7y  dd©  H. 
r^'^;6-r  "inj 

?^^  roZ^  bb5  K. 

rule  5^^^^^ 

iJo  rule  bc)a  K.,  rrin  K. 


192 


ENGLISH-HEBREW   VOCABULARY. 


to  run  lfr\  K. 

Sahhath  na© 

to  Iceej)  Sahhath  t^:lw  K. 

sackcloth  pi? 

salvation  "^*]_. 

Samuel  b^^-QiD 

to  sanctify  irnp  P.  H. 

to  say  n^i5  K. 

sea  D^ 

sea  monster  I'^sn 

season  "?i^ 

second  ^i?^ 

<3^  second  tiuie  rr^piC' 

25c>  5^6  nsj-n  K. 

seed  vii 

to  produce  seed  "$^1   H* 

to  seize  tossj 

to  sell  ^yq  K. 

^0  send^  send  aioay  Thi^  K. 

P.  H. 
to  separate  b'l?  H.,  nn&  K.  P. 

H. 
separation  ^5 
serpent  ©nj 
servant  ^5^ 

seventh  ^V^:^, 

to  seiv  "^sn  K. 

^/^^  «^n 

shekel  ^p'^ 

i^(?  5Am^  "ii«  K.  N. 

to  shoot  forth  "nm  K.  P. 

shruh  H'lto 

j^o  5^2^^,  shut  up  ^?D  K. 


silver  v]c| 
s^6?^(?7'  ninx 
i5(9  sit  mij;' 

to  sleep  1T?,^  K. 
deep  sleep  n^-i'in 

to  make  small  "om  H. 

so  nb,  15 
2^0  5^^7  q?tf)  P. 
Solomon  nb'btj 

sorroio  ^:ji? ,  li^?i? 

sound  bip 
source  tJ^i 

^(?   S^^(2^  "IH'I   P. 

species  ^^ 

spirit  VtT\ 

splendor  "lin 

^6)  spring  up  (said  of  grass) 

ficm  K. 
^6>  sprout  H'asf  K.  P. 

2^^   S^^7?.6/  ^^?   K. 

star  iDi3 

?5(?  station  15^  P.  H. 

stone  15^ 

^0  &6  strong  ptH  K. 


EKGLISH-IIEBREW    V0CAi3ULARY. 


193 


to  suhdue  t»33  K.  P. 

to  cause  to  toil  r.v  P.  H. 

suhtle  n^n? 

to  touch  VTr  K. 

suckling  b^y 

tree^  trees  f?. 

sun  iS'^.t? 

trouble  rnsf 

to  surroimd  sno  K. 

troughs  D''t:?i"i 

to  swear  5'ni?  N. 

^<9  he  found  true  1^J$  N. 

siveat  nyr 

z^/"?^./?/  d:i9^ 

sword  n'^n 

^2^m6?  TiSPS 

^{>  ^^?"^  ^sn  K. 

tahernacle  isTT'a 

^i^6>  d^:tc 

^^  to^^  n;:b  K. 

to  take  off  clothes  T2t?s  H. 

under  nnn 

^c?  ^6^m  with  f"?©  K. 

?^7^^5^7  n? 

256>  ?ft^?^  1??  H.,  nsD  P. 

'?^/^?f(9  "b^ ,  "1!? 

^^?^i5  bni^ 

■U2wn  b? 

z^Aai5  conj.  "^T^s^,  'is^  pron.  i^'^n 

^>  -i^s 

tJiat  not  "]5 

the  -n 

vapor  "li? 

^7^<?7i  Ti5 

to  Z>6  verified  Ta«  N. 

?7l(57^6  D© 

t'^ry  'li^'a 

therefore  1?  b:? 

vessel  ''bs 

^Aw'6^  ''TC^b;^ 

virgin  fib^na 

^A^,§  r.T 

'?;6>iC(?  bip 

^7i2'5?5/6  ^'n^'^ 

thither  n^iy 

to  wa?/^  ^bn  K. 

thorn  fip 

to  '^^^<77^  about  tjbn  Hith. 

^A^^-z^  nPi? 

?/;ar  nisnb'Q 

throne  «5S 

to  '?/;<2.s7?.  Tnn  K. 

^/ms  rib 

water  D;^"a 

T^yf6'  bip'in 

to  loater  npT»  H. 

z'c*  ^//Z  nn:^  K.    . 

'?^«y  ?f")t! 

time  (duration)  ns? 

to  loear  iZJ^b  or  tJ'nb  K, 

time  (repetition)  D?? 

to  weary  "^T,  P.  H. 

9 

to  Z>^  weary  :??;  K. 

194 


ENGLISH-HEBREW   VOCABULARY. 


well  n.  "ib^a 
whatf  rm 
tvliatever  tt/i 
whence?  tM'^ 
where?  "'i? ,  n'^i? 
which  "^^?'^i! 
^oMtlier?  njx 
who  "n?'i!5 
wlio?  ''tJ 
wlioever  ''tt 
whole  ^3 
why  ?  TMi}  ,  nttb 
'^^^/'^  nisx 
ivilderness  ^"^yi^ 
wind  T\T\ 


window  "^^^^.^ 

to  he  wise  b?ii?  H. 

to  act  ivisely  bDig  H. 

ivith  ni5,  a,  d:^ 

to  xoithhold  i^bs  K.,  T^  K. 

tvomcm  T\^'^ 

word  ^'T) 

iDorh  S^?i5^^ 

yet  "iw 

young  man  *^?b 

Zion  "ji'^S 


